Microsoft SQL Server

Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator's Guide
for Enterprise Edition
Published By
Notice of Copyright
Published by Maximizer Software Inc.
Copyright ©1988-2017
All rights reserved.
Registered Trademarks and Proprietary Names
Product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of
Maximizer Software Inc. or other hardware, software, or service providers and are used
herein for identification purposes only.
Applicability
This document applies to Maximizer CRM 2018 software.
Maximizer Software Address Information
AMERICAS (HEAD OFFICE)
Maximizer Services Inc.
Sales +1 800 804 6299
Phone +1 604 601 8000
Email info@maximizer.com
Website www.maximizer.com
EUROPE / MIDDLE EAST / AFRICA
Maximizer Software Ltd.
Phone +44 (0) 1344 766 900
Email enquiries@maximizer.com
Website www.maximizer.com/uk
AUSTRALIA / NEW ZEALAND
Maximizer Software Solutions Pty. Ltd.
Phone +61 (0) 2 9957 2011
Email info.anz@maximizer.com
Website www.maximizer.com/au
Contents
i
Contents
Chapter 1
Introduction ............................................................................1
Maximizer System Requirements .................................................................2
Maximizer CRM Enterprise Edition System Requirements ..................2
Maximizer CRM Modules and Components ................................................4
Sample Address Books ..................................................................................5
Network Configuration ................................................................................6
Related Documentation................................................................................7
Chapter 2
Setting Up Microsoft SQL Server ...........................................9
Planning the Installation ............................................................................10
Installing Microsoft SQL Server ..................................................................10
Installing a Database Server ................................................................11
Full-Text Search Component of SQL Server ...............................................13
Using Full-Text Search in Maximizer ...................................................13
File Types Available for Full-Text Search .............................................14
Enabling Full-Text Search in Existing Address Books .........................15
Removing Full-Text Search Catalogs from Address Books.................17
Chapter 3
Configuring Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS) ..19
Maximizer Components Requiring Microsoft IIS.......................................20
Virtual Directories .......................................................................................20
Web Server Permissions ..............................................................................21
Changing the Anonymous Web Access Account.......................................21
Setting Up the Maximizer IIS Production Environment ............................22
Load Balancing .....................................................................................22
Demilitarized Zone (DMZ) ...................................................................24
Microsoft IIS Account Configuration..........................................................25
Standalone Servers...............................................................................25
Microsoft IIS on Windows Server 2008 or 2012 .........................................26
Microsoft IIS on 64-Bit Operating Systems.................................................28
Enabling 32-Bit Applications in Windows Server 2008 or 2012 ........28
Microsoft IIS for Windows Authentication ................................................29
IIS for Windows Authentication in Windows Server 2008 or 2012 ...29
Setting File and Directory Permissions .......................................................31
Adding Support for File Types ....................................................................32
ii
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Chapter 4
Installing Maximizer.............................................................33
Installation Checklist ...................................................................................34
Servers Required for Maximizer Installations .....................................35
Verifying SQL Connectivity ..................................................................37
Verifying Network Connectivity ..........................................................39
Third-Party Components Installed with Maximizer...................................41
Windows Login Account Rights Required for Installation........................42
Shared Folders and Permissions..................................................................43
Upgrading from a Previous Version of Maximizer ....................................44
Removing Maximizer ...........................................................................44
Installation Order of Maximizer Components ...........................................46
Installing Maximizer CRM Server................................................................47
Installing Maximizer Components for Microsoft IIS...........................54
Setting Full Permissions to the Maximizer Web Access Temp Folder56
Installing Maximizer Companion Applications..........................................58
Installing Microsoft Office Integration for Maximizer Web Access ..58
Adding and Removing Maximizer CRM Components...............................59
Full-Text Search Component of SQL Server................................................60
Using Full-Text Search in Maximizer ...................................................60
File Types Available for Full-Text Search .............................................61
Starting the Full-Text Search Service ...................................................62
Enabling Full-Text Search in Existing Address Books .........................62
Removing Full-Text Search Catalogs from Address Books .................64
Installing Licenses ........................................................................................66
Installing a License ...............................................................................66
Applying a License ...............................................................................67
Viewing Applied and In-Use Licenses..................................................67
Activating Maximizer ..................................................................................68
Where to Go from Here... ...........................................................................69
Chapter 5
Creating or Upgrading Address Books................................71
What is Administrator? ...............................................................................72
Creating Address Books ..............................................................................74
Checklist: Setting Up an Address Book ...............................................74
Creating an Address Book ...................................................................75
Deleting Address Books ..............................................................................77
Removing an Address Book .................................................................77
Deleting a Maximizer Database ..........................................................77
Maximizer System Login Accounts .............................................................79
Passwords..............................................................................................79
Changing the MASTER User Password .......................................................80
Employing an Existing Address Book .........................................................82
Upgrading or Converting an Address Book...............................................83
Upgrading a Maximizer Enterprise SQL Database .............................83
Contents
iii
Converting a Maximizer Pervasive (Btrieve) Database to SQL ..........85
Time Zone Alignment .................................................................................87
Importing Vertical Templates .....................................................................88
Chapter 6
Setting Up Users, Groups, and Teams .................................90
Adding a User to an Address Book ............................................................91
Enabled and Disabled Users ................................................................94
User Administration ....................................................................................96
Changing User Passwords ...........................................................................97
User and Group Security .............................................................................99
User Access Rights and User/Group Access Settings.........................100
Modifying User Access Settings.........................................................104
Security Groups ........................................................................................106
Default Security Groups in all New Address Books..........................107
Creating a New Security Group.........................................................109
Modifying Group Access Settings......................................................111
Record Ownership .....................................................................................112
Sales and Marketing Teams ......................................................................113
Linking Maximizer Users to Windows Logins ..........................................116
User Preferences ........................................................................................120
Chapter 7
Configuring an Address Book ............................................121
Address Book Preferences ........................................................................122
Set Address Book Preferences ...........................................................124
System Fields..............................................................................................125
Add Custom Items to System Fields ..................................................125
Modifying System Table Fields in Maximizer ...................................126
User-Defined Fields ...................................................................................127
Types of User-Defined Fields .............................................................127
Access Rights for User-Defined Fields ...............................................128
Setting Up User-Defined Fields .........................................................129
Sorting User-Defined Fields ...............................................................129
Create a Folder for User-Defined Fields............................................130
Create a User-Defined Field...............................................................131
Add Items to a Table User-Defined Field ..........................................132
Formula User-Defined Fields .............................................................133
Conditional Expressions for Formulas...............................................134
Transfer User-Defined Fields Between Address Books.....................136
Mandatory Fields.......................................................................................137
Set a System Field as Mandatory.......................................................137
Set a User-Defined Field as Mandatory ............................................138
Rules for Mandatory User-Defined Fields.........................................138
Set a User-Defined Field as Mandatory Given Conditions...............139
Mandatory Rules Using Table Fields .................................................139
Writing Formulas and Mandatory Rules ..................................................141
iv
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Arithmetic Expressions .......................................................................141
Alphanumeric Functions ....................................................................142
Date Functions....................................................................................148
Numeric Functions..............................................................................151
Comparison Statements in Formulas and Mandatory Rules............153
Logical Operators for Formulas and Mandatory Rules ....................154
Key Fields Lists ...........................................................................................155
Key Fields for Different Types of Entries...........................................155
Restricting Access to Key Fields .........................................................156
Create a Key Fields List ......................................................................156
Preventing Duplicate Entries ....................................................................158
Partial Matching .................................................................................159
Permission to Create Duplicate Entries .............................................160
Retrieving Private Entries with Duplicate Checking.........................160
Configure Duplicate Checking for Address Book Entries ................160
Email Notification for Opportunities/Customer Service Cases................162
Email Notification for Customer Service Cases .................................162
Email Notification for Opportunities ................................................162
Merge Fields in Email Notification Templates ..................................163
Create an Email Notification Template.............................................165
Assign Email Notification Templates.................................................167
Turn Off Email Notification ...............................................................168
Set Default Opportunity/Case Monitors ...........................................169
Event Notification .....................................................................................170
Enable Event Notification ..................................................................171
View Event Notification .....................................................................172
Open Windows Event Viewer............................................................172
Recording Holidays in the Holiday Editor ................................................173
Add a Holiday .....................................................................................173
Chapter 8
Configuring Email...............................................................175
Configuring Email .....................................................................................176
Configuring the Maximizer Email Service ........................................176
Configuring Email Accounts for Campaign Monitoring ..................178
User Account for SQL Server Reporting Services Integration ..........180
Enabling SQL Server Reporting Services ...........................................180
Configuring the Maximizer Print/Fax Service ..........................................182
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access.....................................................185
Introduction to Web Access ......................................................................186
Site Types ............................................................................................186
Supported File Types in Company Library and Documents .............188
Enabling Web Access Sites ........................................................................189
Escona Tutorial Sample Sites.....................................................................190
Escona Tutorial Maximizer Web Access Administrator ....................193
Contents
v
Escona Tutorial Maximizer Web Access ............................................194
Escona Tutorial Mobile Access...........................................................194
Escona Tutorial Customer and Partner Access Administrator .........195
Escona Tutorial Customer and Partner Access..................................196
Application Settings for Web Access Sites ..............................................197
Setting Up Windows Authentication for Web Access.............................205
Setting Up Windows Authentication for Web Access in SQL..........205
Configuring the Web.config files for Windows Authentication for
Web Access .........................................................................................205
Downloading Documents ..................................................................207
Configuring IIS for Windows Authentication for Web Access ........207
Windows Authentication for Partner Access, Customer Access, and
Campaign Statistics ............................................................................207
Web Access Users and Security Groups ....................................................209
Web Access Security Groups ..............................................................209
Web Access Users ...............................................................................212
Maximizer Web Access..............................................................................213
Creating External Links in Maximizer Web Access...........................213
Passing a Search String Parameter to the Login Page .....................214
ActiveX Controls in Maximizer Web Access......................................215
Maximizer Web Access Administrator .....................................................216
Mobile Access ............................................................................................217
Supported Browsers for Mobile Access.............................................217
Configuring Automatic Redirection to Mobile Access.....................217
Limiting the Number of Entries Displayed in Mobile Access...........218
Specifying the Mobile Access URL for Integration...........................219
Customer Access and Partner Access........................................................220
Introduction to Customer and Partner Access Administrator .........220
Adding Users to Site Security Groups ...............................................221
Determining External Site URLs ........................................................221
Accessing Sites from the Start Menu ................................................222
Configuring Site Options ...................................................................223
Setting Up Business Partners and Customers ...................................224
Assigning Site Login PINs to Contacts and Individuals ....................225
Activating a Login Account ...............................................................227
Removing Web Access .......................................................................227
Retrieving a Forgotten Password ......................................................227
Changing a Password.........................................................................227
Advanced Site Configurations ..................................................................228
Customizing the Graphic on the Site Main Page .............................228
The sections.xml File ..........................................................................229
The followingWindowSets.xml File ..................................................230
Displaying Custom System Messages ................................................231
Adding Custom Actions to the CustomActions.xml File ..................233
Creating Custom Links to External Websites....................................235
Specifying the Address Book on the Site Login Screen ...................237
vi
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Globalization of Sites .........................................................................238
Configuring Multiple IIS Servers to Connect to a Single Maximizer
CRM Server .........................................................................................239
Moving a Site......................................................................................239
Installing Sites to Non-Default Folders .............................................239
Setting Up Multiple Customer or Partner Sites ................................241
Creating a Custom Case Wizard for Partner Access .........................246
Chapter 10
Live Update .........................................................................255
Introduction to Maximizer Live Update...................................................256
Installing Live Update Manager ...............................................................257
Creating a Virtual Directory for Live Update on your Web Server .257
Installing Maximizer Live Update Manager .....................................257
Configuring Live Update Manager...........................................................259
Downloading Updates from Maximizer with Live Update .....................260
Approving Updates ...................................................................................261
Testing Updates Before Approval .....................................................261
Approving Updates for Download....................................................261
Copying the Update and XML Files to the Web Server...........................263
Configuring the Maximizer Live Update Service .....................................264
Updating Maximizer with Live Update ....................................................265
Chapter 11
SQL Server Reporting Services ..........................................267
About Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services......................................268
Integrating SQL Server Reporting Services with Maximizer Web Access.....
269
Installing SQL Reporting Services Integration ..................................269
User Account for SQL Server Reporting Services Integration ..........271
Enabling SQL Server Reporting Services ...........................................271
Configuring SQL Server Reporting Services for Windows
Authentication ...................................................................................272
SQL Server Reporting Services with Maximizer Web Access on HTTPS.
273
Chapter 12
Customizing Dashboards ...................................................275
Working with Dashboards ........................................................................276
Dashboard Indicators .........................................................................276
SQL Metrics for Indicators .........................................................................277
Queries for SQL Metrics .....................................................................277
SQL Queries Across Databases ...........................................................277
Creating or Modifying Custom SQL Metrics .....................................278
Click Through URLs for SQL Metrics .................................................279
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data ...........................................283
Backing Up and Restoring Address Book Data........................................284
Contents
vii
Backing Up and Restoring an Address Book ....................................284
Backing Up the Dictionary File ..........................................................284
Converting Embedded Documents to Linked Documents......................285
Verifying and Recovering Address Book Data.........................................287
Importing Address Book Data from MXI or XML Files............................290
Importing MXI or XML Files Using Advanced Import ......................290
Unattended Import of MXI or XML Files ..........................................292
Importing Data from Other File Formats.................................................293
Field Mapping ....................................................................................295
Two-Tier Import..................................................................................295
Importing from Other Contact Managers ........................................298
Importing Data from ACT! and GoldMine .......................................301
Field Mapping for Outlook ...............................................................311
Moving an Address Book to a Different Server.......................................313
Step 1: Back Up the Address Book ....................................................313
Step 2: Restore the Address Book on the New Server .....................316
Step 3: Create the MaConfig Table ...................................................321
Step 4: Connect to the Address Book in Administrator...................322
Step 5: Delete Existing Users from the Address Book......................323
Step 6: Grant the MASTER User Access to the Database .................326
Step 7: Synchronize Maximizer Users with SQL Server ....................327
Step 8: Apply Maximizer Licenses .....................................................327
Purging Outdated Notes and Documents................................................328
Using Log Files for Diagnosis ....................................................................330
System Reports ..........................................................................................332
Chapter 14
Troubleshooting..................................................................335
Recreating the Maximizer_Default User..................................................336
Resolving Issues with SQL Server ..............................................................336
Testing the SQL Server Connection ...................................................336
Confirming the Validity of the SQL Server Account ........................338
Windows Authentication with Maximizer and SQL Server .............339
Connecting Maximizer Services to SQL Server .................................339
Running DBCC on a Maximizer Database.........................................340
Missing Users ......................................................................................340
Using Non-Default Database Collations ...........................................341
Troubleshooting Issues with Automated Campaigns..............................342
Dropped SQL Server Connection.......................................................342
SMTP Time-out Error..........................................................................342
Email Messages Use Wrong Character Set........................................343
Campaigns Remain “In Progress” without Activity .........................343
Resolving Issues with Microsoft IIS ...........................................................345
Configuring Maximizer Web Access on a 64-bit Operating System345
Maximizer Components for IIS and Windows Server 2008 or 2012 345
Resolving DSN Creation Problems on a Maximizer Web Server......347
viii
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Troubleshooting Web Access Sites ...........................................................348
Maximizer Web Access Templates .....................................................348
User-Defined Field Visibility...............................................................348
Site Tree Control.................................................................................349
Blocked Files in Maximizer Web Access ............................................350
Restoring the Escona Tutorial Sample Address Book ..............................351
Maximizer Email Service Log Files ............................................................352
Appendix A
Administrator’s Reference .................................................355
MaConfig Table (Server and Address Book Configuration)....................356
Editing the MaConfig Settings ..........................................................356
Four-letter Module Codes..................................................................356
MaConfig Table: Entries and their Meanings ...................................357
ADMN_Config Table (Address Book Configuration) ...............................364
Maximizer File Types .................................................................................367
Adding a Microsoft IIS machine................................................................368
Virtual Directories......................................................................................368
Virtual Directory Permissions.............................................................369
Database Views for User-Defined Fields
.............................................371
Microsoft SQL View Prefixes ..............................................................371
Maximizer XML Interface (MXI) ...............................................................372
Top-Level Elements.............................................................................372
ImportOptions Element .....................................................................373
DetailDef Element ..............................................................................375
Individual Element .............................................................................376
Company Element ..............................................................................378
KnowledgeBaseArticle Element ........................................................379
Case Element ......................................................................................380
Contact Element .................................................................................381
Address Element.................................................................................383
Note Element......................................................................................383
Document Element ............................................................................383
Element Details ..................................................................................384
Search String Language ............................................................................390
Search Syntax......................................................................................390
Search Operators ................................................................................390
Exceptions ...........................................................................................394
....................................................................................................................397
Appendix B
Glossary ..............................................................................399
Maximizer and Administrator Terminology.............................................400
Index ....................................................................................407
CHAPTER
Introduction
1
In this chapter...
“Maximizer System Requirements” on page 2
“Maximizer CRM Modules and Components” on page 4
“Sample Address Books” on page 5
“Network Configuration” on page 6
“Related Documentation” on page 7
1
2
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Maximizer System Requirements
The hardware and software requirements for each type of Maximizer
installation are listed in the following tables. Please refer to the
Maximizer website at www.maximizer.com for updated information.
These are the minimum system requirements for Maximizer, and
your operating system may have higher requirements for some
components, such as processor speed and RAM.
Because Web Access (part of the Maximizer components for
Microsoft IIS) may have to handle larger amounts of processing (as
the number of concurrent Web Access clients increase), we
recommend that you install Web Access on a server with dual or
quad processors and more RAM than the minimum requirements. In
addition, it is recommend that customers that are planning a
deployment of Web Access on a server machine that potentially will
have physical memory demands in excess of four gigabytes of
physical RAM deploy on a 64-bit operating system.
Maximizer CRM Enterprise Edition System Requirements
The following table lists the system requirements for Maximizer CRM
Enterprise Edition server. For the latest list of supported software, go
to www.maximizer.com.
Server
Minimum Processor Speeda
1.6 GHz (minimum)
Quad Core 2.0 GHz or faster processor
per server (recommended)
Available RAMa
4 GB (minimum)
8 GB (recommended)
Available hard disk space
10 GB or more
Minimum video resolution
SVGA (1024x768) or higher-resolution
video adapter and monitor
Operating system
Microsoft Windows Server 2008, 2008 R2,
2012, 2012 R2, or 2016 (32-bit and 64-bit
editions)
* It is recommended to update to the
latest service packs.
Database software
Microsoft SQL Server 2008, 2008 R2, 2012,
2014, or 2016 (updated to their latest
service packs) with full-text search
enabled
Chapter 1
Introduction
3
Server
Reporting services
Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Servicesb
with Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 Service
Pack 1 or later, SQL Server 2012, 2014, or
2016
Email system
32-bit MAPI-compliant, or
SMTP (Email Service)
Software on the server where
Maximizer components for
Microsoft IIS are installed
Microsoft Internet Information Server 7.0
(Windows Server 2008), 7.5 (Windows
Server 2008 R2), 8.0 (Windows Server
2012), 8.5 (Windows Server 2012 R2), or
10 (Windows Server 2016)
Internet speed
1.5 Mbps (minimum)
2.5 Mbps or higher (recommended)
* For a large number of users you will
want to increase Internet speed.
a. Because Web Access (Maximizer components for Microsoft IIS) may have
to handle larger amounts of processing (as the number of concurrent
Web Access clients increase), we recommend that you install Web Access
on a server with dual or quad processors and more RAM than the
minimum requirements. In addition, it is recommend that customers that
are planning a deployment of Web Access on a server machine that
potentially will have physical memory demands in excess of four
gigabytes of physical RAM deploy on a 64-bit operating system.
b. It’s recommended that the Maximizer CRM SQL Reporting Services
Integration runs on its own instance of Microsoft SQL Server Reporting
Services.
4
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Maximizer CRM Modules and Components
•
Maximizer CRM is a robust contact, campaign, opportunity,
and order management tool. It provides invaluable assistance in
tracking customer interaction and purchase history, planning
and management of sales opportunities using customizable sales
strategies and automatically calculating the probability of close
at every stage. With the creation of meaningful graphs and
charts, companies benefit from complete, detailed intelligence
to fully understand their audience and evaluate the
performance of their business.
•
Administrator is used by a system administrator or IT staff to
configure the entire Maximizer system and manage users and
security. From Administrator, you can create and manage
Maximizer databases (called “Address Books”), back up your
data, import and export Address Book information, produce
system reports, and perform other administrative tasks.
•
Customer Access is a browser-based application providing a
two-way flow of information between your organization and its
customers.
•
Dashboards are a component of Maximizer Web Access that
can be used for monitoring activities in your company. The
information you see in dashboards is generated in real-time, so
you have an up-to-date view of the activities taking place in
Sales and Marketing. Information, such as how many
opportunities are in the funnel and your daily revenue from
online purchases, are accessible instantaneously.
•
Maximizer Web Access is a browser-based application
providing your organization’s employees with the functionality
of Maximizer from anywhere in the world.
•
Mobile Access provides access to Maximizer through mobile
web browsers. When users go to Start > Programs > Maximizer
CRM > Web Access > Mobile Access, a URL displays. They can
enter this URL into a mobile device to access Mobile Access.
•
Partner Access is a browser-based application providing twoway flow of information between your organization and its
business partners. A multi-tier distribution group can effectively
distribute sales opportunities and keep all involved parties
informed about the latest discussion topics and customer service
cases.
Modules and Components
Chapter 1
Introduction
5
Sample Address Books
Maximizer includes sample Address Books to help you learn the
program.
A typical server installation of Maximizer installs a complete sample
Address Book called “Escona Tutorial”, which is used throughout the
Maximizer documentation. You can use the Escona Tutorial Address
Book while you are learning to use Maximizer.
Maximizer also installs several other sample Address Books for a
variety of industries. You can use a sample Address Book appropriate
to your industry as a starter Address Book.
You can access the sample Address Book for all components of
Maximizer with the following user ID:
User ID: MASTER
Password: control
Use the sample Address Books for learning and testing purposes only,
and create a new Address Book for your organization’s data. The
sample Address Books are overwritten if you re-install, so you don’t
want to store your organization’s data in those Address Books.
6
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Network Configuration
The following diagram is an example of how Maximizer CRM can be
deployed. This example demonstrates the use of multiple servers,
firewalls, intranet, and Internet connections.
In this example, remote employees, partners, and customers can
connect through the Internet using Maximizer Web Access or a
mobile device with Mobile Access. Employees can also connect
through your intranet. The Maximizer database and Microsoft SQL
Server Reporting Services (SSRS) can reside on a single server or on
different servers.
Your network setup will depend on the configuration and the
components you choose to install.
Chapter 1
Introduction
7
Related Documentation
This guide is one source of documentation included with Maximizer,
and the following additional resources are available:
•
Online Help (Help > Online Help) provides additional
information about using Maximizer and Administrator.
•
The Maximizer CRM Web Access User’s Guide is your
reference guide to using Maximizer. This guide is available in
PDF format from the Help menu in Maximizer Web Access.
•
The Maximizer CRM Customization Suite includes additional
guides for integrators. When the Customization Suite is
installed, these guides are available in PDF format from the
Maximizer Customization Suite folder in the Windows Start
menu. The Customization Suite enables customers and business
partners to customize the Maximizer interface and to integrate
with other front-office and back-office solutions.
•
The Maximizer website (www.maximizer.com) provides the
latest product information. It also includes a searchable
Knowledge Base at www.maximizer.com/knowledgebase.
8
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
CHAPTER
Setting Up
Microsoft SQL Server
2
In this chapter...
“Planning the Installation” on page 10
“Installing Microsoft SQL Server” on page 10
“Full-Text Search Component of SQL Server” on page 13
2
10
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Planning the Installation
This chapter describes how to install Microsoft SQL Server 2008 for
use with Maximizer. If you are using a different version of Microsoft
SQL server, the procedure may differ. For more information about
Microsoft SQL server, refer to the documentation from Microsoft.
Before installing SQL Server software, ensure the server computer
meets the minimum system requirements as specified in your
operating system documentation, SQL Server documentation, and
“Maximizer System Requirements” on page 2. You must also
consider the following two issues:
•
How will the Microsoft SQL Server service log in?
•
Should the client use per-seat or per-processor licensing for the
connection to Microsoft SQL Server?
Both of these issues are addressed below.
Installing Microsoft SQL Server
 For more information
regarding Microsoft SQL
Server, consult the Microsoft
SQL Server website at
http://www.microsoft.com/sql.
Once you have determined how Microsoft SQL Server will log in and
which licensing to use, you can install the software. There are several
SQL Server components to install, depending on which features of
Maximizer you plan to use:
•
SQL Server Database Server – This is the main component and
is required. For detailed installation instructions, refer to
“Installing a Database Server” on page 11.
After installing Microsoft SQL Server, you must install the most
recent Service Pack.
•
 For more information on SQL
Server Reporting Services, see
“About Microsoft SQL Server
Reporting Services” on
page 268.
SQL Server Reporting Services – This component for SQL
Server is required for the Maximizer integration with SQL Server
Reporting Services.
If you plan on integrating SQL Server Reporting Services with
Maximizer Web Access, you must SQL Server 2008 R2 Service Pack
1 or later. If you are using an earlier version of SQL Server, you
should install a separate instance of SQL Server for the
integration with Maximizer.
Chapter 2
Setting Up Microsoft SQL Server
11
Installing a Database Server
When installing Microsoft SQL Server Database Server, you may
install it as a service and include the Full-Text Search component.
The following procedures provide detailed instructions for installing
the standard editions of Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Database Server.
If you are using a different version of Microsoft SQL Server, the
procedure may differ. For more information about Microsoft SQL
Server, refer to the documentation from Microsoft.
➤ To install Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Standard
Edition
 Insert the installation disc.
 Start the SQL Server 2008 Standard Edition installation.
 Accept the licensing terms and conditions, and click Next.
The wizard notifies you if any additional components are
required.
 Click Install to install prerequisite components. You may need
to restart your computer to completely install the components.
When the prerequisite component installation is complete, the
SQL Server Installation Center appears.
 Click Installation.
 Click New SQL Server stand-alone installation or add
features to an existing installation.
The SQL Server 2008 Setup starts. The installation wizard checks
the setup support rules.
 Click OK.
 Enter the product key, and click Next.
 Accept the license terms, and click Next.
Click Install to install the setup support.
The installation wizard runs the setup support rules.
Click Next.
Select all the desired features, and click Next.
12
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Specify whether to use a Default or Named instance, and
click Next.
If you are uncertain, select Default instance. For information
about default and named instances, refer to the Microsoft SQL
Server 2008 documentation.
Review the disk space requirements, and click Next.
Choose a domain user account, and assign it to each SQL
service. Enter the Username, Password, and Domain for each
service, and click Next.
Select Mixed Mode or Windows Authentication Mode
(depending on your requirements). Create and enter a password
for the sa logon account. Also provide at least one SQL Server
administrator account, and click Next.
If you selected to install Analysis Services, provide at least one
SQL Server administrator account, and click Next.
Select the Reporting Services configuration option, and click
Next.
Select any error and usage report settings, as desired, and click
Next.
The installation wizard checks the installation rules.
Click Next.
Review the installation settings, and click Install to begin.
When the installation is complete, click Next.
Review the supplemental information, and click Close.
Microsoft SQL Server 2008 is now installed.
Chapter 2
Setting Up Microsoft SQL Server
13
Full-Text Search Component of SQL Server
The Full-Text Search component of Microsoft SQL Server applies to
Search by Notes, Search by Documents, and Knowledge Base searches
in Maximizer. The Microsoft SQL Server Full-Text Search component
must be installed to use the full-text search functionality in
Maximizer.
Full-Text Search is available in the Standard and Enterprise editions
of Microsoft SQL Server. This component is installed by default, but if
you need to install it after installing Microsoft SQL Server,
instructions are included in this section. If Full-Text Search is installed,
but you prefer not to use it, you can disable the Microsoft Search
service though the Windows Control Panel on the SQL server.
To learn more about Full-Text Search in Microsoft SQL Server, refer to
your Microsoft SQL Server documentation.
The following sections contain information on the full-text search
component in SQL Server:
•
“Using Full-Text Search in Maximizer” on page 13
•
“File Types Available for Full-Text Search” on page 14
•
“Enabling Full-Text Search in Existing Address Books” on
page 15
•
“Removing Full-Text Search Catalogs from Address Books” on
page 17
Using Full-Text Search in Maximizer
The full-text search option is enabled if the Microsoft Search service
is running and the full-text search indexes have been created.
Otherwise, the option is disabled. Full-text search indexes are created
during database creation or upgrade. However, you can also force
creation of the indexes by executing the EnableFTIndexes.sql script.
When you run a search using full-text searching in Maximizer, the
search returns only entries containing full words specified in the
search text. If users search for text that is included in part of a word,
the search does not return entries that contain that word. For
example, if you search for “hedge”, only entries containing the word
“hedge” are returned. Entries containing the word “hedgehog” are
not returned.
Full-Text Search for Documents and Notes
The Search by Documents and Search by Notes functions in
Maximizer include an option to “Perform search using Full-Text
14
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Indexing”. This option performs queries using the “contains”
keyword.
Note that when using full-text search to search by notes or
documents, the search returns all notes or documents associated with
the entry containing the matching note or document. The search
does not return only the note or document matching the search text.
For more information about full-text search, refer to the Microsoft
SQL Server documentation.
Full-Text Search in the Knowledge Base
Full-text search is required for full-text searches in the Maximizer
Knowledge Base. If full-text search is not enabled, the option for fulltext searching in the Knowledge Base is inaccessible.
File Types Available for Full-Text Search
 Full-text search results are
dependent on the full-text
search filter for the document
type. For specific information
about the full-text search
behavior, refer to the full-text
search filter provider’s
documentation.
Using full-text search when searching by documents enables you to
conduct full-text searches on the following file types: .DOC, .XLS,
.PPT, .TXT, and .HTM.
Full-text searching does not search through Maximizer documents
(.ETF files) and email messages saved as documents.
You can also download and install additional full-text search filters
to enable full-text searching of other document types, such as .XML,
.RTF, and .PDF:
Chapter 2
Setting Up Microsoft SQL Server
 Information about third-party
•
filters is included here for your
information only. Maximizer
cannot guarantee the
functionality of third-party
filters.
15
Filters for .XML and .RTF files are available from Microsoft. For
more information, visit the Microsoft website
(www.microsoft.com), and search for “xml iFilter” or “rtf iFilter”.
You could use the .RTF IFilter for full-text searching of Maximizer
Word Processor documents. In the Maximizer Word Processor,
save the your documents as .RTF files to search for the files using
the .RTF IFilter.
•
A filter for .PDF files is available from Adobe. For more
information, visit the Adobe website (www.adobe.com), and
search for “pdf iFilter”.
To use full-text search, the document being searched must be less
than 16 MB in size, and it must not contain more than 256 KB of
filtered text.
Enabling Full-Text Search in Existing Address Books
If you create the Address Book before you install the Full-Text Search
SQL component, the Address Book will not have the full-text search
feature enabled.
By default, the Escona Tutorial sample Address Book does not have
full-text search enabled. This is to keep the Address Book compatible
with SQL installations that do not have the Full-Text Search
component.
 These procedures apply only to
SQL Servers where Maximizer
has already been installed.
➤ To enable full-text search in an existing Address
Book in SQL 2005/2008
 Open the SQL Server Management Studio (Start > Programs >
Microsoft SQL Server 2005/2008 > SQL Server Management
Studio).
 If the Connect to SQL Server
dialog box doesn’t open
automatically, select File >
Connect to Object Browser.
 Select the SQL Server where the Address Book resides.
 Log in to the server, and click OK
.
 Select New Query.
16
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 Change the database to the database that you want to enable
full-text searching on in the drop down.
 Navigate to the SQL script file to run (these script files are
located in C:\Program Files\Maximizer\DbScripts\SqlServer):
 This step shows the default
installation path for Maximizer
program files. Your Maximizer
program files may be installed
somewhere else.
•
To enable full-text search for notes, documents, and the
Knowledge Base, run the EnableFTindexes.sql script.
 Select Execute
.
When the script is complete, the Full-Text Search component will
be enabled in the Address Book.
➤ To verify that full-text search is enabled in an
Address Book
 This procedure applies only to
SQL Servers where Maximizer
has already been installed.
 Open SQL Server Management Studio.
 Expand the Console Root tree until you can see the Address
Book (inside the Databases folder).
 Expand the Address Book node, and select Full-Text Catalogs.
If Full-Text Search is enabled, the following Full-Text Catalogs
appear in the list.
Notes, documents, and Knowledge Base full-text catalogs:
•
DocumentsCatalog
•
KnowledgeBaseCatalog
•
NotesCatalog
Chapter 2
Setting Up Microsoft SQL Server
17
Removing Full-Text Search Catalogs from Address Books
If you have problems with full-text searching, you can remove the
full-text search catalogs from your Address Books. This procedure
may fix problems that arise after moving an Address Book to a
different server. After removing a full-text search catalog, you can reenable full-text search to regenerate the catalog for the Address
Book.
➤ To disable full-text search in an Address Book
•
Use SQL Server Query Analyzer to run the
Drop_FTS_Indexes_script.sql script file on the Address Book.
The script is located in the ...Maximizer\DBScripts\SqlServer
folder.
For details on running script files on Address Books, refer to the
procedure in “Enabling Full-Text Search in Existing Address
Books” on page 15.
18
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
CHAPTER
Configuring Microsoft
Internet Information Server (IIS)
3
In this chapter...
“Maximizer Components Requiring Microsoft IIS” on page 20
“Virtual Directories” on page 20
“Web Server Permissions” on page 21
“Changing the Anonymous Web Access Account” on page 21
“Setting Up the Maximizer IIS Production Environment” on page 22
“Microsoft IIS Account Configuration” on page 25
“Microsoft IIS on Windows Server 2008 or 2012” on page 26
“Microsoft IIS on 64-Bit Operating Systems” on page 28
“Microsoft IIS for Windows Authentication” on page 29
“Setting File and Directory Permissions” on page 31
“Adding Support for File Types” on page 32
3
20
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Maximizer Components Requiring Microsoft IIS
Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) is required for the
following Maximizer components:
 To support downloading
emails that were saved to
Documents from Maximizer
Web Access, Extended MAPI
must be installed on the IIS
server. Installing Microsoft
Outlook on the IIS server in
Corporate or Workgroup mode
satisfies this requirement.
•
Maximizer Web Access sites
•
Automated campaigns, for statistics in email activities
IIS is included with all versions of Windows supported by Maximizer
CRM.
Virtual Directories
The content and script/executable directories that IIS makes available
to web clients are known as virtual directories.
When you create a new Address Book, virtual directories are created
automatically for the various Maximizer components.
Maximizer Components
Virtual Directory Name
Maximizer Web Access
MaximizerWebAccess
Maximizer Web Access
Administrator
MaximizerAdmin
Mobile Access
MaximizerMobileAccess
Partner Access
MaximizerPartner
Customer Access
MaximizerCustomer
Automated campaigns
Campaigns
Maximizer.Web.Data
MaximizerWebData
Chapter 3
Configuring Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS)
21
Web Server Permissions
 If both Web server and NTFS
permissions are set,
permissions that deny access
take precedence over those
that grant access.
Web server permissions affect all users accessing the site, ranging
from the Anonymous user account to a user who is a member of the
Administrators or Domain Admins group. Regardless of an account’s
group membership, all accounts will be denied access equally.
Therefore, when access to virtual directories is created for
IUSR_ServerName, the exact same virtual directory restrictions will be
placed on the IWAM_ServerName account.
Changing the Anonymous Web Access Account
To change the anonymous web access account, first create a new
user account, then enable anonymous access for the account.
➤ To create an anonymous web access account
 Start Windows User Manager.
 Select the local domain by selecting Users > Select Domain.
 Create a new user account.
 Make the account a member of the Guests group.
 Confirm that the Guests group only has the right to log on
locally by performing the procedure outlined in “Standalone
Servers” on page 25.
➤ To configure the anonymous web access account in
Windows Server 2008
 Start Internet Services Manager (available through Windows
Administrative Tools).
 Select the default website or another website if more than one is
available.
 Web browsers enable the
anonymous access option by
default. It is recommended
that you manually enter the
Anonymous user account
password, and that you disable
the “Enable Automatic
Password Synchronization”
checkbox. Be sure that the
password that you enter is
identical to the existing
password for the local
Anonymous user account.
 Double-click Authentication.
 Select Anonymous Access and click enable.
 Click edit.
The Edit Anonymous Authentication Credentials dialog box
opens.
 Click Set and type the Username and Password for the
account you created above. Click OK when you are finished.
22
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Setting Up the Maximizer IIS Production Environment
Maximizer is designed to meet the real-world infrastructure
requirements of IT departments, including support for load
balancing and demilitarized zones.
 Maximizer uses the IIS Default
Web Site on port 80. Other
web sites running on the
server must use different ports.
Maximizer Web Access makes use of Microsoft’s ASP.NET technology.
If your company has implemented other web pages or solutions, it is
strongly recommended that these pages are hosted on a separate IIS
Server from the Maximizer Web Access sites.
The following sections contain information on IIS production
environments:
•
“Load Balancing” on page 22
•
“Demilitarized Zone (DMZ)” on page 24
Load Balancing
In some deployments of Maximizer Web Access with a large number
of users, more than one IIS server may be needed to handle the load.
Network load balancing works with Maximizer Web Access to
achieve this.
It may be advantageous to deploy network load balancing in a
situation that includes the following:
•
A single IIS server is running at high CPU usage levels and
performance of Maximizer Web Access is poor only when many
users are using the system.
•
The SQL server serving the Maximizer Address Books is not
running at high CPU usage levels.
•
A set of servers of similar capacity are available to deploy
Maximizer Web Access.
•
The available IIS servers are all running Windows Server 2008 or
later or a hardware load balancer is available.
Configuring Load Balancing
For Maximizer Web Access, network load balancing is configured in
one of the following ways:
•
Install multiple servers with the Maximizer IIS components and
install the Network Load Balancing service in Windows on each
server. See the Network Load Balancing documentation for
information.
•
Install and configure a hardware network load balancer in the
network.
Chapter 3
Configuring Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS)
23
Network load balancing must be configured with client affinity
enabled meaning that each client has all IIS requests served by the
same server and that the client's IP address is used to determine
which server will serve the requests.
Each Maximizer IIS server must be configured identically and must
have the same version of the Maximizer IIS components installed.
When upgrading to a new version of Maximizer Web Access,
upgrade each server to the new version before the new version goes
online, and apply any customizations to all servers.
Benefits of Load Balancing
The main benefit of load balancing is that multiple IIS servers can be
used to divide the IIS load transparently to users with very low
performance overhead. It may be more economical to install many IIS
servers of lower capacity than one high-capacity IIS server. If one IIS
server loses connectivity or is taken offline for maintenance, users
may experience a session timeout as the load is rebalanced. But users
will be able to log in again immediately and continue to use the
system.
Drawbacks of Load Balancing
Network load balancing has the following drawbacks:
•
The system is scaled to a larger number of users only if the SQL
server can handle the load.
•
Multiple IIS servers must be maintained with the same settings
and version of the software. Otherwise, some users may be able
to use the system while other users are not able to use the
system.
In some cases, users may access the system from an Internet service
provider that frequently changes the client IP address as it appears to
the server. This may cause frequent session timeouts when logged in
to Maximizer Web Access.
24
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Demilitarized Zone (DMZ)
Security is the biggest priority for IT departments in most
corporations. Demilitarized zone (DMZ) is the term used to describe
the network area between the external router, which talks to the
Internet, and the corporate firewall, which protects internal
computers from Internet security breaches.
Maximizer has been designed to support network DMZs by enabling
corporations to separate their database servers (usually located
inside the firewall) from the IIS web machine (located in the DMZ).
Communication between the database servers and the web server is
handled by private ports configured by IT administrators.
Chapter 3
Configuring Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS)
25
Microsoft IIS Account Configuration
Most Windows servers are installed in network environments in
which they provide services to client workstations. In such a
configuration, the security considerations are often built around
physical access issues. When Microsoft IIS’s World Wide Web
Publishing Service is enabled, the server is suddenly placed in an
environment that is accessible by external users who can be located
virtually anywhere in the world. This situation requires that you
exercise much more care in ensuring that the server is secure from
unauthorized access.
The following section contains information on one type of IIS
configuration:
•
“Standalone Servers” on page 25
Standalone Servers
When IIS is installed on a standalone server (a server without
membership in a Windows domain), the IUSR_ServerName account is
made a member of the “Guests” local group. In most server
environments, this configuration works well.
➤ To configure the Guest local group in Windows Server
2008
 Open Local Security Policy (available through Windows
Administrative Tools).
 For further information, refer
to your Windows operating
system documentation.
 Expand the Local Policies branch, and select User Rights
Assignment.
 Right-click Allow log on locally, and select Properties from
the shortcut menu.
 Add the <server_name>\Guest account to the list of allowed
users. Click OK.
 Right-click Deny log on locally, and select Properties from the
shortcut menu.
 Add the <server_name>\Guest account to the list of denied
users. Click OK.
26
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Microsoft IIS on Windows Server 2008 or 2012
If your Microsoft IIS server is a Windows Server 2008 or 2012
computer, you may need to perform the following steps before
installing the Maximizer components for IIS:
 These procedures are written
for Windows Server 2008.
Steps may vary on Windows
Server 2012 computers.
•
Enable the .NET framework.
•
Install the required role services.
➤ To enable the .NET framework
 Open Server Manager.
 Select Features, and select Add Features.
 Select Microsoft .NET Framework.
The following features are required:
•
On Windows 2008, under .NET Framework 3.0 Features,
.NET Framework 3.0 and WCF Activation.
•
On Windows 2008 R2, under .NET Framework 3.5.1
Features, .NET Framework 3.5.1 and WCF Activation.
•
On Windows 2012, under .NET Framework 3.5
Features,.NET Framework 3.5, and under .NET
Framework 4.5 Features, all items.
 Click OK.
➤ To install the required role services
 Open Server Manager.
 Click Roles.
 The Maximizer components for
IIS require that the Web Server
(IIS) role be installed. If it is not
already installed, use the Add
Role wizard to install it.
 Under Web Server (IIS), select Add Role Services.
The Add Role Services dialog box opens. The following role
services are required:
•
Under Common HTTP Features, Static Content.
•
Under Application Development, ASP.NET and .NET
Extensibility.
•
Under Security, Basic Authentication and Windows
Authentication.
•
Under Management Tools, all items.
 Click Next.
 If you are prompted, include additional components.
Chapter 3
Configuring Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS)
 Click Install.
 When the installation is finished, click Close to close Server
Manager.
27
28
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Microsoft IIS on 64-Bit Operating Systems
Maximizer requires the 32-bit version of ASP.NET 4.0 in order to run
on a 64-bit operating system. To run the Maximizer components that
require Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS), you must enable
32-bit applications in IIS. The procedures vary depending on the
operating system running IIS.
Enabling 32-Bit Applications in Windows Server 2008 or 2012
In Windows Server 2008 or 2012, the Maximizer web applications
should run under an application pool that has 32-bit applications
enabled and that uses ASP.NET v4.0. If you do not need to run other
applications on a 64-bit web server, you can specify these settings for
the default application pool.
If you need to use a 64-bit web server, you can add a new application
pool with these settings and run the Maximizer applications under
this application pool.
 This procedure is written for
Windows Server 2008. Steps
may vary on Windows Server
2012 computers.
➤ To enable 32-bit applications for the ASP.NET v4.0
application pool
 In IIS Manager, select Application Pools.
 Select the ASP .NET v4.0 application pool.
 Click Advanced Settings.
 Next to Enable 32-bit Applications, select True.
 Click OK.
Chapter 3
Configuring Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS)
29
Microsoft IIS for Windows Authentication
If you want to use Windows Authentication in the components that
require Microsoft IIS, you must configure IIS for Windows
Authentication.
IIS for Windows Authentication in Windows Server 2008 or 2012
 To enable certain functionality
In Windows Server 2008 or 2012, you must set the authentication
method for the Maximizer Web Access, Maximizer Web Access
Administrator, Mobile Access, Maximizer.Web.Data, or Dashboard
virtual directory or for the Admin subfolder of the Customer Access
or Partner Access virtual directory.
 This procedure is written for
➤ To set the authentication method for a virtual
directory in Windows Server 2008
in Maximizer Web Access and
Maximizer Web Access
Administrator such as the
Auditing tab and System Audit
Report, you must set up
Maximizer.Web.Data for
Windows Authentication.
Windows Server 2008. Steps
may vary on Windows Server
2012 computers.
 In IIS Manager, select the virtual directory for the web access site.
– or –
To set up Windows Authentication for Customer Access or
Partner Access, select the Admin subfolder of the virtual
directory.
 Double-click Authentication.
 Set the authentication settings depending on the following
scenarios:
Scenario 1: SQL server is on the same machine as IIS, or
Delegation is set up between IIS and SQL.
•
Enable Windows Authentication and ASP.NET
Impersonation. All other options must be disabled.
Scenario 2: All other configurations.
•
Enable Basic Authentication and ASP.NET
Impersonation. In this situation, SSL should always be set up
in a production environment to protect the users' passwords
since Basic Authentication is not encrypted.
•
Right-click on Basic Authentication and select Edit to
change the basic authentication settings.
•
Set the Default domain so that users can type username
instead of domain\username when logging in.
•
Set the Realm to describe the location of the server.
If the necessary options are not available, you can turn them on.
Go to Control Panel > Programs and Features. Select Turn
30
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Windows features on or off. Expand Roles and select Web Server
(IIS). Click Add Role Services and enable Windows Authentication
or Basic Authentication. When you go back into IIS Manager, the
required features should be available.
Chapter 3
Configuring Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS)
31
Setting File and Directory Permissions
The virtual directory system for IIS comprises only half of the
directory security system. To complement the virtual directory
security, file and directory permissions for all of the physical
directories that virtual directories reference must also be made more
secure. In a default Windows Server installation, the “Everyone”
group is given full Directory and File permissions for almost all
directories on the server. Although this is a convenient feature for a
newly installed server, it provides very poor security.
During the installation, the Maximizer setup creates the following
folders on the server:
•
...\All Users\Application Data\Maximizer\AddrBks
•
...\All Users\Application Data\Maximizer\SvrShare
By default, these folders have full access rights. You may change the
security rights to provide access to only specific users and/or groups.
➤ To remove the “Everyone” group
 Start Windows Explorer and browse to the ...\Inetpub\scripts
directory (typically, C:\InetPub\scripts).
 Select the scripts directory, and select File > Properties.
 Select the Security tab.
 Highlight the Everyone group in the Name list box, and click
Remove.
The Everyone group is removed from the list.
 Click Add.
The Select Users, Computers, or Groups dialog box opens.
 Select the Guest or Domain Guest group, and click Add.
 Click OK.
 In the Permissions list box, select the Read checkbox from the
Allow column.
 Click OK.
32
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Adding Support for File Types
Some Maximizer features may require you to add support for
different file types to the Default Web Site on your IIS server. You
can use IIS Manager to register additional Multipurpose Internet Mail
Extensions (MIME) types for your server.
You may be required to register MIME types in the following
situations:
•
To add to the list of supported document types in Maximizer
Web Access.
The procedure for registering MIME types varies depending on the
version of Windows you are using.
➤ To register MIME types in Windows Server 2008
 On the Maximizer IIS server machine, open the IIS Manager.
 Open the Default Web Site.
 Double-click the MIME Types icon.
 Click Add.
 Enter the file extension and MIME type to be supported.
 Click OK to add the specified MIME type.
CHAPTER
Installing Maximizer
4
In this chapter...
“Installation Checklist” on page 34
“Third-Party Components Installed with Maximizer” on page 41
“Windows Login Account Rights Required for Installation” on page 42
“Shared Folders and Permissions” on page 43
“Upgrading from a Previous Version of Maximizer” on page 44
“Installation Order of Maximizer Components” on page 46
“Installing Maximizer CRM Server” on page 47
“Installing Maximizer Companion Applications” on page 58
“Adding and Removing Maximizer CRM Components” on page 59
“Installing Licenses” on page 66
“Where to Go from Here...” on page 69
4
34
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Installation Checklist
Although the process of installing Maximizer CRM is straightforward,
a successful installation requires planning and attention to detail. In
its simplest arrangement, all Maximizer CRM components may be
installed on a single Windows machine. However, for large
installations, it is optimal to designate a single machine for each
component.
 Depending on the network
configuration, you may have
more than one of each
component machine. However,
there is only one Maximizer
Application Server.
•
Step 1: Identify the Key Server(s)
•
Step 2: Ensure the Servers Meet System Requirements
•
Step 3: Verify SQL and Network Connectivity
•
Step 4: Install Maximizer
•
Step 5: Install Additional User Licenses
•
Step 6: Activate the Software
The following sections outline the steps for a large installation in
which each Maximizer component—such as SQL Server, IIS Server,
Maximizer Server—is isolated on a separate machine.
Step 1: Identify the Key Server(s)
Identify the Maximizer Application Server, SQL Server, and IIS Server.
Other additional key servers are the and Email Server. For
information on the role of each server, see “Servers Required for
Maximizer Installations” on page 35.
Step 2: Ensure the Servers Meet System Requirements
After identifying the key servers, you should ensure that they meet
the minimum system requirements. See “Maximizer System
Requirements” on page 2.
Step 3: Verify SQL and Network Connectivity
Verify that connectivity exists between the SQL Server and all key
network servers (IIS Server, SMTP Mail Server, Maximizer Server, etc.).
For more information see “Verifying SQL Connectivity” on page 37
and “Verifying Network Connectivity” on page 39.
Step 4: Install Maximizer
Install Maximizer components on all applicable computers.
For more information see the following sections:
•
“Installation Order of Maximizer Components” on page 46
Chapter 4
Installing Maximizer
•
“Installing Maximizer CRM Server” on page 47
•
“Installing Maximizer Companion Applications” on page 58
35
Step 5: Install Additional User Licenses
Install licenses for any additional Maximizer users. This step is
required only if you are installing Maximizer in a multiple-user
environment. For more information, see “Installing Licenses” on
page 66.
Step 6: Activate the Software
Activate your Maximizer licenses. You can use Maximizer for a
limited period of time before activating the software. Once this
grace period is over, you will be unable to log in to Maximizer or
administrator until you activate the software.
You are prompted to activate the software when you first log in. You
can also activate the software from the Install Multi-user Licenses
dialog box.
If you install additional licenses after activating Maximizer, you must
activate the multi-user licenses in order to use them.
Servers Required for Maximizer Installations
•
Maximizer Application Server: The Maximizer Application
Server is the machine where the Maximizer CRM Server
application is installed, and it acts as a file server. Additionally,
the Maximizer Server machine contains the Maximizer Email
Service and Maximizer Print/Fax Service. The Maximizer Server
machine must be capable of sharing folders. These folders store
template and configuration information specific for each
Address Book as well as global information for all Address Books.
It is advisable to back up the Maximizer Server on a consistent
basis.
•
SQL Server: The SQL Server machine is typically a designated
machine running only SQL Server. It should not have other
applications installed on it, including Maximizer CRM.
•
SQL Server Reporting Services Server: The SQL Server
Reporting Services machine can be the same computer running
SQL Server or it can be running on a different computer. If you
plan to use SQL Server Reporting Services for any purposes other
than integrating with Maximizer Web Access, you should install
a dedicated instance of SQL Server for the integration.
•
IIS Server: The IIS Server hosts the web server components,
including web access sites. To run these components, the IIS
36
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Server must have SQL connectivity with the SQL Server machine.
Typically, the web server is separated from the rest of the
network by a firewall. Even if a firewall exists between the IIS
Server and SQL Server, SQL connectivity must exist to run
Maximizer Web Access.
•
Email Server: The Email Server supports marketing campaigns,
appointment reminders, and customer service case notifications.
It must be capable of sending SMTP.
Chapter 4
Installing Maximizer
37
Verifying SQL Connectivity
➤ To verify SQL Connectivity
 Open Data Sources (ODBC).
Select Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Data
Sources (ODBC).
 Click the System DSN tab.
 Click Add.
 In the Create New Data Source dialog box, select SQL Server
from the scroll list, and click Finish.
 Enter a Name and Description, select the Server from the
drop-down list, and click Next.
38
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 Select the authentication options as specified by your system
administrator, and click Next.
 If you have a reason to use a
database other than master as
the default, you can select the
Change the default database
to checkbox, and select an
alternate database.
 Leave master as the default database, and click Next.
 Leave the default options selected on the final screen (although
you can change them if you have reason to), and click Finish.
Chapter 4
Installing Maximizer
39
 Review the settings, and click Test Data Source.
If the connectivity test is successful, it returns the message
“TESTS COMPLETED SUCCESSFULLY!”
Click OK to close this dialog box, and then click OK again to
close the ODBC Microsoft SQL Server Setup dialog box.
Verifying Network Connectivity
➤ To verify network connectivity using the ping
command
 At the designated Maximizer Server computer, click Start > Run.
 Type command, and press Enter.
A Windows command prompt window opens.
40
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 At the command prompt, type ping <IP address>, and press
Enter.
<IP address> is the IP address of the computer you are trying to
connect to over the network.
 Read the messages returned by the ping command and note
whether the ping was successful.
•
“Reply from ...” = success
•
“Request timed out” = failure
 View the ping statistics to determine the quality of the network
connection.
 If the ping command failed, or if the ping statistics reveal a poor
quality connection, then troubleshoot the network connection
to correct the problem.
 Repeat these steps to ping the rest of the computers in the
network.
➤ To determine a computer’s IP address
 At the computer whose IP address you want to determine, click
Start > Run.
 Type command, and press Enter.
A Windows command prompt window opens.
 At the command prompt type ipconfig.
The window displays the computer’s IP address, subnet mask,
and default gateway, as well as additional network information.
 Write down the computer’s name and IP address for reference.
Chapter 4
Installing Maximizer
41
Third-Party Components Installed with Maximizer
The Maximizer CRM installation includes the following third-party
products:
•
Microsoft SQL Server Express Database Engine
•
Microsoft .NET Framework
•
Microsoft SQL Server Reporting
The type of Maximizer installation determines which of these
components are installed.
Microsoft SQL Server Express Database Engine
Microsoft SQL Server Express is not included in the typical installation
of Maximizer. But you can run a custom installation to install it.
 If you are upgrading from
Maximizer CRM 10.x, you
must uninstall the Maximizer
instance of SQL Server 2005
Express before installing the
Maximizer instance of SQL
Server 2014 Express. Refer to
the Maximizer knowledge
base for detailed information.
The following Maximizer operations require the SQL Server Express
database engine:
•
email transfer
The following Maximizer operations require the Pervasive.SQL
database engine, which must be installed from the disc of a previous
version of Maximizer or downloaded from the Pervasive website:
•
upgrading an existing Pervasive or Btrieve Address Book
Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express
Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio is a tool you use to
manage your database. It is not included in the typical installation of
Maximizer. But you can run a custom installation to install it.
If you require SQL Server Management Studio Express to be installed
on a drive other than the default Maximizer program folder drive,
you can run the installation from the Maximizer CRM disc. The setup
is found in the following location:
•
MaxCRM\3RDPARTY\SQLExpr
Microsoft .NET Framework
The Microsoft .NET Framework installs automatically with the “Install
Maximizer Components for Microsoft IIS” option.
42
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Windows Login Account Rights Required for Installation
To install Maximizer CRM, you must be logged in to Windows using
an account with Windows Administrator privileges. During
installation, you may be required to reboot the computer, and then
you must log in to Windows using an account with Windows
Administrator privileges again so the installation can continue.
Chapter 4
Installing Maximizer
43
Shared Folders and Permissions
 For information about the
virtual directories created
during installation and their
permissions, refer to “Virtual
Directories” on page 368.
When installing Maximizer CRM Server, the following shared folders
are created in the ...\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Maximizer\ folder on the server:
Folder name Shared name
Description
AddrBks
Contains Address Books and Sample
Address Books.
MxData
Share Permissions of Everyone with
Change and Read (not Full Control).
SvrShare
MxServer
Share Permissions of Everyone with
Change and Read (not Full Control).
44
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Upgrading from a Previous Version of Maximizer
 ALWAYS back up the Address
Book before upgrading
Maximizer. For instructions on
backing up, refer to “Backing
Up and Restoring Address
Book Data” on page 284. If
you have customized the
dictionary, also back up that
file separately before
upgrading.
If you are currently running an earlier version of Maximizer and want
to upgrade, it is strongly recommended that you uninstall the
previous version before proceeding with the upgrade.
Note that the Wireless Access site from previous releases is now
renamed Mobile Access. The name of the default virtual directory
and URL have also changed. In previous releases the name of the
virtual directory was "MaximizerWireless". You can specify a
different name for the virtual directory while installing Maximizer. If
you keep the default virtual directory, you may need to update the
Mobile Access URL specified in Administrator. Mobile Access users
should also update bookmarks so they reflect the new URL.
➤ To upgrade to the new version of Maximizer
 Back up your Maximizer Address Book. Refer to “Backing Up and
Restoring Address Book Data” on page 284 for instructions.
 If you have customized the dictionary, also back up that file
separately before upgrading. For instructions, refer to “Backing
Up the Dictionary File” on page 284.
 Uninstall Maximizer CRM, and any additional Maximizer
components on all computers.
For instructions on uninstalling Maximizer, see “Removing
Maximizer” on page 44.
 Install the new version of Maximizer.
 If you use Maximizer in a multiple-user environment, install
additional user licenses.
For more information, see “Installing Licenses” on page 66.
 Activate the software.
You can activate the software and all installed licenses when you
open Maximizer or Administrator and when you install multiuser licenses.
 Upgrade your Maximizer Address Book database to the new
version, as described in “Upgrading or Converting an Address
Book” on page 83.
Removing Maximizer
You can uninstall Maximizer to remove it from your computer. When
you uninstall Maximizer CRM, you have the option of removing or
Chapter 4
Installing Maximizer
45
keeping registry settings and program files. If you want to
completely remove the program, you should select this option. If you
want to reinstall Maximizer, you may want to keep these settings.
Any settings stored in the database are not removed when you
uninstall Maximizer.
➤ To uninstall Maximizer
 Uninstalling Maximizer does
not uninstall your Address
Book data. However, you
should always back up your
Address Book before
uninstalling.
 Click Start > Settings > Control Panel > Add/Remove
Programs.
 In the list of currently installed programs, select Maximizer
CRM.
 Click Change/Remove.
If you are uninstalling Maximizer CRM, you have the option to
remove all related files and registry settings from the computer.
If you plan on reinstalling Maximizer, it’s recommended that you
do not select this option to preserve Maximizer settings on the
computer.
 To remove all Maximizer files and settings from the computer,
select Remove all related files, folders, and registry
settings.
 Click Yes to confirm.
The Remove Programs From Your Computer dialog box displays
the uninstall progress.
 If the Remove Shared File? dialog box opens, click No To All.
 When the uninstall is complete, click OK to close the dialog box.
 Reboot the computer.
46
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Installation Order of Maximizer Components
Once the key servers (SQL Server, IIS, and Email) are ready, you
should install and configure the Maximizer components in the
following order:
 Maximizer Server – Refer to “Installing Maximizer CRM
Server” on page 47.
 Maximizer Components for Microsoft IIS – Refer to
“Installing Maximizer Components for Microsoft IIS” on page 54.
Chapter 4
Installing Maximizer
47
Installing Maximizer CRM Server
 You must be logged in to
Windows as an administrator
to install Maximizer. After
installation, you may be
prompted to restart the
computer, and then you must
log in as an administrator
again to complete the
installation.
An installation wizard steps you through the process of installing the
software on the server. The instructions in this section complement
the wizard to provide additional information.
Note that Maximizer Web Access, Customer Access, Partner Access,
and Mobile Access are installed automatically with Maximizer CRM
Server when the Maximizer Components for Microsoft IIS option is
selected. You can enable the sites while installing Maximizer CRM
Server or later. For information on enabling sites, see “Enabling Web
Access Sites” on page 189.
IMPORTANT NOTE FOR CONFIGURATIONS RUNNING THE
MAXIMIZER APPLICATION SERVER AND MICROSOFT IIS SERVER
ON THE SAME MACHINE:
In a typical Maximizer CRM environment, the Maximizer application
server and Microsoft IIS server are on two separate machines, and
you must run the Maximizer CRM Server setup once on each
machine:
•
First install Maximizer Server on the Maximizer application
server machine, using the Maximizer CRM Server disc.
•
Then install Maximizer Components for Microsoft IIS on the
Microsoft IIS server machine, using the Maximizer CRM Server
disc.
However, if your Maximizer application server and Microsoft IIS
server are running on the SAME machine, do not attempt to run the
Maximizer CRM Server installation twice on the same machine.
Instead, select both options in step 7 of the following procedure.
➤ To install Maximizer
 Close all programs running on the computer.
 Insert the Maximizer CRM disc.
The setup starts automatically.
 If the setup doesn’t start
automatically, you can start it
manually by running setup.exe
from the MaxEnt folder of the
disc (e.g., \MaxEnt\setup.exe).
 Select Install Maximizer CRM Server.
The InstallShield Wizard starts.
 Click Next to begin the installation.
 Read the license agreement, and click Yes to continue.
 Enter your Customer Number, Product Serial Number, and
your contact information, and click Next.
48
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 Select Maximizer Server, and click Next.
NOTE: If you are installing Maximizer Server on the machine that
is also your IIS Server, you must select both Maximizer Server
and Maximizer Components for Microsoft IIS now to install
them both on the machine.
To install Maximizer components for IIS, select Maximizer
Components for Microsoft IIS.
 Click Next to install Maximizer Server components to the default
location.
– or –
Click Browse, select a destination folder, and click Next.
 Do not change any default
share names, file names, file
locations, folder names, or
folder locations after installing
Maximizer. If you want to use
names and locations other
than the defaults, change
them during the installation.
 Click Next to use the default folder for shared configuration
information.
– or –
Chapter 4
Installing Maximizer
49
Click Browse, select a local shared folder, and click Next.
 Maximizer creates the
“Maximizer” folder on the
drive where the Windows
operating system is installed. If
your Windows operating
system is not on the C drive,
the path will have a different
drive letter.
By default, Maximizer setup creates the folder ...\All Users\
Application Data\Maximizer on the server, and it creates two
shared subfolders called AddrBks and SvrShare. These folders
must be shared on the network so other PCs can access to
resources installed to this location. The default Share name of
AddrBks is “MxData”, and the default Share name of SvrShare is
“MxServer”.
Select a setup type, and click Next.
•
Typical – installs a default set of server software, such as
Windows services, server-side software, and drivers. It also
installs a default set of Maximizer user applications on the
server. Maximizer recommends that you select the Typical
installation, unless you have a specific reason not to.
•
Custom – enables you to select specific Maximizer modules
to install. You can select virtually any combination of server
software and user applications you want. Select this option
50
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
only if you have a specific reason to alter the default
Maximizer installation provided by the Typical installation.
(This step applies only to Typical installations) Select
which sample Address Books to install.
(This step applies to Custom Installations only.) Select
which features to install on the server, and click Next.
If you would like to select additional components, click the + to
expand the selection.
Enter or select the SQL Server name, and choose to use SQL
Server authentication or Windows Authentication.
Chapter 4
Installing Maximizer
51
If you are using SQL Server Authentication, enter the SQL
administrator User name and Password, and click Next.
This step prompts the installation to create the MaConfig
database on the SQL Server that Maximizer CRM uses for its
configuration settings.
If you are using Windows Authentication, enter or select the SQL
Server name. You must also enter the Windows domain and
the user credentials for a Windows account that has access to
both the Maximizer server computer and the SQL Server. The
Maximizer Email Service and the Maximizer Print/Fax Service will
run using these credentials.
(The next 3 steps apply only if you selected Maximizer
Components for Microsoft IIS in step 7.) The installation
52
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
prompts you to enter the name of your HTTP Server. Enter the
name, and click Next.
Specify the Website for the Maximizer Components for
Microsoft IIS settings, and click Next.
If you choose to use an existing website, select the website from
the drop down. Its identities are displayed in the website
identities area.
If you choose to create a new website, enter the description, TCP
port, IP address, and Host Header value.
Chapter 4
Installing Maximizer
53
Specify the name of the virtual directory for each of the web
access sites, select Enabled for each site you want to enable, and
click Next.
.
Specify your SMTP Server settings, and click Next.
 The SMTP Server is used by the
Maximizer Email Service.
If your ISP requires authentication, you must select the
Outgoing mail server requires authentication checkbox and
enter the User name and Password of a valid account.
Select any of the following options, and then click Next:
54
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
•
Create Maximizer Start Menu shortcut – This option
creates a shortcut to Maximizer on the Windows Start menu.
Review the installation settings, and click Next.
(This step applies if the Database Components option is
selected.) Select a location to install the database components
or use the default location, and click Next.
The wizard displays an installation progress indicator. After
the installation is complete, click OK to close the message box.
The installation may prompt you to restart your computer.
Click Finish to close the wizard and restart the computer (if
necessary).
If your computer needed to restart, log in to Windows using
an administrator account. This step is required to complete the
installation.
If you are installing Maximizer CRM Server, and your Microsoft
IIS server is on a different machine, install Maximizer
Components for Microsoft IIS on your Microsoft IIS machine,
from the Maximizer CRM Server disc, as described in the
following section.
Installing Maximizer Components for Microsoft IIS
 You must be logged into
Windows as an administrator
to install Maximizer. After
installation, it prompts you to
restart the computer, and then
you must log in as an
administrator again to
complete the installation.
The Maximizer Components for Microsoft IIS installation is required
to install the web access sites. Microsoft IIS must already be installed.
To install Dashboard components for IIS, you must complete a custom
installation of the Maximizer server and select the Dashboard
Components for IIS option in the Select Features screen. For
information on installing Maximizer server, see “Installing Maximizer
CRM Server” on page 47.
Chapter 4
Installing Maximizer
55
NOTE: The following procedure is to install Maximizer Components
for Microsoft IIS only on a machine that is not the Maximizer
application server. To add the Maximizer Components for Microsoft
IIS to an existing Maximizer application server, ensure the installation
media is accessible from the application server. For example, if you
installed the Maximizer application server from the disc, the disc
must be in the drive. If you installed the Maximizer application server
from another machine on the network, the other machine must be
accessible. Then, modify the Maximizer installation via the Add/
Remove Programs module in the Control Panel, and enable the
Maximizer Components for Microsoft IIS option.
➤ To install Maximizer Components for Microsoft IIS
 Close all programs running on the server.
 Insert the Maximizer CRM Server disc. (The server and
workstation versions are on separate discs.)
The setup starts automatically.
 If the setup doesn’t start
automatically, you can start it
manually by running setup.exe
in the MaxEnt folder of the disc
(e.g., D:\MaxEnt\setup.exe).
 Select Install Maximizer CRM Server.
The InstallShield Wizard starts.
 Click Next to begin the installation.
 Read the license agreement, and click Yes to continue.
 Enter your Product Serial Number, First name, and Last
name into the required fields, and click Next.
 Select Maximizer Components for Microsoft IIS, and click
Next.
Maximizer Components for Microsoft IIS must be installed on
one of your network servers. Select only this option if you are
installing on the IIS Server and the Maximizer Server is on a
different machine.
 Click Next to install to the default location.
– or –
Click Browse, select a destination folder to install Maximizer
CRM, and click Next.
 Click Browse, and select the same SQL Server that you selected
for the Maximizer Server installation.
Enter the SQL administrator User name and Password, and
click Next.
56
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 If the setup is unable to stop
the IIS Server, select Start >
Settings > Control Panel >
Administrative Tools >
Services and stop the IIS
Admin Service.
Enter the name of the HTTP Server, and click Next.
The IIS Server can be identified to the web by a fully qualified
domain name (e.g., “www.yourcompany.com”), by its IP address,
or by its computer name. The most common choice is to use a
fully qualified domain name. The other choices are provided for
flexibility in the event that a fully qualified domain name is not
available at the time of installation.
Specify the Website for the Maximizer Components for
Microsoft IIS settings, and click Next.
If you choose to use an existing website, select the website from
the drop-down list. Its identities are displayed in the website
identities area.
If you choose to create a new website, enter the description, TCP
port, IP address, and Host Header value.
Specify the name of the virtual directory for each of the web
access sites, select Enabled for each site you want to enable, and
click Next.
Review the installation settings, and click Next to begin
installing.
The wizard displays an installation progress indicator.
When the installation is complete, the final step of the wizard
appears, as shown below.
Click Finish to close the wizard.
After the computer restarts, log in to Windows using an
administrator account. This step is required to complete the
installation.
Maximizer Components for Microsoft IIS are now installed.
Setting Full Permissions to the Maximizer Web Access Temp Folder
After installing Maximizer and setting more secure permissions on
the Maximizer directory (as described in “Setting File and Directory
Permissions” on page 31), give the IIS/ASP.NET account full
permissions to the following folder to allow documents to be
downloaded from the Maximizer Web Access:
...\Program Files\Maximizer\Portals\Employee\Temp
Chapter 4
Installing Maximizer
57
➤ To set full permissions to the Maximizer Web Access
Temp folder
 On the IIS server, locate the following folder:
...\Program Files Maximizer\Portal\Employee\Temp
 Open the Security Properties for the Temp folder.
Right-click the Temp folder and select Security. Click
Properties, then select the Security tab. Click Edit.
 Click Add.
 Click Locations
 Select the local machine.
 Enter IIS_USRS and click OK.
 Check Full Control.
 Click OK.
58
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Installing Maximizer Companion Applications
The following table explains how to install each of the Maximizer
companion applications. For information about each of these
applications, refer to “Maximizer CRM Modules and Components”
on page 4.
Application
Installation Instructions
Workflow Automation
Powered by
KnowledgeSync
On the Maximizer CRM Server Setup disc,
select Install Workflow Automation
Powered by KnowledgeSync and follow the
on-screen instructions.
SQL Reporting Services
Integration
Refer to “Installing SQL Reporting Services
Integration” on page 269.
Installing Microsoft Office Integration for Maximizer Web Access
You can install Microsoft Word and Microsoft Outlook Integration
for Maximizer Web Access on server and workstation computers.
Each integration installs a Maximizer Web Access toolbar menu in
Word or Outlook. These integrations are different from the
Microsoft Office integrations that are available while installing
Maximizer.
You can also install Word and Outlook integration directly in
Maximizer Web Access. The procedure involves downloading ActiveX
controls, which may be disallowed on some networks. For more
information, see the Maximizer CRM User’s Guide.
➤ To install Word or Outlook integration for
Maximizer Web Access
 Insert the Maximizer CRM Server disc.
The setup starts automatically.
 Select Browse this Disc.
 Open the Office_Integration folder.
 Double-click one of the following files:
•
MSWordInt.msi to install Word integration.
•
OutlookInt.msi to install Outlook integration
The InstallShield Wizard starts.
 Follow the steps outlined in the wizard to install the files.
Chapter 4
Installing Maximizer
59
Adding and Removing Maximizer CRM Components
Maximizer enables you to add and remove specific components of
the software without having to reinstall Maximizer itself.
➤ To add or remove Maximizer CRM components
 Close all programs running on the computer
 Insert the Maximizer disc.
 On the Setup disc Autorun screen, select Install Maximizer
CRM Server.
If the setup doesn’t start automatically, you can start it manually
by running setup.exe from the MaxEnt folder of the disc (e.g., \
MaxEnt\setup.exe).
 Select Modify, and click Next.
Checkboxes are automatically selected for any currently installed
components.
 Expand the branches to add or
remove sub-components.
 Select the checkbox beside any components to add.
 Clear the checkbox beside any components to remove.
If a component is already installed, and you want to keep it, do
not clear the checkbox beside that component.
 Click Next.
Maximizer begins the update.
60
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Full-Text Search Component of SQL Server
The Full-Text Search component of Microsoft SQL Server applies to
Search by Notes, Search by Documents, and Knowledge Base searches
in Maximizer. The Microsoft SQL Server Full-Text Search component
must be installed to use the full-text search functionality in
Maximizer.
Full-Text Search is available in the Standard and Enterprise editions
of Microsoft SQL Server. This component is installed by default, but if
you need to install it after installing Microsoft SQL Server,
instructions are included in this section. If Full-Text Search is installed,
but you prefer not to use it, you can disable the Microsoft Search
service though the Windows Control Panel on the SQL server.
To learn more about Full-Text Search in Microsoft SQL Server, refer to
your Microsoft SQL Server documentation.
The following sections contain information on the full-text search
component in SQL Server:
•
“Using Full-Text Search in Maximizer” on page 60
•
“File Types Available for Full-Text Search” on page 61
•
“Enabling Full-Text Search in Existing Address Books” on
page 62
•
“Removing Full-Text Search Catalogs from Address Books” on
page 64
Using Full-Text Search in Maximizer
The full-text search option is enabled if the Microsoft Search service
is running and the full-text search indexes have been created.
Otherwise, the option is disabled. Full-text search indexes are created
during database creation or upgrade. However, you can also force
creation of the indexes by executing the EnableFTIndexes.sql script.
When you run a search using full-text searching in Maximizer, the
search returns only entries containing full words specified in the
search text. If users search for text that is included in part of a word,
the search does not return entries that contain that word. For
example, if you search for “hedge”, only entries containing the word
“hedge” are returned. Entries containing the word “hedgehog” are
not returned.
Full-Text Search for Documents and Notes
The Search by Documents and Search by Notes functions in
Maximizer include an option to “Perform search using Full-Text
Chapter 4
Installing Maximizer
61
Indexing”. This option performs queries using the “contains”
keyword.
Note that when using full-text search to search by notes or
documents, the search returns all notes or documents associated with
the entry containing the matching note or document. The search
does not return only the note or document matching the search text.
For more information about full-text search, refer to the Microsoft
SQL Server documentation.
Full-Text Search in the Knowledge Base
Full-text search is required for full-text searches in the Maximizer
Knowledge Base. If full-text search is not enabled, the option for fulltext searching in the Knowledge Base is inaccessible.
File Types Available for Full-Text Search
 Full-text search results are
dependent on the full-text
search filter for the document
type. For specific information
about the full-text search
behavior, refer to the full-text
search filter provider’s
documentation.
Using full-text search when searching by documents enables you to
conduct full-text searches on the following file types: .DOC, .XLS,
.PPT, .TXT, and .HTM.
Full-text searching does not search through Maximizer documents
(.ETF files) and email messages saved as documents.
You can also download and install additional full-text search filters
to enable full-text searching of other document types, such as .XML,
.RTF, and .PDF:
62
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 Information about third-party
•
filters is included here for your
information only. Maximizer
cannot guarantee the
functionality of third-party
filters.
Filters for .XML and .RTF files are available from Microsoft. For
more information, visit the Microsoft website
(www.microsoft.com), and search for “xml iFilter” or “rtf iFilter”.
You could use the .RTF IFilter for full-text searching of Maximizer
Word Processor documents. In the Maximizer Word Processor,
save the your documents as .RTF files to search for the files using
the .RTF IFilter.
•
A filter for .PDF files is available from Adobe. For more
information, visit the Adobe website (www.adobe.com), and
search for “pdf iFilter”.
To use full-text search, the document being searched must be less
than 16 MB in size, and it must not contain more than 256 KB of
filtered text.
Starting the Full-Text Search Service
Full-Text Search uses the SQL Full-text Filter Daemon Launcher
service. This service is installed with the Maximizer instance of SQL
Server Express. You should check that the service is started and if
necessary start the service for the Maximizer instance of SQL server.
➤ To start the Full-Text Search service
 Open the Windows Services snap-in.
Select Start > Administrative Tools > Services or Start >
Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services.
 Locate the SQL Full-text Filter Daemon Launcher
(MAXIMIZER) service.
In the Status column, you can see if the service is started or not.
 If necessary, right-click and select Start to start the service.
Enabling Full-Text Search in Existing Address Books
If you create the Address Book before installing the Full-Text Search
SQL component, the Address Book will not have the full-text search
feature enabled.
By default, the Escona Tutorial sample Address Book does not have
full-text search enabled. This is to keep the Address Book compatible
with SQL installations that do not have the Full-Text Search
component.
Chapter 4
Installing Maximizer
 These procedures apply only to
SQL Servers where Maximizer
has already been installed.
63
➤ To enable full-text search in an existing Address
Book in SQL 2005/2008
 Open the SQL Server Management Studio (Start > Programs >
Microsoft SQL Server 2005/2008> SQL Server Management
Studio).
 If the Connect to SQL Server
dialog box doesn’t open
automatically, select File >
Connect to Object Browser.
 Select the SQL Server where the Address Book resides.
 Log in to the server, and click OK
.
 Select New Query.
 Change the database to the database that you want to enable
full-text searching on in the drop down.
 Navigate to the SQL script file to run (these script files are
located in C:\Program Files\Maximizer\DbScripts\SqlServer):
 This step shows the default
installation path for Maximizer
program files. Your Maximizer
program files may be installed
somewhere else.
•
To enable full-text search for notes, documents, and the
Knowledge Base, run the EnableFTindexes.sql script.
64
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 Select Execute
.
When the script is complete, the Full-Text Search component will
be enabled in the Address Book.
➤ To verify that full-text search is enabled in an
Address Book
 This procedure applies only to
SQL Servers where Maximizer
has already been installed.
 Open SQL Server Management Studio.
 Expand the Console Root tree until you can see the Address
Book (inside the Databases folder).
 Expand the Address Book node, and select Full-Text Catalogs.
If Full-Text Search is enabled, the following Full-Text Catalogs
appear in the list.
Notes, documents, and Knowledge Base full-text catalogs:
•
DocumentsCatalog
•
KnowledgeBaseCatalog
•
NotesCatalog
Removing Full-Text Search Catalogs from Address Books
If you have problems with full-text searching, you can remove the
full-text search catalogs from your Address Books. This procedure
may fix problems that arise after moving an Address Book to a
different server. After removing a full-text search catalog, you can reenable full-text search to regenerate the catalog for the Address
Book.
Chapter 4
Installing Maximizer
65
➤ To disable full-text search in an Address Book
•
Use SQL Server Query Analyzer to run the
Drop_FTS_Indexes_script.sql script file on the Address Book.
The script is located in the ...Maximizer\DBScripts\SqlServer
folder.
For details on running script files on Address Books, refer to the
procedure in “Enabling Full-Text Search in Existing Address
Books” on page 62.
66
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Installing Licenses
You must have enough licenses for the total number of enabled
users across all installed Maximizer products, including Maximizer
and Maximizer Web Access. When you purchase licenses from
Maximizer Software, you receive a Product License Number (PLN),
which includes licenses for a specified number of users. Once
installed, licenses must be activated before they can be used. In order
to activate your licenses you must have a current maintenance
account.
Maximizer licenses are stackable. For example, if you have 14 licenses
and want to upgrade to 32, you just need a new PLN for 18 users, and
you can apply it in addition to the original 14-user PLN.
Note that the Maximizer system login accounts (EMAILUSER and
WEBUSER) are always enabled and do not consume any Maximizer
licenses. Also, the MASTER user account is always enabled, and it
consumes a license only if you are logged in to Maximizer using the
MASTER user account.
The following sections contain information on installing Maximizer
licenses:
•
“Installing a License” on page 66
•
“Applying a License” on page 67
•
“Viewing Applied and In-Use Licenses” on page 67
Installing a License
After you install Maximizer or purchase additional licenses, you must
install the Product License Numbers (PLN). The following procedure
applies to all Maximizer CRM products.
If you install additional multi-user licenses after activating
Maximizer, you must activate the licenses before using them. In order
to activate your licenses you must have a current maintenance
account.
➤ To install a product license number (PLN)
 Run Administrator.
 Select Utilities > Install Multi-User License.
 Enter the PLN.
 Click Install License.
 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to install any additional licenses.
Chapter 4
Installing Maximizer
67
 To activate the licenses, click Activate. And in the Activation
dialog box, click Activate again.
 Click Close.
Administrator closes automatically.
The next step is to apply the PLN(s) to the Address Books.
Applying a License
After you have installed a PLN, you must apply it to the Maximizer
Address Book(s).
➤ To apply a product license number (PLN)
 After installing a PLN, start Administrator.
 Open and close each Address Book that you are applying licenses
to.
The license has now been applied to the Address Book(s).
Viewing Applied and In-Use Licenses
➤ To view the number of applied and in-use licenses
•
In Administrator, select Reports > Current Users.
68
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Activating Maximizer
In order to use your Maximizer software and licenses you must
activate them. After installing Maximizer for the first time, you can
use the software for a limited period of time before you are required
to activate the software. Once this grace period is over, you will be
unable to log in to any of your Maximizer products until you activate
the software.
•
You are prompted to activate the software when you first log in.
You can also activate the software from the Install Multi-user
Licenses dialog box in Administrator.
•
If you install additional multi-user licenses after activating
Maximizer, you must activate the licenses before you can use
them to create new users.
•
In order to activate your software and licenses, you must have a
current maintenance account.
•
If you upgrade from a version of Maximizer that has already
been activated, there will be no grace period and you will need
to activate the Maximizer software immediately before you can
use it.
➤ To activate your software and licenses
 Run Administrator.
 Select Utilities > Install Multi-User License.
 Click Activate.
 Click Install License.
 Verify that your Customer No. and Product serial number
(PSN) are correct, and click Activate.
The software will attempt to contact Maximizer servers to verify
your Customer Number and Product Serial Number and
maintenance status. Once your information has been verified, a
confirmation dialog is displayed to let you know that activation
was successful.
If the Internet activation is unsuccessful, you are given the
option to contact a Maximizer customer support representative
to obtain an Activation Code that you can use to activate the
software.
 Click OK to close the confirmation dialog. Your Maximizer
software and all licenses are now activated.
Chapter 4
Installing Maximizer
69
Where to Go from Here...
•
Create a new Address Book or upgrade an existing Address Book
to the latest version of Maximizer, as described in chapter 5
“Creating or Upgrading Address Books” on page 71.
•
Create login accounts for Maximizer users and assign users to
security groups and sales and marketing teams, as described in
chapter 6 “Setting Up Users, Groups, and Teams” on page 90.
•
Configure Address Book preferences, including duplicate
Address Book entry handling, user-defined fields, key fields,
customer service and opportunity email notification templates,
and event notification, as described in chapter 7 “Configuring an
Address Book” on page 141.
•
Configure the Address Book for access through Maximizer Web
Access
Maximizer Web Access permit users to access the Maximizer
Address Book data from any Internet-connected computer using
a browser such as Internet Explorer. You can enable Maximizer
Web Access by making certain modifications to the Address
Book. See “Configuring Web Access” on page 185.
•
For more information on converting a database, please refer to
chapter 13 “Managing Address Book Data” on page 283.
70
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
CHAPTER
Creating or Upgrading
Address Books
5
In this chapter...
“What is Administrator?” on page 72
“Creating Address Books” on page 74
“Deleting Address Books” on page 77
“Maximizer System Login Accounts” on page 79
“Changing the MASTER User Password” on page 80
“Employing an Existing Address Book” on page 82
“Upgrading or Converting an Address Book” on page 83
“Time Zone Alignment” on page 87
“Importing Vertical Templates” on page 88
5
72
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
What is Administrator?
Administrator is the administrative center of Maximizer. Use it to
complete the following tasks:
•
Create and configure Address Books.
•
Set up user-defined fields for different types of entries.
•
Manage Maximizer application settings.
•
Customize Maximizer fields and settings.
•
Manage users, sales/marketing teams, and security groups.
Once Administrator is running, you can open any Address Book and
perform administrative tasks. There will be no database conflicts if
you open an Address Book while it is in use by another user.
(However, you should ensure all users have logged out before
backing up or restoring the Address Book.)
➤ To log in to Administrator
 Click Start > Programs > Maximizer CRM > Administrator.
 Select an Address Book, and click Open.


 The default MASTER user
password is “control”, unless
it has already been changed to
another password in any
Maximizer Address Book on
the server.
 Enter the User ID and password of an administrator, and click
OK.
The Address Book opens in Administrator.
Chapter 5
Creating or Upgrading Address Books
➤ To open an Address Book
 In Administrator, select File > Open Address Book.
 Select an Address Book, and click Open.
 Enter the User ID and password of an administrator, and click
OK.
73
74
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Creating Address Books
 Sample Address Books are
installed with Maximizer and
demonstrate how a company
would use Maximizer. Do not
use the sample Address Book
for your own data.
 For information about
transferring Address Book
information, refer to
“Importing Address Book Data
from MXI or XML Files” on
page 290.
Once you have familiarized yourself with Maximizer by using a
sample Address Book, such as Escona Tutorial, your first
administrative task is to set up a new Address Book.
Administrator makes it easy to create your Address Book in a few
steps, and even enables you to create it using some of the settings
from an existing Address Book, such as preferences, templates, userdefined fields, and macros.
Once you’ve created the Address Book, set up user accounts and
configure security and preferences. If you need to add entries from
another Address Book, Maximizer can transfer those entries to the
new Address Book. Any user can transfer Address Book information,
provided that they have sufficient security privileges in their account.
The following sections contain information on creating Address
Books in Maximizer:
•
“Checklist: Setting Up an Address Book” on page 74
•
“Creating an Address Book” on page 75
Checklist: Setting Up an Address Book
Use this list to help you set up a new Maximizer Address Book.
Perform these steps in the order shown here.
 Create the new Address Book. Refer to “Creating an Address
Book” on page 75.
 Change the MASTER user password. Refer to “Changing the
MASTER User Password” on page 80.
 Add users to the Address Book. When a new Address Book is
created, it contains only the MASTER, EMAILUSER and WEBUSER
user accounts. Create an account for each Maximizer user. Refer
to “Adding a User to an Address Book” on page 91.
 Set up security for users and security groups. You may
want some users to have more access to your Address Book data
than other users. Administrator lets you restrict access to specific
users and groups of users. Refer to “User and Group Security” on
page 99.
 Test the Address Book. In Maximizer, log in to the Address
Book with one or more of the new user accounts.
Chapter 5
Creating or Upgrading Address Books
75
Creating an Address Book
Use Administrator to create new Address Books. Because a
Maximizer Address Book is located on the Microsoft SQL Server,
Administrator creates a new SQL database for Maximizer and sets up
the required Data Source Names (DSNs) for the Address Book.
➤ To create a new Address Book
 Select File > New Address Book to open the New Address Book
Wizard.
 Select the Database system type from the drop-down list.
 Select the Database server from the drop-down list, and click
Next.

The Login dialog box opens.
 Choose to use Windows or SQL Server authentication. If you
choose to use SQL authentication, enter your User ID and
password. You must have sufficient rights to create a SQL
database. Click OK.
 Select the target action Create a new Maximizer database.
 In the Address Book name field, type a name for the Address
Book. Do not exceed 25 characters.
The Address Book name may contain any keyboard characters,
including spaces. As you type the Address Book name, Maximizer
automatically adds the corresponding Database name, without
spaces or invalid characters.
In the Database name field, type a name for the database. The
database name cannot exceed 25 characters and cannot include
spaces or special characters.
The Database name applies to the database server. The Address
Book name applies to the Maximizer Address Book.
76
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 If necessary, from the Database collation drop-down list, select a
different database collation.
 The database collation
determines how SQL interprets
character data.
The default Database Collation for Maximizer is
SQL_Latin1_General_CP1_Ci_AS, which is the standard American
database collation. If your SQL Server is from another region,
you may need to use another database collation.
 Click Next.




 Click Start and monitor the creation of the database.

Chapter 5
Creating or Upgrading Address Books
77
Deleting Address Books
You can delete Address Books using Administrator. You can remove
the Address Book from Address Book lists keeping the data in the
database. You can also delete the entire Maximizer database.
The following sections contain information on deleting Address
Books:
•
“Removing an Address Book” on page 77
•
“Deleting a Maximizer Database” on page 77
Removing an Address Book
You can remove any existing Address Books from Address Book lists.
When you remove the Address Book, the data remains in the
database. You can later employ the database to log in to the Address
Book again.
➤ To remove an Address Book
 Select File > Open Address Book.
 Select the Address Book, and click Remove.
 At the prompt, click OK.
 Enter the user ID and password of an administrator for the
Address Book.
 Click OK.
Deleting a Maximizer Database
You can delete a Maximizer database in Administrator, removing the
Address Book data from the SQL Server. To preserve your Address
Book data, you should perform a backup of the database before
deleting it.
➤ To delete a Maximizer Database
 In Administrator, select File > New Address Book.
 Select the database server, and click Next.
 Enter the login credentials for the SQL server, and click OK.
 Under Target action, select Delete an existing Maximizer
database.
78
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 From the Database name drop-down list, select the database.
 At the prompt, click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the
database.
 At the next prompt, click Yes again.
If you want to remove the Address Book from Maximizer and
keep the actual database files, click No.
 Click Start.
Chapter 5
Creating or Upgrading Address Books
79
Maximizer System Login Accounts
When a new Maximizer Address Book is created, the following login
accounts are created automatically:
•
MASTER is required to log in to the Administrator module of
Maximizer. This account consumes a license only if it’s used to
log in to Maximizer.
•
EMAILUSER gives Maximizer access to Address Book data when
it performs automated email activities such as automated
campaigns. This account does not consume a Maximizer license.
•
WEBUSER is required for Customer Access and Partner Access.
This account does not consume a Maximizer license.
•
COMPANY is used for the company calendar, which displays
company events in the Maximizer calendar. Company calendar
events are created under the COMPANY user account. This user
account provides read-only access of its calendar to all users. This
account is disabled by default. However, if the account is
enabled and used to log in to Maximizer, it consumes a
Maximizer license.
•
maximizer_default is a system login created in the Maximizer
instance of Microsoft SQL. It is used only by Maximizer and
cannot be used to log in to Maximizer or Microsoft SQL. If this
user is missing see “Recreating the Maximizer_Default User” on
page 336.
It is important to leave the MASTER, EMAILUSER, and WEBUSER
accounts enabled. Maximizer requires these accounts in order to
function correctly.
Passwords
It is important to change the password for the system login accounts
from the default immediately after creating an Address Book. For
instructions on changing the account passwords, refer to “Changing
the MASTER User Password” on page 80.
User passwords may expire periodically, according to the domain
password policy or local password policy configured by the system
administrator. When your password expires, Maximizer prompts you
to change it. Depending on the password policy configuration, new
passwords may be required to be of sufficient complexity. For
example, it may have requirements for minimum length,
alphanumeric or special characters, etc. However, passwords for the
MASTER, EMAILUSER, and WEBUSER and sample user accounts, such
as JNAPOLI, will not expire, regardless of the password policy
configuration.
80
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Changing the MASTER User Password
 If the MASTER password for an
existing Address Book has
been changed, and then you
create a new Address Book,
the new Address Book will
have the same password as
the existing Address Book, and
not “control”.
The default password for the MASTER user is control. For security
reasons, you should change this password immediately after creating
a new Address Book. Maximizer also creates the WEBUSER and
EMAILUSER system user accounts, and it’s important to change the
passwords for these accounts as well.
All Address Books on the same SQL Server must have the same
MASTER user password.
➤ To change the MASTER user password
 In Administrator, log in to the Address Book as MASTER.
 Select File > Manage Users.
 Select MASTER from the user list and click Password.

 In the Old password field, type control (or the current
password if you have changed the MASTER password before).
Chapter 5
Creating or Upgrading Address Books
81
 In the New password and Confirm password fields, type the
new MASTER user password, and click OK.


Maximizer prompts you to change the password for all Address
Books on this SQL Server. The MASTER user must have the same
password for every Address Book on the same SQL Server.
 Click Yes to proceed.
The MASTER user password is updated.
 Repeat this procedure to change the passwords for the
WEBUSER and EMAILUSER accounts as well.
82
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Employing an Existing Address Book
To add an existing Address Book to a Maximizer Server’s Address
Book list, you must employ the Address Book.
➤ To employ an Address Book
 Select File > New Address Book to run the New Address Book
wizard.
 Select the Database server where the target Address Book is
stored, and click Next.
 When prompted, enter the SA Password, and click OK.
 Select the Employ an existing Maximizer database option.
 From the Database name drop-down list, select an existing
database, and click Next.
 Click Start.
 When the process is finished, click Close.
The Address Book is now ready to use and appears in the Open
Address Book list.
Chapter 5
Creating or Upgrading Address Books
83
Upgrading or Converting an Address Book
You can upgrade an Address Book by opening it in Administrator.
Administrator also has a built-in utility to convert existing Maximizer
databases from older versions to the current version, and to convert
Maximizer Pervasive databases to Maximizer SQL databases.
You should always back up the Address Book before upgrading. For
instructions on backing up, refer to “Backing Up and Restoring
Address Book Data” on page 284. For older databases, refer to the
User’s Guide for your previous version of the software. If you have
customized the dictionary, also back up that file separately before
upgrading.
After upgrading a database, you should always perform an Address
Book validation and recovery. For further information, refer to
“Verifying and Recovering Address Book Data” on page 287.
 If you are upgrading
Maximizer Pervasive
databases, do not uninstall
Pervasive until you have
successfully upgraded all of
the Pervasive databases.
If you have created any of your own database triggers, stored
procedures, or views, follow the steps below.
➤ To upgrade a database that uses custom database
triggers, stored procedures, or views
 Upgrade the Address Book database, as described in this section.
 Drop all triggers, stored procedures, and views.
 Recreate any triggers, stored procedures, and views.
For information about dropping and creating triggers, stored
procedures, and views, refer to your SQL Server documentation.
Upgrading a Maximizer Enterprise SQL Database
Use the upgrade utility to upgrade a Maximizer Enterprise 10.x, 11,
12, 2015, or 2016 SQL database.
➤ To upgrade a Maximizer Enterprise SQL database
 Ensure Maximizer is closed before proceeding with the upgrade.
If you have an Address Book open in Administrator, select File >
Close Address Book.
 Select Utilities > Upgrade Maximizer Enterprise 10.x / 11 /
12 / 2015 / 2016 SQL Database.
 Select the Maximizer SQL database to upgrade.
 Log in with the MASTER password or as a user with a Maximizer
Administrator role.
84
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 Select Yes at the backup request prompt.
This step saves a .BAK file (backup copy) of the SQL database on
the server (typically in the “\MSSQL\BACKUP” directory).
Maximizer tells you when the conversion is complete. You can
check the conversion details in a log file called ADMN_##.LOG in
the Maximizer\Logs directory (## is the two-digit day of the
month) on the machine running Administrator.
Chapter 5
Creating or Upgrading Address Books
85
Converting a Maximizer Pervasive (Btrieve) Database to SQL
➤ To convert a Maximizer Pervasive Database
 Ensure Maximizer is closed before proceeding with the upgrade.
If you have an Address Book open in Administrator, select File >
Close Address Book.
 Select Utilities > Upgrade Maximizer / Maximizer Enterprise
Btrieve Database.
 The New Address Book wizard guides you through the process of
creating a new SQL database that contains the converted
Maximizer data. See “Creating Address Books” on page 74.
After you’ve created the new Address Book, it prompts you for
the file locations.
 Specify the location of the database you’re converting, and a
backup location.
86
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 Pervasive database files have a
.MAX extension, and Pervasive
backup files have a .SAV
extension.
 In the Select Maximizer Files to convert dialog box, select All
Files and then click Convert.
Maximizer tells you when the conversion is complete. You can
check the conversion details in a log file called ADMN_##.LOG in
the Maximizer\Logs directory (## is the 2-digit day of the month).
After converting a Pervasive Address Book to SQL, you must
synchronize user passwords in the Address Book with the SQL
Server.
➤ To synchronize user passwords after conversion
 If you don’t do this password
synchronization process after
upgrading the database, you
will get an ODBC driver error
message.
 In Administrator, select Utilities > System Configurations.
 Click the Synchronize button.
The users’ SQL login passwords will now be the same as their
Maximizer Address Book passwords.
If users in the converted Address Book exist in any other
Maximizer Address Books on the SQL Server, change their
passwords in the other Address Books to match their password in
the converted Address Book. Refer to “Changing User
Passwords” on page 97.
Chapter 5
Creating or Upgrading Address Books
87
Time Zone Alignment
After upgrading your database, use the Time Zone Alignment utility
to align users’ appointment, Hotlist task, and opportunity activity
times with the time zone in which these records were created. This
step is necessary only for users that have created appointments,
Hotlist tasks, or opportunity activities from a time zone that is
different than the Maximizer CRM Server.
 Users can only be aligned
once.
➤ To align time zones
 Select Utilities > Time Zone Alignment.
 Select all users that belong to a specific time zone.
 From the Time Zone drop-down list, select the time zone of the
users.
 Select the Adjust for daylight saving time option if the
selected users are in a time zone or region that observes daylight
saving time.
 Click Align.
 Repeat steps 2 to 5, as necessary, for all applicable users and time
zones.
88
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Importing Vertical Templates
Maximizer provides vertical templates for several industries. You can
import any of these vertical templates into your Address Book. A
vertical template creates industry-specific user-defined fields, action
plans, search catalogs, column setups, document templates, etc. in
your Maximizer Address Book.
➤ To import a vertical template
 Log in to the Address Book in Administrator or Maximizer.
You must be logged in as MASTER to import a vertical template.
 In Administrator, select File > Import > Vertical Templates >
[industry].
– or –
In Maximizer, in the top-left corner of the window, click the
Maximizer button, and select Import/Export/Transfer. Then,
under Import, select Vertical Templates > [industry].
The Import [industry] Vertical Template dialog box opens,
displaying the items included in the template.
 Click Import.
Items in the list are highlighted as the import process advances.
When the import process is complete, an Import Summary
displays the number of items imported with the vertical
template.
Chapter 5
Creating or Upgrading Address Books
89
CHAPTER
Setting Up Users,
Groups, and Teams
6
In this chapter...
“Adding a User to an Address Book” on page 91
“User Administration” on page 96
“Changing User Passwords” on page 97
“User and Group Security” on page 99
“Security Groups” on page 106
“Record Ownership” on page 112
“Sales and Marketing Teams” on page 113
“Linking Maximizer Users to Windows Logins” on page 116
“User Preferences” on page 120
6
Chapter 6
Setting Up Users, Groups, and Teams
91
Adding a User to an Address Book
As the Address Book administrator, you already have a user ID
(MASTER) set up for you. Log in as an administrative user in
Administrator to perform setup or administrative tasks. The default
password for MASTER is “control”, but it may be different if it has
already been changed in any Address Book. To use Maximizer, you
should create a personal user ID for yourself.
Before a user can log in to Maximizer, you must assign that person a
Maximizer user ID. All security in Maximizer is based on user IDs and
the rights you assign to them. You should also assign a user Display
Name, which easily identifies the user throughout Maximizer. When
you fill in the First name and Last name fields in the Add User dialog
box, the Display name field is completed automatically to include the
user’s first and last name together. You can change this display
name.
 The user’s name and contact
information can be inserted as
merge fields in the word
processor.
Use the User Properties dialog box to enter a user’s name and contact
information, assign user-defined fields, specify access rights, and add
a user to security groups and sales/marketing teams. Note that you
can also add users to security groups and sales/marketing teams using
the Groups/Teams module.
➤ To add a new user to the Address Book
 Select File > Manage Users.
The Manage Users dialog box opens.
 Click Add.

The Copy Selected User’s Settings dialog box opens.
92
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 Click Yes to copy the settings from the selected user, or No to
start with the default settings.
The Add User dialog box opens.
 In the General tab, fill in the basic information for this user.
•
In the User ID field, enter unique identification for the user.
The user must specify the User ID to log in to Maximizer.
•
The Display name field fills in automatically with the user's
first and last names. You can change the display name.
•
The Dept and Division fields affect where the user is
displayed in user-selection lists (for example, in the Add
Appointment dialog box).
•
In the Email field, enter an email address for the user.
The user must have an email address specified to send email
from Maximizer.
•
Under Module login, ensure Enabled is selected next to
Windows Access or Web access.
Users enabled for Web Access can log in to Maximizer Web
Access and Mobile Access. You must have an available user
license to enable the user.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Users, Groups, and Teams
93

 In the User-Defined Fields tab, select the values of any userdefined fields, as appropriate.
You can set up these custom fields in the File > Set Up UserDefined Fields dialog box. Refer to “Setting Up User-Defined
Fields for an Address Book” on page 152 for more information.
 Select the Access Rights tab.
 Click Modify User Access Settings, and set up the access
settings for the user.
94
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide


For an explanation of the relationship between user access
rights, user access settings, and group access settings, refer to
“User and Group Security” on page 99.
For an explanation of each of the access settings, refer to “User
Access Rights and User/Group Access Settings” on page 100.
 Click OK to save the changes to the access settings.
 In the Groups/Teams tab, select any security groups and sales/
marketing teams to which the user should belong.
(To add groups and teams, use the File > Security Groups and
Teams dialog box.)
Click OK.
The default user password is maximizer. Ensure that you or the
user create a new password from the Manage Users dialog box.
The new User ID and its associated information now appear in
the User list.
Enabled and Disabled Users
You can create any number of users in your Address Book. However,
you must have licenses for all enabled users. The total number of
users across all products cannot exceed the number of available
licenses. Any additional users must be disabled. Disabled users cannot
Chapter 6
Setting Up Users, Groups, and Teams
log in to Maximizer. But other users can add disabled users to
appointments and can specify disabled users as opportunity and
customer service case monitors.
You cannot enable a user when you are at your limit of licensed
users. You must first disable an existing enabled user, and then
enable the user.
95
96
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
User Administration
In Maximizer and Administrator, you can manage all settings for a
user from a central location. In Administrator, select File > Manage
Users, select a user, and click Administer User to open the Administer
User dialog box. You can change properties, preferences, and other
default settings for the user. Click the links in the navigation pane on
the left to display information in the main content pane on the right.
In the content pane, you can access links to a number of user settings.
Navigation pane
option
Allows you to...
User Properties
View and edit general information, userdefined fields, access rights, groups/teams, or
linked Windows login for the selected user in
the Properties dialog box.
For more information, see “User and Group
Security” on page 99.
User Preferences
View and edit preferences for the current user
in the Preferences dialog box.
For more information, see the Maximizer CRM
User’s Guide.
Password
Change the password for the selected user in
the Password dialog box.
For more information, see “Changing User
Passwords” on page 97.
Default Entries
Modify the Address Book, opportunity, and
customer service default entries for the selected
user.
For more information on default entries, see the
Maximizer CRM User’s Guide.
Default Notes
Change the Address Book, opportunity,
customer service, and campaign default note
for the selected user.
For more information on default notes, see the
Maximizer CRM User’s Guide.
Security Groups and
Teams
Configure security groups and sales and
marketing teams in the Security Groups and
Teams dialog box.
For more information see “Security Groups” on
page 106 and “Sales and Marketing Teams” on
page 113.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Users, Groups, and Teams
97
Changing User Passwords
The following procedure explains how to change user passwords in
Administrator. However, users can also change their own passwords
in Maximizer by selecting Manage Users from the User Management
group on the Setup tab.
If the user exists in more than one Address Book, and you change the
user’s password for one Address Book through Maximizer or
Administrator, it prompts you to change the password in all Address
Books on the server. Always click Yes to change the user’s password
in all Maximizer Address Books. (Otherwise, the user will encounter
error messages when trying to log into another Address Book.) The
user’s password in all Maximizer Address Books on that SQL Server,
and the SQL login password, will then be the same.
Note that Internet Information Server (IIS) must be restarted after
changing user passwords in Administrator, if applicable. Otherwise,
if the affected users are connected when the password is changed,
both the old and new passwords are valid.
If your Maximizer CRM database server is running on a Windows
Server 2008 machine or later with Microsoft SQL Server 2008 or later,
user passwords may expire periodically, according to the domain
password policy or local password policy configured by the system
administrator. When your password expires, Maximizer prompts you
to change it. Depending on the password policy configuration, new
passwords may be required to be of sufficient complexity. For
example, it may have requirements for minimum length,
alphanumeric or special characters, etc. However, passwords for the
MASTER, EMAILUSER, WEBUSER, COMPANY, and sample user
accounts, such as JNAPOLI, will not expire, regardless of the password
policy configuration.
 It is strongly recommended
that users working in more
than one Address Book on the
same SQL Server use the same
password for every Address
Book.
➤ To set and change a user’s password in
Administrator
 In Administrator, select File > Manage Users.
The Manage Users dialog box opens.
98
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 Select the Maximizer user, and click Password.


 The default password for a
new user is “maximizer”.
The Password dialog box opens.
 Type the new password, then retype it on the next line to
confirm it.
 Click OK to save the new password.
If the user exists in more than one Address Book on the SQL
Server, Maximizer then prompts you to change the user’s
password in all Address Books.
 Click Yes to change the user’s password in all Maximizer Address
Books.

Chapter 6
Setting Up Users, Groups, and Teams
99
User and Group Security
As the Administrator, you can restrict each user’s access rights to
types of entries, essentially providing per-module security. User
access rights are accessible by going to the Access Rights tab of a
user’s properties (see “Modifying User Access Settings” on page 104).
These user access rights consist of the access settings (security
settings) of the user account as well as the access settings of any
security groups the user is a member of. For example, if the
Opportunity Delete permission is not set in the user’s access settings,
but is granted in the access settings of a group the user is a member
of, then the user is granted Delete permissions to Opportunity
entries.
Each checkbox contains one of the following potential values:
Checkbox State



Access Setting
Access Right
Granted
Granted
Denied
n/a
Not set
Not granted
The following table illustrates user access rights derived from user
and group access settings.
User Access Setting
+ Group Access Setting
= User Access Right



























If the user belongs to more than one group, the conflict illustrated
below results in the user not being granted the access right.
User or Group
Access Setting
+ User or Group
Access Setting
+ User or Group
Access Setting
= User
Access Right




100
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
User Access Rights and User/Group Access Settings
The following tables describe each of the user access rights and user
or group access settings.
 If a Read permission is denied
(X), then the Insert, Modify,
and Delete permissions are
automatically disabled. A user
cannot have Insert, Modify, or
Delete permissions without
having Read permission.
Permissions
Permissions
Controls the selected user's or group's right to
view, add, change, or remove . . .
Address Book
Entries in the Address Book window
User-defined fields
Values in user-defined fields
User-defined field
setup
User-defined field definitions
Notes
Notes attached to entries
Users must have the Delete checkbox selected to
be able to use the File > Purge > Notes function.
Documents
Documents attached to entries
Users must have the Delete checkbox selected to
be able to use the File > Purge > Documents
function.
Mailing Address
Mailing addresses of Address Book entries
Company Library
Files and folders in the Company Library
OrderDesk
Entries in the OrderDesk window.
This access right applies only to earlier versions
of Maximizer.
Opportunities
Entries in the Opportunities window
Strategy Library
Strategy Library information for opportunities
Campaigns
Entries in the Campaigns window
Customer Service
Entries in the Customer Service window
Knowledge base
Articles in the Knowledge Base window
User/Group setup
Users and Security Groups
• If the user does not have any User/Group
Setup rights, other users' or groups'
properties are not accessible.
• If the user has read rights only, the related
tabs are visible, but information cannot be
modified.
• Insert, Modify, and Delete rights provide the
corresponding access rights to all user and
group properties.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Users, Groups, and Teams
Permissions
101
Controls the selected user's or group's right to
view, add, change, or remove . . .
Accounting
Accounting transactions.
This access right applies only to earlier versions
of Maximizer.
Action Plan Library
Action plan templates in the Action Plan Library
Quotas
Entries in the Quotas window
Dashboards
Dashboard entries
Privileges
Privilege
Grants authorization to . . .
Allow Global Edit
Perform global edits of Address Book entries in
Maximizer. Consider advising users with this
privilege to back up the Address Book before
making significant changes with Global Edit.
Allow private entries Add entries that are not visible to other users.
The user can use the Owner, Full Access, or Read
Access fields to create private entries or restrict
entries to a group or a user.
Allow public entries
Add entries that are visible to all other users in
the Address Book.
Note that the Allow private entries and Allow
public entries options cannot be denied at the
same time. If both of these options are denied
in two different groups a user belongs to (i.e.,
the checkboxes contain an x), the user is
granted the Allow private entries right by
default.
Allow transfer
Transfer Address Book entries between
Maximizer Address Books. If you do not select
this option, the menu items for transferring are
disabled.
This privilege applies only to earlier versions of
Maximizer.
Allow import
Import Address Book entries between
Maximizer Address Books or from external
applications. If you do not select this option, the
commands for importing are disabled.
102
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Privilege
Grants authorization to . . .
Allow export
Export Address Book entries between
Maximizer Address Books, and export
information to Microsoft Excel. If you do not
select this option, the commands for exporting
are disabled.
Allow sync contacts
with external clients
Synchronize Address Book entries using Outlook
Integration. However, users can still synchronize
calendar appointments or Hotlist tasks without
this access right.
Modify system
tables
Add, modify, or delete available values (items)
of system fields, such as City and Category in
Address Book entries. See “System Table Fields”
on page 104 for more information.
Modify note
properties
Change the values of the date, time, and creator
fields in notes.
Modify email
templates
Create and modify email templates.
Modify/delete other
owners’ notes
Change and delete other users’ notes. However,
to be able to view other users’ private notes, the
user must have the “Modify other users’ private
entries” privilege enabled.
Modify other users’
private entries
View and modify entries marked as private that
belong to other users.
This security privilege will override any other
security settings for entries, including any
settings based on security groups, so if a user
has this privilege enabled, the user has full read
and modify access to all entries, regardless of
the entry’s Full Access, Read Access, or Owner
settings. This security privilege is very powerful
and should be granted with caution.
Modify other users’
general information
Change information in the General and UserDefined Fields tabs of the user properties for
other users.
Modifying a user’s general information, such as
Last Name, First Name, Company, and Phone
Number, does not have to be restricted to the
MASTER user. In many cases, an administrative
assistant or a receptionist can be granted the
rights to modify user’s general information
without compromising the security of
Maximizer. This privilege allows the user to
have access to all Maximizer users’ general
information without giving them full security
rights to the Address Book.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Users, Groups, and Teams
Privilege
Grants authorization to . . .
Allow manage
currencies
Access the Currency Library in Maximizer, and
add, edit, or delete entry currencies
Read audit log
View the audit log for entries.
103
User’s Roles
User Role
Grants authorization to . . .
Administrator
Log in to Administrator and perform tasks
based on the user’s security settings.
Customer Service
Manager
Have customer service cases assigned or
escalated to the user. It also allows the user to
change the value of the Case owner field.
This role also contains all functions of the
Customer Service Representative role.
Customer Service
Representative
Have customer service cases assigned to the
user.
Knowledge Base
Approver
Approve Knowledge Base articles. A newly
created article is assigned a draft status until it is
opened and assigned a different status by an
approver.
Sales Manager
Re-assign the Account Manager field to a
different user, use territory alignment, and
create or modify quota templates.
This role also contains all functions of the Sales
Representative role.
Sales Representative
Be assigned to the Account Manager field. A
Sales Representative can assign the Account
Manager field to other Sales Representatives
only if the Account Manager field is already
assigned to the user or it is empty and not
assigned to another user.
Allow printing to these destinations
These settings apply only to earlier versions of Maximizer.
Destination
Grants authorization to . . .
Printer
Print to the default printer.
File
(Rich Text Format)
Print to a .RTF file.
File (PDF Format)
Print to a .PDF file.
104
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Destination
Grants authorization to . . .
Email
Attach the report to an email message, usually
in a .RTF file.
HTML Format
Print to a .HTM file.
Preview
Display a preview of the print output on the
screen.
System Table Fields
Items (available values) for the following fields can be added,
modified, or deleted for users who are granted the Modify system
tables privilege.
Field
Description
Address Book Entry Fields
Mr/Mrs, Position, Salutation, Company, Department,
Division, City, St/Prov, Country, Email Description, Phone
Description, Do Not Solicit By, Category, Lead Source, and
Related Address Book Entry Relationship Type
Phone Fields
Subject and Phone Call Result
Hotlist Task and Appointment Fields
Activity and Priority
Campaign Fields
Traditional Campaign Objective, Traditional Campaign
Activity, Traditional Campaign Template Activity
Description, Automated Campaign Products/Services, and
Automated Campaign Categories
Customer Service Fields
Products/Services, Categories, and Subject
Opportunity Fields
Products/Services, Categories, Objective, and Next Action
Modifying User Access Settings
For an explanation of the relationship between user access rights,
user access settings, and group access settings, refer to “User and
Group Security” on page 99.
For an explanation of each of the access settings, refer to “User
Access Rights and User/Group Access Settings” on page 100.
➤ To modify access settings of an existing user
 Select File > Manage Users.
 Select the Maximizer user, and click Properties.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Users, Groups, and Teams
 Select the Access Rights tab.



 Click Modify User Access Settings.
 Modify any of these settings as appropriate.

 Click OK to close the Access Settings.
 Click OK to save the changes.
105
106
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Security Groups
A security group is a group of users, usually belonging to a functional
group such as a Finance department, who have access to entries
related to their group and have specific security access settings. A
user may be a member of more than one security group.
 It is important to note that
groups have access settings,
but they do not have access
rights that users do.
The properties, access settings, and group members are specified in
the Group dialog box.
Group Name and ID
Every security group has a name and an ID that identify the group.
Changing the name has no effect on the group functionality.
However, you cannot change the group ID. If you ever need to
recreate these security groups, it is imperative that you use the
correct security group IDs. (The group name is irrelevant.)
Group Access Settings
A security group has Access Settings that affect the level of access its
members have within the Address Book. It is important to note that
granting an Access Setting to a group does not necessarily mean that
all members of the group will have that Access Right. The level of
access each individual user has to the Address Book is controlled by
the Access Settings of the user account and the Access Settings of any
groups the user belongs to. For more information about user and
Chapter 6
Setting Up Users, Groups, and Teams
107
group Access Settings, refer to “User and Group Security” on
page 99.
Group Members
You can add or remove users from the group in the Members tab of
the Group dialog box.
You can also add or remove a user from any groups on the Groups/
Teams tab of the User properties.
Default Security Groups in all New Address Books
Every new Address Book contains several security groups, described
in the following table. Only the MASTER user belongs to these
groups by default, but you can add additional users to each group.
Security Group
Name
Group ID
Enables group members to...
Accounting
ACCTNG
Restrict accounting transaction notes
to members of this group. This security
group applies only to previous versions
of Maximizer.
Company
Announcement
Authors
A_CAA
Access the Company Announcements
folder in Company Library, where
group members can add
announcements that appear in the
Company Announcements box on the
My Work Day page in Maximizer and
Maximizer Web Access.
Crystal Reports
Users
R_CRU
Generate new reports from the Crystal
Reports option in the Reports tab in
Maximizer. This security group applies
only to previous versions of Maximizer.
Customer Access
Admin Users
C_ADM
Access the News Manager section of
the Customer Access Administrator.
In Address Books that have been
upgraded from a previous version, this
group may be called “Customer Portal
Administration Users”.
Customer Access
Config Users
C_CFG
Access the Configuration Manager
section of Customer Access
Administrator.
In Address Books that have been
upgraded from a previous version, this
group may be called “Customer Portal
Configuration Users”.
108
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Security Group
Name
Group ID
Enables group members to...
Maximizer Web
Access Admin
Users
EMPADM
Access the Edit section of the
Maximizer Web Access, where the user
can update external links.
In Address Books that have been
upgraded from a previous version, this
group may be called “Employee Portal
Administration Users”.
Partner Access
Admin Users
P_ADM
Access the News Manager section of
the Partner Access Administrator.
In Address Books that have been
upgraded from a previous version, this
group may be called “Partner Portal
Administration Users”.
Partner Access
Config Users
P_CFG
Access the Configuration Manager
section of Partner Access
Administrator.
In Address Books that have been
upgraded from a previous version, this
group may be called “Partner Portal
Configuration Users”.
SSRS Report
Management
R_SSRS
Add and edit SQL Server Reporting
Services reports in Maximizer Web
Access.
You must specify the login credentials
for a member of this group when you
enable SQL Server Reporting Services.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Users, Groups, and Teams
109
Creating a New Security Group
For an explanation of the relationship between user access rights,
user access settings, and group access settings, refer to “User and
Group Security” on page 99.
For an explanation of each of the access settings, refer to “User
Access Rights and User/Group Access Settings” on page 100.
➤ To create a new security group and assign members
 The Security Groups and
Teams command is also
available in Maximizer if the
logged-in user has Insert rights
for User/Group setup. On the
Setup tab, select Security
Groups or Teams from the User
Management group.
 Select File > Security Groups and Teams.
 Click Add.

 Enter a Group Name.
 Enter a unique Group ID (up to 6 characters). The first character
of the Group ID must be a letter.
 Assign Access Settings to the group.
Access Settings for the group affect the Access Rights of all users
who are members of the group.
110
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide



 Select the Members tab.
 From the Available Users list, select a user to add to the
security group, and click Add. Repeat to add additional users.




 To remove a user, select the
user from the Members list,
and click Remove.
 Click OK to save the new security group.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Users, Groups, and Teams
Modifying Group Access Settings
For an explanation of the relationship between user access rights,
user access settings, and group access settings, refer to “User and
Group Security” on page 99.
For an explanation of each of the access settings, refer to “User
Access Rights and User/Group Access Settings” on page 100.
➤ To modify access settings of an existing group
 Select File > Security Groups and Teams.
 Select the group name.
 Click Properties.
 Select the appropriate settings for the group, and click OK.
111
112
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Record Ownership
In Maximizer, many entries have an Owner field, or Full Access and
Read Access fields. These fields control who can view or edit the
entry. Users can access their own private records, all publicly owned
records, and private records owned by their group. For example, the
user “Alice” of the “Finance” group can view all of her own records,
all records owned by the “Finance” group, and all Public records.
Sometimes it’s important to allow users to have private entries
because some entries aren’t meant to be shared with your entire
organization. In Maximizer, it’s possible to specify Full Access and
Read Access to specific users or groups for each entry in the Address
Book. In addition to Address Book entries, you can specify ownership
of notes, documents, and other types of entries.
When a user creates a new Address Book entry, he or she can
designate access for that entry. Full Access or Read Access can be
granted to specific users or groups, or it can be Public.
To be able to use the Owner, Full Access, or Read Access fields, the
user must have the “Allow private entries” access right enabled.
Field
Value
Description
Owner
Public
All users can view and modify the entry,
regardless of their user or group security
settings.
User
Only the specified user can view or modify the
entry.
Group
Only members of the specified group can view
or modify the entry, regardless of their user or
group security settings.
Public
All users can modify the entry, regardless of
their user or group security settings.
Note that the Read Access field becomes
disabled if Full Access is set to Public.
User
Only the specified user can modify the entry.
Group
Only members of the specified group can
modify the entry, regardless of their user or
group security settings.
Public
All users can view the entry.
User
Only the specified user can view the entry.
Group
Only members of the specified group can view
the entry.
Full Access
Read Access
Chapter 6
Setting Up Users, Groups, and Teams
113
Sales and Marketing Teams
If your company or organization is using opportunity or campaign
management, you can set up sales and marketing teams. Sales teams
are used for sales opportunities in Maximizer, and marketing teams
are used for traditional marketing campaigns.Teams help leaders
delegate and manage opportunities and traditional campaigns in
Maximizer. Team leaders can delegate tasks in an opportunity or a
traditional campaign to team members.A team is composed of a
team leader and team members:
•
Team Leader: In a team, one person is designated as a team
leader who has the right to make changes to the opportunity or
traditional campaign, as well as to the opportunity’s or
traditional campaign’s team.
•
Team Member: A regular team member does not have the right
to change the traditional campaign/opportunity or the team.
The member’s role is to perform the tasks the team leader
assigns.
A team member has either edit, audit, or standard rights, as
described below. The team leader always has edit rights.
 If you have someone in mind
as a team member with edit
rights, it saves time to assign
rights in Administrator rather
than on a per-campaign or peropportunity basis.
•
Edit: Allows a member full access to all campaigns and
opportunities assigned to the team. Members with this type of
access have full team leader rights and may modify the status of
an opportunity or campaign and may also reassign tasks.
•
Audit: Allows a member to view all campaigns and
opportunities assigned to him/her.
•
Standard: Allows for basic rights to “work” (apply steps)
opportunities and campaigns. These rights do not allow the
member to change a status of an opportunity or campaign.
Security, or access rights, cannot be assigned to sales or marketing
teams. Therefore, to control the security of more than one user, you
must set up a security group for the team members.
114
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
➤ To create a new sales or marketing team
 Select File > Security Groups and Teams.
 Select the Teams tab, and click Add.

 On the General tab, enter a team name.
 Select Sales or Marketing from the Type drop-down list.


 Select the Members tab.
 From the Available Users list, select a user to add to the team,
and click Add. Repeat to add additional users to the team.
To remove a user, select the user from the Members list, and click
Remove.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Users, Groups, and Teams
115
 In the Members list, select a member to assign as the Leader,
and select Leader from the Status drop-down list.
There can be only one leader in the team.
 For each member other than the Leader, select the appropriate
member right from the Rights drop-down list.
 Click OK to save the new team.





116
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Linking Maximizer Users to Windows Logins
Linking Maximizer users with Windows logins enables them to access
Maximizer Address Books without specifying a user name and
password. This provides a “single sign-on” configuration for
Maximizer users—they won’t need to log into the network with one
user name and password and log into Maximizer with another.
If Windows Authentication is specified as the means of user
authentication during the installation, and users are not mapped in
the Windows Authentication tab, Maximizer will prompt users for
their Maximizer user name and password.
➤ To enable Maximizer users to log in to Maximizer
automatically using single sign-on
 Select File > Manage Users.
 Select the Maximizer user, and click Properties.
The Properties dialog box opens.
 Each user entered in this
dialog box must be added as a
Windows user for SQL on the
SQL Server. These users must
also be given database access
with the database role set to
CRMGroup.
 Select the Windows Authentication tab.
 Click Add.


 Enter the qualified name of the user that corresponds to the
Maximizer user (e.g., DOMAIN-NAME\user_name).
 Select the Enabled checkbox, and click OK.
You can assign multiple network users to a Maximizer user.


Chapter 6
Setting Up Users, Groups, and Teams
117
➤ To create Maximizer user groups in Windows
 This procedure is written for
network and database
administrators. For more
information, refer to the
Windows operating system
documentation.
 On the domain server, create a new user group called Maximizer
Global.
 Add the user accounts of all Maximizer users to the Maximizer
Global group.
 On the SQL Server computer, create a new user group called
Maximizer Local.
 Add the Maximizer Global group as a member of the Maximizer
Local group.
➤ To grant database access to the users
 In SQL Server Management Studio navigate to the Logins
branch.
 Right-click and select New Login from the shortcut menu.
118
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 Create a new SQL login account and assign the Maximizer
Local as the name.
 In the User Mapping page, select the databases that Maximizer
Local should be able to access.
 For each database, select the public and CRMGroup database
roles.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Users, Groups, and Teams
 For the MaConfig database, select the db_datareader and
db_datawriter database roles.
119
120
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
User Preferences
The Address Book administrator is responsible for setting up initial
user preferences in Administrator. However, users can change many
of their user preferences in Maximizer.
➤ To set Address Book user preferences
 Select File > Manage Users.
 Select the Maximizer user, and click Preferences.
 See the Maximizer CRM User’s
Guide for more information on
user-related preferences.
 Set the user-related preferences on each of the tabs.
CHAPTER
Configuring an Address
Book
7
In this chapter...
“Address Book Preferences” on page 122
“System Fields” on page 125
“User-Defined Fields” on page 127
“Mandatory Fields” on page 137
“Writing Formulas and Mandatory Rules” on page 141
“Key Fields Lists” on page 155
“Preventing Duplicate Entries” on page 158
“Email Notification for Opportunities/Customer Service Cases” on page 162
“Event Notification” on page 170
“Recording Holidays in the Holiday Editor” on page 173
7
122
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Address Book Preferences
You can set Address Book preferences in Administrator. The
following table outlines the settings available in each section of the
Preferences.
In this section
You can set the following preferences:
Address Book
• Values available in the Category field for
Address Book entries.
• Fields to check for duplication of Address
Book entries.
Auditing
Auditing preferences for Address Book entries.
Automated Services
Automated email and print/fax service
preferences and initialization.
 If you are using automated campaigns, ensure you have
the “Activate services for the currently open Address
Book” checkbox selected in the Automated Services tab.
Campaigns
• Campaign completion reasons.
• Settings for campaign monitoring.
Customer Service
• Customizable values for the Billing type,
Subject, Case origin, Case queue, Case reason,
Status, and Case Type fields.
• Default case response time and case status.
• Settings to disallow direct changes to case
fields.
• Default case monitoring lists.
• Assign or unassign email templates for user
and customer notification.
Dashboards
• Configure dashboards from the server.
• Add or modify SQL metrics for dashboard
indicators.
Diagnostic
Log file settings for Maximizer modules. Note
that users can also set Diagnostic preferences in
Maximizer.
Key Fields
Key field lists available for Address Book entries,
opportunities, campaigns, and customer service
cases.
Locations and
Resources
Locations and resources available in
appointments.
Mandatory Fields
Mandatory and optional data entry
requirements for system fields in Address Book
entries, opportunities, campaigns, and customer
service cases.
Chapter 7
123
In this section
You can set the following preferences:
Opportunities
• Opportunity processes, stages, and
probabilities of close.
• Opportunity confidence rating schemes.
• Opportunity completion reasons.
• Opportunity monitoring lists.
• Email notification templates for
opportunities.
Security
Account lockout and Mobile Access security
options.
System Fields
• Add, modify, and delete note and document
categories.
• Add, modify, and delete values of the
products/services and categories (in
opportunities, campaigns, customer service
cases, and appointments) and Do Not Solicit
By (in Address Book entries) fields.
System Options
• Global server.
• Address Book nameand ID.
• System-assigned Address Book entry IDs,
campaign IDs, customer service case IDs,
and opportunity IDs.
• Overview page caption.
• Default settings for Maximum entries field in
Maximizer search dialog boxes.
• Partner notification of assigned Address Book
entries or opportunities.
• User/group setting which determines if lists of
users/groups display only groups to which the
current user belongs and other users in the
groups in fields such as Read Access and Full
Access.
• Event notification.
• Live Update options.
• Multi-currency.
• SQL Server Reporting Services integration
with Maximizer
• Start of the fiscal year.
• Opportunity and campaign synchronization.
124
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Set Address Book Preferences
 Select File > Preferences.
 Set the Address Book preferences on each of the tabs.
Chapter 7
125
System Fields
You can set up custom values for system fields in the following
sections in the preferences:
•
System Fields – The Category fields in notes and documents,
the Do not solicit by field in Address Book entries, and the
Products/Services and Categories fields in opportunities,
campaigns, customer service cases, and appointments.
•
Locations/Resources – The Location and Resources fields in
appointments.
•
Customer Service – The Billing Type, Case or Article Subject,
Origin, Queue, Reason, Status, and Type fields in customer
service cases.
•
Opportunity – The Process, Stage, Confidence Rating, and
Completion Reason fields in opportunities.
•
Campaigns – The Completion Reason field in automated
campaigns.
•
Address Book – The Category field in Address Book entries.
Add Custom Items to System Fields
You can use Administrator to add custom items to system fields. The
steps may differ slightly depending on the field.
 In Administrator, select File > Preferences.
 Select the tab that contains the system field.
You can modify system fields in the System Fields, Locations/
Resources, Customer Service, Opportunity, Campaign, and
Address Book preferences.
 In the left pane, under Preferences, select the section that
contains the system field.
You can modify system fields in the System Fields, Locations/
Resources, Customer Service, Opportunity, Campaign, and
Address Book preferences.
 If you are working in the System Fields, Customer Service, or
Locations/Resources tabs, select the field In the list on the left..
The current list of values for the field are displayed on the right.
In the other tabs, the current list of values is displayed under the
field name.
 To the right of the list, click Add.
126
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 Enter the name of the item.
 If necessary, enter other properties of the item.
•
For most fields, specify the user who requested the item.
•
For the Status field in customer service cases, select the
actions (assign, escalate, or resolve) for which you want to
apply the item.
•
For the Process field in opportunities, click Add Stage to
add one or more stages to the process.
•
For the Stage field in opportunity processes, specify the
probability of close and target age for the stage.
•
For the Completion reason field in opportunities and
campaigns, specify the completion status the item applies to.
 Click OK to finish adding the item.
 Click OK to save the changes to the preferences.
Modifying System Table Fields in Maximizer
End users can modify values of some system table fields directly in
Maximizer. Users must have the Modify system table fields privilege
to change the values. The following fields can by changed:
•
Address Book entry fields – Mr/Mrs, Position, Salutation,
Company, Department, Division, City, St/Prov, Country, Email
Description, Phone Description, Do Not Solicit By, Category, Lead
Source, and Related Address Book Entry Relationship Type
•
Phone fields – Subject and Phone Call Result
•
Task and appointment fields – Activity and priority
•
Campaign fields – Traditional Campaign Objective, Traditional
Campaign Activity, Traditional Campaign Template Activity
Description, Automated Campaign Products/Services, and
Automated Campaign Categories
•
Customer service fields – Products/Services, Categories, and
Subject
•
Opportunity fields – Products/Services, Categories, Objective,
and Next Action
Chapter 7
127
User-Defined Fields
User-defined fields are custom fields used to record additional
information on Maximizer entries. You can set up different userdefined fields for the different types of entries in Maximizer. Each
user-defined field can be associated with only one type of entry. You
can create user-defined fields for the following types of entries:
•
Address Book – Classifies Address Book entries. You can view
these fields in the Address Book window or in an open Address
Book entry.
•
Opportunities – Classifies opportunities. You can view these
fields in the Opportunities window or in an open opportunity.
•
Campaigns – Classifies campaigns. You can view these fields in
the Campaigns window or in an open campaign.
•
Customer Service – Classifies customer service cases. You can
view these fields in the Customer Service window or in an open
customer service case.
•
Users – Classifies Maximizer users. You can view these fields in
the User Properties dialog box.
You can include user-defined fields in Key Fields lists in the Basic
Information tab of open Address Book entries, opportunities,
customer service cases, and campaigns.
Types of User-Defined Fields
You can create different types of user-defined fields depending on
the types of values required for the field. Maximizer defines the
following types of user-defined fields:
•
 Encrypted user-defined fields
Alphanumeric user-defined fields – These fields record any
alphanumeric text (letters and numbers) up to a specified
maximum number of characters. You can encrypt alphanumeric
fields for security protection. Note that you cannot disable or
enable encryption once you have created the field.
You can use alphanumeric user-defined fields to record URLs for
entries. The fields are displayed as hyperlinks in Key Fields lists
and in the User-Defined Fields following window.
cannot be transferred,
imported, or exported. They
are also not searchable.
•
Date user-defined fields – These fields store a specific date or
an annually recurring date.
•
Duration user-defined fields – These fields calculate the
duration between another date basic or user-defined field and
the current date. Because they are calculated from values of
other fields, values for duration fields can be viewed in entries
but cannot be set manually.
128
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
•
Formula user-defined fields – These fields calculate values
based on other basic or user-defined fields. Formula userdefined fields can return alphanumeric, date, or numeric values.
Because they are calculated from values of other fields, values
for formulas fields can be viewed in entries but cannot be set
manually.
•
Numeric user-defined fields – These fields record numeric
values. You can specify a number of decimal places. For example,
specify two decimal places to use this type of field for monetary
values. You can also specify that currency symbols are displayed
with the field.
•
Table user-defined fields – These fields enable you to select a
value or values from a list. This type of field is very useful for
multiple choice or multiple value fields. If you create a table
user-defined field with the “single value only” attribute, only
one value can be selected from the list.
•
Yes/no user-defined fields – These fields record either yes or
no values. Since the fields must contain one of these values,
these user-defined fields are always mandatory.
Access Rights for User-Defined Fields
The Maximizer adminstrator user can create user-defined fields at
any time in Administrator. You can also give any user the ability to
create, change, or delete user-defined fields in Maximizer by
enabling the following access rights in Administrator:
•
The User-defined fields access right enables the user to assign
values to user-defined fields, but not create fields.
•
The User-defined field setup access right enables the user to
create new user-defined fields.
You can also restrict user access to a specific user-defined field. The
user-defined field properties has options for Full Access (read and
write) and Read Access (read-only) permissions.
The Full Access and Read Access fields contain a drop-down list of
users, groups, and Public. Select which user(s) the Full Access or Read
Access permission applies to:
•
Public – Assigns the user-defined field access permission to all
users.
•
[user] – Assigns the user-defined field access permission to an
individual user.
•
[security group] – Assigns the user-defined field access
permission to all members of a security group.
Chapter 7
129
Setting Up User-Defined Fields
User-defined fields are created and modified in the Set Up UserDefined Fields dialog box in Maximizer and the User-Defined Fields
page in Administrator. The fields and folder are organized in a tree
view. There can be multiple levels of folders, each containing other
folders or user-defined fields. The folder structure allows a maximum
of three folder levels.
You can set up different lists of user-defined fields for each type of
entry. The user-defined field structure can be multi-tiered with
multiple levels of user-defined field folders, each of which may
contain other folders or user-defined fields. The folder structure may
contain a maximum of three folder levels.
The following sections contain information on setting up userdefined fields:
•
“Sorting User-Defined Fields” on page 129
•
“Create a Folder for User-Defined Fields” on page 130
•
“Create a User-Defined Field” on page 131
•
“Add Items to a Table User-Defined Field” on page 132
Sorting User-Defined Fields
The order that user-defined fields display in the Set Up User-Defined
Fields dialog boxUser-Defined Fields page determines the order that
user-defined fields display for users.
Click the Move Up and Move Down buttons to move a field or folder
up or down in the list. These buttons move fields only within their
current folder level. You cannot use them to move items in or out of
folders. To select a field, click on the blank space on a field row.
130
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Use the Reset Order button to sort items in alphabetical order. All
user-defined fields and folders in the selected folder are resorted.
You can also use the mouse to drag and drop a field or a folder to a
different position in the list. Dragging it onto a field places it
immediately below that field. Dragging it onto a folder places it at
the top of the list inside that folder. Holding the mouse on a folder
for about a second expands the folder, and then you can continue
dragging the item to a specific position in that folder.
Create a Folder for User-Defined Fields
You can group similar user-defined fields into folders and subfolders
to a maximum folder depth of three levels. Grouping user-defined
fields into folders is particularly useful if you have a large number of
user-defined fields. Grouping them makes them easier to find and
reduces the amount of scrolling needed to find the one you are
looking for.
 Select the tab for the category of user-defined fields you want to
work with.
 To create a top-level folder, select the Address Book name at the
top of the list.
– or –
To create a folder within an existing folder, select the existing
folder.
 Click Add Folder.
 Enter a name for the new folder, and click OK.
 User-defined field and folder
The new folder now appears in the user-defined fields list.
names cannot contain forward
slash or backward slash
characters ( / \ ).
 If you set the folder to hidden,
it is not displayed on the UserDefined Fields tab when you
clear the Show hidden fields
option.
 Move the new folder to a different position in the list, if desired.
Chapter 7
131
Create a User-Defined Field
To complete this procedure, you must have Insert permission for
user-defined field setup.
You can create user-defined fields for Address Book entries,
opportunities, campaigns, customer service cases, and user accounts
in the Set Up User-Defined Fields dialog box. This dialog box is
available from the Setup tab in Maximizer or the File menu in
Administrator.
 Select the tab for the category of user-defined fields you want to
work with.
 Select an existing folder, inside which you want to create a new
field.
– or –
Select a user-defined field to create the new field at the same
level as the selected field.
 User-defined field and folder
names cannot contain forward
slash or backward slash
characters ( / \ ).
 Duration user-defined fields
can only be created in
Maximizer Web Access or Web
Access Administrator.
 Click Add Field.
 In the Field Name field, type a name for the user-defined field.
 From the Type drop-down list, select the type of user-defined
field you want to add.
 If you are adding a formula user-defined field, select the type of
value the formula should return from the Return type dropdown list.
 Specify the properties of the user-defined field.
For formula user-defined fields, click the ellipsis button next to
the Formula field to specify the formula. Then, click Insert
Field to add basic or user-defined fields to the formula.
 You cannot insert other
formula user-defined fields
into the formula.
 Click OK.
132
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
The user-defined field is added to the list.
Add Items to a Table User-Defined Field
Table user-defined fields contain a list of similar items from which a
user may select one or more items. As part of the process of creating
a new user-defined field of this type, you should add the items to the
table.
 Select the table user-defined field, and click Items.
– or –
Double-click the table user-defined field.
The list of existing items for the table user-defined field is
displayed.
 Click Add.
Chapter 7
133
 Type a name for the item, and specify the other properties of the
item.
 If you set the item to hidden,
you can hide it from the
Available Values list by
clearing the Show hidden
items option.
 Click OK.
 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to add any additional items to the table userdefined field.
Formula User-Defined Fields
Formula user-defined fields calculate values based on other basic or
user-defined fields. Because they are calculated from values of other
fields, values for formulas fields can be viewed in entries but cannot
be set manually.
When you create a new or modify an existing formula user-defined
field, you can click the ellipsis button next to the Formula field to
specify the formula for the user-defined field. You can write the
formula using existing basic and user-defined fields. Click the Insert
Field button to select fields to add to the formula.
Formula user-defined fields can return alphanumeric, date, or
numeric values. You specify the type of return value while creating
the user-defined field. The functions available depend on the types
of fields that you want to manipulate.
You can add arithmetic expressions to your formulas. You can also
add functions and conditional expressions to create more complex
formulas.
134
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
The following sections contain information on writing formulas for
user-defined fields:
•
“Arithmetic Expressions” on page 141
•
“Alphanumeric Functions” on page 142
•
“Date Functions” on page 148
•
“Numeric Functions” on page 151
•
“Conditional Expressions for Formulas” on page 134
Conditional Expressions for Formulas
You can create conditional expressions in your formula user-defined
fields. Conditional expressions use the If expression to evaluate
comparison statements and return values based on the results of the
statements.
Conditional expressions use the following syntax:
If (Comparison Statement, True Value, False Value)
•
Comparison Statement – Uses comparison operators to
compare two values. Comparison statements can use the
following operators:
•
== to check that two values are equal to each other.
•
!= to check that two values are not equal to each other.
•
> to check that the first value is greater than the second
value.
•
< to check that the first value is less than the second value.
•
>= to check that the first value is greater than or equal to the
second value.
•
<= to check that the first value is less than or equal to the
second value.
Comparison statements can be combined with logical operators:
•
Or – Combines two comparison statements where either one
of the statements is true.
•
And – Combines two comparison statements where both of
the statements is true.
•
Not – Negates a comparison statement.
•
True Value – The value of the expression when the comparison
statement is true. It can also be combined with other
expressions.
•
False Value – The value of the expression when the comparison
statement is false. You can include other conditional statements
to supply different answers for different values.
Chapter 7
135
Examples of Conditional Expressions
The following examples illustrate complex formula user-defined
fields using conditional expressions.
Example 1
If ([Creation Date] > Date(2009, 7, 9), "New", "Old")
This example compares a date field with a constant date, using the
Date function to format the date properly. The formula returns an
alphanumeric value. If the date is later than the supplied date, the
field has a value of “New”. If the date is earlier than the supplied
date, the field has a value of “Old”.
Example 2
If(Not(Search("Canada",[Country])>0 Or Search("USA",[Country])>0 Or
Search(“Mexico”,[Country])>0),"Other","North America")
This example inspects the Country field of an Address Book entry to
determine if the entry is located in North America or not. It uses the
alphanumeric Search function to look for the countries “Canada”,
“USA”, or “Mexico”. If none of those strings are found in the entry’s
Country field, the formula evaluates to “Other”, but if one of those
strings is found it outputs “North America”.
Example 3
If (Dayofweek([Creation Date]) == 1, "Sunday",
If (Dayofweek([Creation Date]) == 2, "Monday",
If (Dayofweek([Creation Date]) == 3, "Tuesday",
If (Dayofweek([Creation Date]) == 4, "Wednesday",
If (Dayofweek([Creation Date]) == 5, "Thursday",
If (Dayofweek([Creation Date]) == 6, "Friday",
If (Dayofweek([Creation Date]) == 7, "Saturday", " ")))))))
This example uses the Dayofweek function to get the day of the
week expressed as an integer value for a date field. It compares the
value with integer values and outputs a string representing the day
of the week in. If it does not have a value, it outputs an empty string.
136
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Transfer User-Defined Fields Between Address Books
 In Maximizer, select the Maximizer button and select Import/
Export/Transfer > User-Defined Fields.
 In the Transfer User-Defined Fields dialog box, select the userdefined fields to transfer.
 Encrypted user-defined fields
cannot be transferred between
Address Books.
 Click Transfer.
 To copy the data into a target Address Book that is accessible
from the computer, select the Direct Address Book access
transfer method.
Accessible Address Books are listed in Available target Address
Books.
– or –
If the target Address Book is not listed, select the Email transfer
method.
The data is compressed into a .MET file and attached to an email
message.
 If you selected Direct Address Book access, select the target
Address Book, click OK, and log on to the Address Book.
Maximizer transfers the user-defined fields and notifies you
when the transfer is complete.
– or –
If you selected Email, click OK.
Maximizer creates an email message with the user-defined fields
attached in a .MET file. Type an email address in the To field, and
click Send.
Chapter 7
137
Mandatory Fields
You can specify that system fields and user-defined fields are
mandatory. System fields are set as mandatory in Administrator.
User-defined fields are set as mandatory when creating the userdefined fields in Administrator or in the Set Up User-Defined Fields
dialog box.
Mandatory fields are denoted with an asterisk displayed after the
field type.
When you create or modify entries, Maximizer checks that all
mandatory fields have values. If any mandatory fields are empty, you
are prompted to enter a value for the field.
Set a System Field as Mandatory
You can set up different lists of mandatory fields for Companies,
Individuals, Contacts, customer service cases, opportunities,
automated campaigns, and traditional campaigns.
Some system fields, such as Company name and Full access, are
mandatory by default. In the Mandatory Fields preferences, they are
displayed as “Always Mandatory”. The other fields are optional by
default, but you can specify that any of the fields must be
mandatory.
Use this procedure to set a system field as mandatory or optional.
 In Administrator, select File > Preferences.
 Select the Mandatory Fields tab.
 From the Show mandatory entries for drop-down list, select
the type of entry that the field applies to.
The list of system fields for the entry is displayed with the fields’
current status: Optional, Always Mandatory, or Mandatory.
 Select the field.
 Click Mandatory or Optional.
The status of the field is changed to Mandatory or to Optional.
 Click OK to save the changes.
138
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Set a User-Defined Field as Mandatory
To complete this procedure, you must have Modify permission for
user-defined field setup.
Use this procedure to set an existing user-defined field as always
mandatory.
 Select the user-defined field and click Properties.
– or –
Double-click the alphanumeric, date, or numeric user-defined
field.
 From the Mandatory drop-down list, select Always
mandatory.
 Click OK to save the changes.
Rules for Mandatory User-Defined Fields
When you work with Address Book entries, opportunities, or
customer service cases, you can specify that user-defined fields are
mandatory if a rule is matched. For example, you can write a rule
that makes a user-defined field mandatory only when the category
for an Address Book entry is set to “Partner”. When users set the
value of the Category field to Partner, they are prompted to set a
value for the user-defined field when they save the entry.
A mandatory rule consists of a comparison statement. It may
compare a field with a value or with another field. Or it may compare
formulas using the same syntax as formula user-defined fields.
You can create comparison statements with the following symbols.
•
== to check that two values are equal to each other.
•
!= to check that two values are not equal to each other.
•
> to check that the first value is greater than the second value.
•
< to check that the first value is less than the second value.
•
>= to check that the first value is greater than or equal to the
second value.
•
<= to check that the first value is less than or equal to the second
value.
Comparison statements are often combined with logical operators to
add multiple statements together.
•
Or – Combines two comparison statements where either one of
the statements is true.
Chapter 7
139
•
And – Combines two comparison statements where both of the
statements is true.
•
Not – Negates a comparison statement.
While the comparison statements may be simple, say to compare a
field with a value or with another field, you can also write more
complex rules. Within the comparison statements, you can include
arithmetic operators (+, -, * /) and alphanumeric, date, and numeric
functions to create complex formulas.
Set a User-Defined Field as Mandatory Given Conditions
To complete this procedure, you must have Modify permission for
user-defined field setup.
Use this procedure to set a user-defined field as mandatory when a
specified rule is matched. This procedure applies only to user-defined
fields for Address Book entries or opportunities.
 Select the user-defined field and click Properties.
– or –
Double-click the alphanumeric, date, or numeric user-defined
field.
 From the Mandatory drop-down list, select Mandatory based
on rule.
 To the right of the Rule field, click the ellipsis button.
 Enter the rule, and click OK.
Click Insert Field to add basic or user-defined fields to the rule.
 Click OK to save the changes.
Mandatory Rules Using Table Fields
When you create mandatory rules that compare table fields, the
values in the fields are treated like alphanumeric fields.
To compare a table field that contains multiple values, the
comparison statement must include the same text that’s displayed in
the Maximizer interface, including all values for the field. For
example, the statement [Category] == "Partner" will be true only if
the only value set in the Category field is "Partner". If the Category
field includes the "Distributor" value as well, the rule would validate
with the following statement: Category == "Distributor, Partner".
You can use the Search function to locate text in multiple-value table
fields.
140
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
To check that one of multiple values are set in a table field, use the
OR operator in the rule. To check that two (or more) values are set in
a table field, use the AND operator in the rule.
Example: Mandatory rule for table field using OR
The following rule validates if either the Distributor or Partner value
is set in the Category field:
(Search(“Partner”,[Category]) > 0) OR (Search(“Distributor”,[Category]) > 0)
Example: Mandatory rule for table field using AND
The following rule validates if both "Distributor" and "Partner" are
set in the Category field:
(Search(“Partner”,[Category]) > 0) AND (Search(“Distributor”,[Category]) > 0)
Chapter 7
141
Writing Formulas and Mandatory Rules
 You cannot insert other
formula user-defined fields
into the formula.
Formula user-defined fields calculate values based on other basic or
user-defined fields. You can write formulas consisting of arithmetic
expressions, alphanumeric, date and numeric functions, as well as
conditional expressions.
When you work with Address Book entries, opportunities, or
customer service cases, you can specify that user-defined fields are
mandatory if a rule is matched. Rules for mandatory user-defined
fields are similar to the formulas in formula user-defined fields. A
mandatory rule consists of a comparison statement. It may compare a
field with a value or with another field. Or it may compare formulas
using the same syntax as formula user-defined fields. Comparison
statements can contain any of the elements included in formulas,
including alphanumeric, date, and numeric functions.
Arithmetic Expressions
Using the basic arithmetic symbols, you can include arithmetic
expressions in formula user-defined fields and in rules for mandatory
user-defined fields. Combine multiple expressions to create
complicated arithmetic formulas.
Formula user-defined fields and rules for mandatory user-defined
fields can use the following symbols:
•
+ for addition.
Add any numeric values to each other, add integers to date
values, and add alphanumeric fields or strings separated with
quotation marks to each other.
•
- for subtraction.
Subtract any numeric values from each other, and subtract date
values from each other. Date values return integers representing
the number of days between the dates.
•
* for multiplication.
Multiply numeric values together.
•
/ for division.
Divide numeric values by other numeric values.
•
( ) for nested operations.
Use parentheses to create more complex operations on several
numeric values or to combine multiple comparison statements.
142
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Example: Numeric Values
Formula: ([Numeric field] + [Numeric field]) * [Numeric field]
Return value: Numeric
Example: Date Values
Formula: [Date 1] - [Date 2]
Return value: Numeric, the number of days between the two dates.
Example: Date and Numeric Values
Formula: [Date 1] + [Numeric field]
Return value: Date
Example: Alphanumeric Values
Formula: [FirstName] + " " + [LastName]
Return value: Alphanumeric, the two words listed together, separated by a
space (FirstName LastName).
Alphanumeric Functions
Use alphanumeric functions to manipulate alphanumeric fields in
formula user-defined fields and in rules for mandatory user-defined
fields. When you use alphanumeric functions, you can insert
alphanumeric fields as the parameters for the function or you can
use any text strings. When you insert strings into functions, enclose
the text of the string in quotation marks.
You can add the following functions to formulas using alphanumeric
user-defined fields.
•
Len – Returns the number of characters in a text string.
•
Lowercase – Converts a string to lower-case characters.
•
Mid – Returns a specific number of characters from the text
string starting at the position you specify.
•
Search – Searches for text in a string and returns the position of
the text.
•
Substitute – Substitutes existing text with specified text.
•
Text – Changes a numeric value to an alphanumeric text string.
You can manipulate the returned string using any of the other
alphanumeric functions.
Chapter 7
143
•
Uppercase – Converts a string to upper-case characters.
•
Value – Converts an alphanumeric value to a numeric value.
Alphanumeric values beginning with alphabetical characters
return a value of 0. You can manipulate the string using any of
the numeric functions.
Len
Returns the length of a string.
Syntax
Len(Alphanumeric)
Parameters
Parameter
Data Type
Description
Alphanumeric
String
The string to return the length of.
Example
Len([Company])
This example returns the number of characters in the company’s
name.
Lowercase
Converts a string to lower-case characters. Use this function or the
Uppercase function with the Search function and with equal (==)
statements to compare alphanumeric values when you do not care
about the case of the string.
Syntax
Lowercase(Alphanumeric)
Parameters
Parameter
Data Type
Description
Alphanumeric
String
The string to convert to lower case.
144
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Example
Lowercase([City])=="vancouver"
This example of a mandatory rule checks for the value "Vancouver"
in the City field. The rule validates if an entry has the values
"Vancouver", "vancouver", or "VANCOUVER" in the City field.
Mid
Returns a specific number of characters from a text string starting at
a specified position.
Syntax
Mid(Alphanumeric, StartInt, LengthInt)
Parameters
Parameter
Data Type
Description
Alphanumeric
String
The string that you want to search
through. Normally, this would be a
merge field.
StartInt
Integer
The position of the first character
in the string you want to return.
LengthInt
Integer
(Optional) The length of the string
you want to return.
Example
Mid("First Last", 7)
This example returns the text starting at the 7th position in the field.
In this case, it returns “Last”.
Search
Searches a string for text and returns the position of the text in the
string. This function is case sensitive.
Syntax
Search(SearchString, Alphanumeric, StartInt)
Chapter 7
145
Parameters
Parameter
Data Type
Description
SearchString
String
The text to search for in the string.
Alphanumeric
String
The string to search through. To
ignore the case of the string,
include the Lowercase or
Uppercase function in this
parameter.
StartInt
Integer
(Optional) The starting character
to search.
Examples
Search("Wine", [Company_Name])
This example searches for the text “Wine” in the company name and
returns the place in the name where the text starts as an integer.
Search("Partner", [Category]) > 0
This example of a mandatory rule searches for the value "Partner" in
the Category field. This rule validates if an entry has the category set
to "Partner" even if the there are other values set in the Category
field as well.
Search("wine", Lowercase([Company_Name])) > 0
This example of a mandatory rule searches for the text “wine” in the
company name ignoring the case. This rule validates if the Company
Name field includes the text "Wine", "wine", or "WINE".
Substitute
Substitutes existing text with specified text. This function returns the
entire string containing the new text.
Syntax
Substitute(Alphanumeric, OldText, NewText)
Parameters
Parameter
Data Type
Description
Alphanumeric
String
The string containing the text you
want to change.
146
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Parameter
Data Type
Description
OldText
String
The text you want to change.
NewText
String
The text substituted into the
string.
Example
Substitute([Address], "St", "Street")
This example returns the address with the abbreviation “St”
substituted with the text “Street”.
Text
Converts a numeric value to a string. You can then use the other
alphanumeric functions to manipulate the returned string.
Syntax
Text(Number, DecPlace)
Parameters
Parameter
Data Type
Description
Number
Decimal
The numeric value that you want
to convert.
DecPlace
Integer
(Optional) The number of decimal
places to return.
Example
Text([Revenue], 2)
This example returns the revenue as an alphanumeric string with two
decimal places. If revenue, a numeric field, is 50000, the Text function
in the above example returns 50000.00 as an alphanumeric value.
Uppercase
Converts a string to upper-case characters. Use this function or the
Lowercase function with the Search function and with equal (==)
statements to compare alphanumeric values when you do not care
about the case of the string.
Chapter 7
147
Syntax
Uppercase(Alphanumeric)
Parameters
Parameter
Data Type
Description
Alphanumeric
String
The string to convert to upper
case.
Example
Uppercase([City])=="VANCOUVER"
This example of a mandatory rule checks for the value "Vancouver"
in the City field. The rule validates if an entry has the value
"Vancouver", "vancouver", or "VANCOUVER" in the City field.
Value
Converts an alphanumeric value to a numeric value. If the value
contains alphabetic characters, it returns 0. You can then manipulate
the numeric value using any numeric functions.
Syntax
Value(Alphanumeric)
Parameters
Parameter
Data Type
Description
Alphanumeric
String
The alphanumeric string to
convert.
Example
Value([Contract Number])
This example returns the alphanumeric user-defined field, Contract
Number, as a numeric value. If the field contains an alphabetical
character, it returns 0.
148
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Date Functions
Use date functions to manipulate date fields in formula user-defined
fields and in rules for mandatory user-defined fields. When you use
date functions, you can use date fields as the parameters for the
function or you can supply date values for the functions. When you
supply date values, use the Date function to format the values as
dates.
You can add the following functions to formulas using date fields.
•
Date – Converts integers to date values.
•
Day – Returns the day of the month as an integer from a date
value.
•
Dayofweek – Returns the day of the week expressed as an
integer.
•
Month – Returns the month as an integer from a date value.
•
Year – Returns the year as an integer from a date value.
Date
 Any formula that supplies an
invalid date to the Date
function will result in a blank
value. For example, the
function “Date (2012, 4, 31)”
is invalid since the month of
April does not have 31 days. If
this function is part of a larger
compound expression, the
entire expression will evaluate
to blank.
Converts integers to date values.
Syntax
Date(Year, Month, Day)
Parameters
Parameter
Data Type
Description
Year
Integer
The four-digit year.
Month
Integer
The one- or two-digit month.
Day
Integer
The one- or two-digit day.
Example
Date(2009, 7, 9)
This example returns July 9, 2009 as the date value.
Day
Returns the day of the month as an integer from a date value.
Chapter 7
149
Syntax
Day(Date)
Parameters
Parameter
Data Type
Description
Date
Date
The date to return the day for.
Examples
Day(Date(2009, 7, 9))
This example returns 9 as the day of the month in the date value.
Day([Creation Date])
This example returns the day of the month that an entry was created.
Dayofweek
Returns the day of the week expressed as an integer for a specified
date value, with 1 = Sunday, 2 = Monday, 3 = Tuesday, and so on.
Syntax
Dayofweek(Date)
Parameters
Parameter
Data Type
Description
Date
Date
The date value for which to return
the day of the week.
Examples
Dayofweek(Date(2009, 7, 9)
This example returns 5, for Thursday, as the day of the week for the
given date.
Dayofweek([Creation Date])
This example returns the day of the week that an entry was created.
Month
Returns the month as an integer from a date value.
150
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Syntax
Month(Date)
Parameters
Parameter
Data Type
Description
Date
Date
The date from which to return the
month.
Examples
Month(Date(2009, 7, 9))
This example returns 7, for July, as the month in the date value.
Month([Creation Date])
This example returns the month that an entry was created.
Year
Returns the year as an integer from a date value.
Syntax
Year(Date)
Parameters
Parameter
Data Type
Description
Date
Date
Date value for which to return the
year.
Examples
Year(Date(2009, 7, 9))
This example returns 2009 as the year for the date value.
Year([Creation Date])
This example returns the year that an entry was created.
Chapter 7
151
Numeric Functions
Use numeric functions to manipulate numeric values in formula userdefined fields and in rules for mandatory fields. You can add the
following functions to formulas using numeric fields.
•
Ceiling – Rounds a number up to the nearest integer or up to a
specified number of decimal points.
•
Floor – Rounds a number down to the nearest integer or down
to a specified number of decimal points.
•
Round – Rounds a number to the nearest integer or to a
specified number of decimal points.
Ceiling
Rounds a number up to the nearest integer or up to a specified
number of decimal points.
Syntax
Ceiling(Number, DecPlace)
Parameters
Parameter
Data Type
Description
Number
Decimal
The numeric value to round.
DecPlace
Integer
(Optional) The number of decimal
places to round up to.
Example
Ceiling(2.32, 1)
This example returns 2.4.
Floor
Rounds a number down to the nearest integer or down to a specified
number of decimal points.
Syntax
Floor(Number, DecPlace)
152
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Parameters
Parameter
Data Type
Description
Number
Decimal
The numeric value to round.
DecPlace
Integer
(Optional) The number of decimal
places to round down to.
Example
Floor(2.36, 1)
This example returns 2.3
Round
Rounds a number to the nearest integer or to a specified number of
decimal points.
Syntax
Round(Number, DecPlace)
Parameters
Parameter
Data Type
Description
Number
Decimal
The numeric value to round.
DecPlace
Integer
(Optional) The number of decimal
places to round to.
Example
Round(2.45687, 2)
This example returns 2.46.
Chapter 7
153
Comparison Statements in Formulas and Mandatory Rules
Rules for mandatory user-defined fields consist of comparison
statements. Formula user-defined fields may also include comparison
statements if the formulas include conditional expressions, using “If”
statements.
You can create comparison statements with the following symbols.
•
== to check that two values are equal to each other.
For example, [Category] == “Partner” verifies that the
Category field is set to “Partner”.
•
!= to check that two values are not equal to each other.
For example, [Category] != “” verifies that the Category field is
not empty, i.e. it has a value.
•
> to check that the first value is greater than the second value.
For example, [Annual Sales] > 20000 verifies that the Annual
Sales user-defined field has a value greater than 20,000.
•
< to check that the first value is less than the second value.
For example, [Contract Expiry Date] < [Last Service Date]
verifies that the Contract Expiry Date field is earlier than the Last
Service Date field.
•
>= to check that the first value is greater than or equal to the
second value.
•
<= to check that the first value is less than or equal to the second
value.
Comparison statements are often combined with logical operators to
add multiple statements together.
You can compare any values including alphanumeric, date, and
numeric values. Alphanumeric values are compared by checking the
alphabetical order of the string. When you compare values from
table fields, they are treated as alphanumeric values.
Comparison statements are case sensitive. If you want to ignore the
case of fields, include the Lowercase or Uppercase function in the
statement. For example, [City] == "Vancouver" is true only if the
value of the City field is set to "Vancouver". However,
Lowercase([City]) == "vancouver" is true if the value of the City field
is set to "Vancouver", "vancouver", or "VANCOUVER".
To compare a table field that contains multiple values, the
comparison statement must include the same text that’s displayed in
the Maximizer interface, including all values for the field. For
example, the statement [Category] == "Partner" will be true only if
the only value set in the Category field is "Partner". If the Category
field includes the "Distributor" value as well, the rule would validate
with the following statement: Category == "Distributor, Partner".
154
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
You can use the Search function to locate text in multiple-value table
fields.
Logical Operators for Formulas and Mandatory Rules
You can use logical operators to build more complex comparison
statements in formula user-defined fields and in rules for mandatory
fields.
You can use the following logical operators:
•
Or – Combines two comparison statements where either one of
the statements is true.
For example, [Category] == “Partner” OR [Category] ==
“Distributor, Partner” is true if the Category field has either
the “Partner” value alone or has both the "Partner" and the
“Distributor” values.
•
And – Combines two comparison statements where both of the
statements is true.
For example, [Category] == “Partner” AND [Annual Sales] >
20000 is true if the Category field has the “Partner” value and if
the Annual Sales field is greater than 20,000.
•
Not – Negates a comparison statement.
For example, NOT ([Category] == “Partner” AND [Annual
Sales] > 20000) is true in all cases where the previous example is
false.
Chapter 7
155
Key Fields Lists
Key Fields are important user-defined fields and system fields that
are highlighted on the Details tab for Address Book entries,
opportunities, and customer service cases, and on the Basic
Information tab in campaigns, making them more readily accessible.
You can choose any user-defined fields and some system fields to
include in the Key Fields lists. You may want to select mandatory
fields as Key Fields, so users don’t miss them when creating new
records. You may also select frequently used fields, making it easier
for users to quickly enter these values. And you may select fields
important to a particular group of users because different Key Field
lists can be defined for specific users and groups, or for all users.
Key Fields for Different Types of Entries
Each Key Fields list contains different sets of fields for each type of
entry. For example, you can create a new Key Fields list and add
different sets of fields for Companies and Opportunities. When you
add new fields to the list for opportunities, you can add only
opportunity basic fields and user-defined fields. When you view the
Details tab for an opportunity in Maximizer, only the fields added to
the opportunities list will be displayed.
When you work with Address Book entries, you can set up separate
lists of Key Fields for Companies, Individuals, and Contacts. As well,
each type of Address Book entry has different lists for sales leads and
for regular entries. For example, Individual - Lead Key Fields appear
only in Individual Address Book entries that are marked as sales
leads.
Add fields to the Key Fields list for only the types of entries that you
want to make the Key Fields list available to. If the Key Fields list
contains no fields for a specific type of entry, the list will not be
available when you view that type of entry.
Each Key Fields list can contain separate lists for the following types
of entries:
•
Company Lead – For Companies marked as sales leads.
•
Company – For Companies that are not marked as sales leads.
•
Individual Lead – For Individuals marked as sales leads.
•
Individual – For Individuals that are not marked as sales leads.
•
Contact Lead – For Contacts that are marked as sales leads.
•
Contact – For Contacts that are not marked as sales leads.
•
Opportunity – For opportunities.
156
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
•
Campaign – For campaigns
•
Customer Service – For customer service cases.
Restricting Access to Key Fields
The Key Fields lists in the Details tab or in the Basic Information tab
are visible only to the users or groups specified as having Read Access
to the Key Fields lists. However, other users may still be able to access
the fields in the list through the User-Defined Fields tab or through
other Key Fields lists. Assigning a field to a Key Fields list does not
determine who can access the field. The field is available as a Key
Field only to users with access to both the user-defined field and to
the Key Fields list.
Create a Key Fields List
 In Administrator, select File > Preferences.
 Select the Key Fields tab.
 Click Add.
 Enter the properties for the Key Fields list.
•
In the List name field, enter a name for the Key Fields list.
•
In the Description field, enter a description for the Key
Fields list.
Chapter 7
•
From the Owner drop-down list, select the user or security
group with access to the Key Field list, or leave it as Public.
•
If necessary, from the Requested by field, select the user
who requested the Key Fields list.
157
 Select the Key Fields tab and from the Show key fields for
drop-down list, select the type of Maximizer entry to assign Key
Fields to.
 Add user-defined fields and system fields to the list.
•
Click Add, select Key Field, select a system or user-defined
field, and click Insert.
•
To insert a separator, click Add, and select Separator.
Separators are used to group the Key Fields into visible
groups.
 If you add a separator at the
top or bottom of the list, or if
you add two separators in a
row, the separators will be
suppressed when the entry is
viewed in Maximizer.
•
Use the Move buttons to reposition the selected field or
separator in the list.
 If necessary, from the Show Key Fields for drop-down list,
select a different type of entry, and add fields to the list for that
type of entry.
 Click OK to save the Key Fields list.
158
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Preventing Duplicate Entries
When more than one Address Book entry exists for the same person
or organization, the entries are considered duplicates. These
duplicates may occur when users create a new Address Book entry
without determining whether an entry already exists for the person
or organization. They can also occur when entries are created
automatically by operations such as importing. Duplicate entries are
undesirable because information related to the person or
organization becomes fragmented. You can prevent most duplicate
entries by using Maximizer’s duplicate Address Book entry checking
options.
You can configure duplicate checking in the Address Book
preferences in Administrator.
You can prevent most duplicate Address Book entries by specifying
up to three combinations of fields that must be unique to each entry.
If a user attempts to create a new Address Book entry, and the values
of any of those field combinations match an existing entry,
Maximizer does not allow the duplicate entry to be created.
A combination of fields that must be unique to each entry is called a
“duplicate check list”. You can create up to three duplicate check
lists, using up to three fields in each list.
Maximizer considers an entry to be a duplicate if the values of all
fields from List 1, or all fields from List 2, or all fields from List 3
match an existing entry.
Chapter 7
159
The default duplicate check lists, described below, effectively prevent
most duplicate entries:
 The “Full Name/Company
Name” matching field checks
the Full Name of Individual or
Contact entries and checks the
Company field of Company
entries. The “Company for
Individual” matching field
checks the Company field of
Individual entries.
Check List
Fields
Duplicate Check List 1:
1. Full Name/Company Name
2. All Phone Numbers
3. None
Duplicate Check List 2:
1. Full Name/Company Name
2. Zip/Postal
3. None
Duplicate Check List 3:
1. None
2. None
3. None
When a user creates a new Address Book entry in Maximizer, and
Maximizer detects it as a potential duplicate Address Book entry, the
user is presented with the following list of options:
•
Merge with selected entry – The newly created or modified
Address Book entry merges with, and overwrites, the existing
(selected) entry. If a duplicate entry is private, this option is
unavailable.
•
Edit selected entry – The existing (selected) Address Book
entry opens, allowing it to be edited by the user. Any
information entered in the newly created entry that was
detected as a duplicate must be re-entered. If a duplicate entry is
private, this option is unavailable.
•
Add the new entry – This option adds the new entry. It is
available only under certain circumstances. If a user or group has
permission to create duplicate entries (“Duplicates may be
entered by” field in the Address Book tab), he or she has the
option to create duplicate entries. This option is also available if
partial matching is enabled and Maximizer finds a partial match.
If a duplicate entry is private, only users with the ability to enter
duplicates can create the duplicate entry.
Partial Matching
Partial matching identifies an entry as a possible duplicate even if not
all fields in any of the duplicate check lists are the same in both the
new entry and an existing entry.
With partial matching, the order of the fields (1st, 2nd, 3rd) in the
duplicate check lists is important, as described in the following
scenarios:
160
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 If the first field only is defined
in the list (the second and third
fields are set to None), partial
matching doesn’t apply
because matching one field is
a complete match.
•
If the first and second fields only are defined in the list (the third
field is set to None), an entry is considered a possible duplicate if
only the first field matches.
•
If all three fields are defined in the list, an entry is considered a
possible duplicate if only the first field matches, or if both the
first and second field match.
If the first field doesn’t match, an entry is never considered a possible
match, even if the second and/or third field matches.
Maximizer displays the list of possible duplicates in order of number
of fields matched.
By default, partial matching is disabled. To turn partial matching on,
select the “Allow partial match” checkbox.
 If the Address Book has been
upgraded from a previous
version of Maximizer, and
duplicate checking was
enabled, partial matching is
enabled after upgrading the
Address Book to the new
version.
The “Allow partial match” checkbox applies to all Duplicate Check
Lists. You cannot allow partial matches for some lists and not for
others.
Partial matching is relevant only if no exact matches exist. If all the
fields in any of the duplicate check lists match an existing entry, it is
considered a duplicate entry, and partial matching does not apply.
However, if Maximizer finds no exact matches, it returns a list of
entries matching any of the fields from the duplicate check lists.
Permission to Create Duplicate Entries
If some users or groups require the ability to create duplicate Address
Book entries, you can select a user or group from the “Duplicates
may be entered by” drop-down list. If more than one user requires
this ability, add those users to a new security group and then select
that group from this drop-down list.
Retrieving Private Entries with Duplicate Checking
When a private entry is found by duplicate checking, the name of the
entry is displayed, but the details of the entry are not. Also, when this
type of entry is found, the merge entry and open entry functionality
is disabled.
Configure Duplicate Checking for Address Book Entries
 In Administrator, select File > Preferences.
 Select the Address Book tab.
 Select Check for duplicates when adding Address Book
entries.
Chapter 7
161
 From the Duplicate check list drop-down list, select one of the
Duplicate Check Lists.
 In the Fields to match for the selected list box, select the
first, second, and third fields to match.
You can select up to three fields, but selecting all three fields is
not required.
 Repeat the previous two steps to configure any of the other
Duplicate Check Lists.
 To enable partial matching, select Allow partial match.
 If you want any users or groups to be able to create duplicate
entries, select the name of the user or group from the
Duplicates may be entered by drop-down list.
162
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Email Notification for Opportunities/Customer Service Cases
 If you are using case or
opportunity notification in
Maximizer Web Access, you
must specify an email address
for WEBUSER. Go to File >
Manage Users, select
WEBUSER from the list of
users, and click Properties.
Enter an email address on the
General tab of the Properties
dialog box.
Maximizer can send email to customers, partners, and users when the
status of customer service cases or opportunities changes.
Maximizer includes default notification messages that are sent to
users. You can also create custom email notification templates in
Administrator. You can assign email templates for each action such
as when you create a customer service case or when you win an
opportunity. Each action can also have separate templates sent to
customers/partners and to users.
When writing the email templates, remember that each template
applies to all customer service cases or opportunities of that
notification event type. They should be specific to the action they are
assigned to but generic enough to apply to all cases or opportunities
with that action. Use merge fields to personalize emails based on
generic templates.
You can also create default case and opportunity monitoring lists in
Administrator. Email messages are sent to users when cases or
opportunities are modified. Users can specify what changes to
receive notification for in their preferences. Users can also assign
monitors to specific cases and opportunities.
Email Notification for Customer Service Cases
Maximizer sends email messages to customers, partners, and users
when you create, assign, escalate, or resolve customer service cases.
You can configure the email notifications in the Notification tab of
the Customer Service preferences in Administrator.
You can choose to send notification automatically to Address Book
entries when cases are first created. For the other customer
notification templates, users have the option to send the notification
while performing the specified actions in Maximizer. You also have
the option to send a copy of the email message to the partners when
notifying customers. User notification email messages are sent to the
users identified in the Owner and Assigned To fields for the case.
Email Notification for Opportunities
Maximizer can automatically send email to users and partners when
opportunities are created, abandoned, lost, suspended, or won. You
can configure the email notifications in the Opportunities
preferences in Administrator.
When partner or user templates are assigned to the various actions,
the email messages are automatically sent to the assigned partner or
Chapter 7
163
users when the actions are performed. You can choose to send a copy
of email messages sent to partners to the associated Account
Manager as well. You can also notify sales leaders automatically
whenever the leader field is changed. User notification email is sent
to users identified as monitors for the opportunities.
Merge Fields in Email Notification Templates
Merge fields in the email template personalize the message for each
recipient by replacing the merge field syntax with the actual field
value for the Address Book entry. For example, including the
{First_Name?} merge field in an email template replaces the syntax
with each email recipient’s actual first name.
 The question mark in a merge
field is used to alert users to
not leave a space if no value is
assigned to the related
Address Book entry for the
merge field.
Commonly used customer service and opportunity merge fields are
described below. For a complete list of merge fields to include in the
email templates, see the Insert Merge Field dialog box in the
Maximizer Word Processor. Press F1 when a field is selected to view
its description.
You can create templates in either .ETF (Maximizer Word Processor)
or .HTML format. When you create templates in the Maximizer Word
Processor, click the Merge Field button and select the merge field to
insert into your email template. When you create HTML templates in
an HTML or text editor, you must enter the merge field syntax
manually or copy the syntax from the Maximizer Word Processor.
Customer Service Case Merge Fields
The following table lists the basic customer service case merge fields
to include in email templates.
•
{My_Name?} – Full name of the logged-in user (first name,
initial, and last name).
•
{My_Company?} – Name of the logged-in user’s company.
•
{CS.Case_Number?} – Case number.
•
{CS.Client_Name?} – Name of the associated Address Book
entry (Company or Individual).
•
{CS.Contact_Name?} – Name of the Contact associated with
the case.
Because this field is not mandatory in customer service cases, a
value may not display in case notification emails.
•
{CS.Subject?} – Case subject.
•
{CS.Assigned_To?} – Name of the user who the case is assigned
to.
Applies to case assignment or escalation emails only.
164
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
•
{CS.Resolved_By?} – Name of the user who resolved the case.
Applies to case resolution emails only.
•
{CS.Resolved_Date?} – Date when the case was resolved.
Applies to case resolution emails only.
•
{CS.Resolved_Time?} – Time when the case was resolved.
Applies to case resolution emails only.
•
{Case_Solution?} – Knowledge base article number associated
with the case resolution.
Applies to case resolution emails only.
•
{Case_Solution_Note?} – Notes from the Solution Notes field
in the Solution Information & Billing tab of the Case dialog box.
Applies to case resolution emails only.
Opportunity Merge Fields
The following table lists the basic opportunity merge fields to include
in email templates.
•
{My_Name?} – Full name of the logged-in user (first name,
initial, and last name).
•
{My_Company?} – Name of the logged-in user’s company.
•
{Opportunity.Client_Name?} – Name of the associated
Address Book entry (Company or Individual).
•
{Opportunity.Opportunity_Contact_Name?} – Name of the
Contact associated with the opportunity.
Because this field is not mandatory in customer service cases, a
value may not display in case notification emails.
•
{Opportunity.Objective?} – The objective of the opportunity.
•
{Opportunity.Categories?} – The category of the opportunity.
•
{Opportunity.Products_Services?} – The products/services of
the opportunity.
•
{Opportunity.Description?} – The opportunity’s description.
•
{Opportunity.Stage?} – The stage the opportunity is at.
•
{Opportunity.Confidence_Rating?} – The current confidence
rating of the opportunity.
•
{Opportunity.Status?} – The current status of the opportunity.
•
{Opportunity.Start_Date?} – The start date of the
opportunity.
•
{Opportunity.Close_Date?} – The close date of the
opportunity.
•
{Opportunity.Next_Action?} – The opportunity’s next action.
Chapter 7
•
{Opportunity.Revenue?} – The opportunity’s projected
revenue.
•
{Opportunity.Cost?} – The opportunity’s cost.
•
{Opportunity.Team_Name?} – The name of the team
associated with the opportunity.
•
{Opportunity.Opportunity_Leader?} – The leader of the
opportunity.
165
Create an Email Notification Template
 In Administrator, select File > Preferences.
 Select the Customer Service or Opportunity tab depending
on the module you are working with.
 Click Notification.
 Click Assign.
•
For customer service case email notification, select Customer
Template or User Template.
•
For opportunity email notification, select Partner Template
or User Template.
The Email Notification Template Library opens.
 Click New.
 Select Maximizer Message Body (Maximizer Word Processor
.ETF template) or HTML Message Body (HTML template).
The Message Body Name dialog box opens.
 Type a name to identify the template and click OK.
 It’s a good idea to include the
action (Create, Assign,
Escalate, or Resolve) and the
recipient type (Customer or
User) in the template name, so
the template is easier to
identify.
 Write the content of the email template, including customer
service case or opportunity merge fields.
166
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
To insert merge fields in the Maximizer Word Processor, click the
Merge Field button.
To use merge fields in HTML email templates, you must type the
merge field syntax manually. To simplify the process, you might
choose to create the template with its merge field syntax in the
Maximizer Word Processor, and then copy and paste the text
into the HTML document.
 Save the template and close the editor.
Chapter 7
167
Assign Email Notification Templates
Use this procedure to assign email notification templates for
customer service cases. The templates must already be created in the
desktop version of Administrator.
 In Administrator, select File > Preferences.
 Select the Customer Service or Opportunity tab depending
on the module you are working with.
 Click Notification.
 Under Email templates for notification, select an action
name.
 Click Assign.
•
For customer service case email notification, select Customer
Template or User Template.
•
For opportunity email notification, select Partner Template
or User Template.
The Email Notification Template Library opens.
 Select an existing template from the list and click OK.
The template is now associated with the action name for
customers or users.
 Specify the remaining notification settings.
•
For customer service email notifications, to email the
associated partner when notifying a customer, select Carbon
Copy the associated Partner when notifying
Customers.
•
For opportunity email notifications, to email the associated
account manager when notifying a partner, select Carbon
168
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Copy the Associated Account Manager when notifying
the Partner.
 Click OK to save the changes.
Turn Off Email Notification
Use this procedure to remove a notification template from a
customer service or opportunities action. You can remove a user
template to stop sending notification to Maximizer users, a customer
template to stop sending notification to customers (customer service
cases only), or a partner template to stop sending notification to
partners (opportunities only).
 In Administrator, select File > Preferences.
 Select the Customer Service or Opportunity tab depending
on the module you are working with.
 Click Notification.
 In the Email templates for notification group, select an
action name.
 Click Unassign, and select the type of template you want to
remove.
•
For customer service case email notification, select Customer
Template or User Template.
•
For opportunity email notification, select Partner Template
or User Template.
Chapter 7
169
Set Default Opportunity/Case Monitors
You can set up default opportunity and customer service case
monitoring lists in Administrator. Users can assign the default list of
monitors to opportunities and cases in Maximizer. Users can also
specify custom lists of opportunity and case monitors in specific
entries.
 In Administrator, select File > Preferences.
 Select the Customer Service or Opportunity tab depending
on the module you are working with.
 Click Monitoring.
The current list of users assigned for monitoring is displayed.
 Add or remove users from the list.
•
To add a user to the list, click Add, select a user, and click OK.
•
To remove a user from the list, select the user, and click
Delete.
 Click OK to save the changes.
170
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Event Notification
Maximizer enables you to send email notifications to a definable list
of recipients when specific Maximizer events occur and to log these
events to a file.
Most often these events are significant error conditions requiring
human intervention, such as a severe Email Server error during an
email marketing campaign. They may also be notifications of
irregularities in business process, such as a remote user who has not
synchronized in a threshold number of days.
Event notification email messages and log files contain the following
information about events:
•
Date and time when the event occurred
•
Type of event
•
Address Book in which the event occurred
•
Action resulting from the event (for example, activity suspended
due to fatal error)
•
Additional information about the event, such as error codes,
suggested resolutions, etc.
The following table describes the events for which notification is
available, as well as probable causes and suggested resolutions for
each.
Event
description
Module
Print/Fax
service fatal
error
The connection to
AutoPrintF the printer or fax
ax
software has failed.
Check the
connection with the
printer or fax
software.
Email service
fatal error
AutoEmail
Check the SMTP
server name, check
the network
connection, and
check the
authentication
username and
password on the
Automated Services
tab (available in
Administrator from
the File >
Preferences menu).
Cause
The connection to
the SMTP Email
Server has failed or
the SMTP
authentication
username and/or
password is
incorrect.
Resolution
Chapter 7
171
Enable Event Notification
 In Administrator, select File > Preferences.
 On the System Options tab, click Event Notification.
 Select Enable event notification.
 In the Events list, select an event, and click Properties.
 Specify the notification options to enable for this event.
 If you selected Via email as one of the notification options, click
Add to specify names and email addresses of notification
recipients.
 Click OK to close the Event Notification Properties.
172
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 Repeat steps 4 through 7 for each event for which you want to
enable notification or logging.
 Complete the SMTP server settings fields as they apply to your
SMTP server, and click OK.
View Event Notification
Use this procedure to view the event notification log file in a text
editor.
 In Administrator, select File > Preferences.
 On the System Options tab, click Event Notification.
 On the Events Notification dialog box, click View Log File.
Open Windows Event Viewer
Use this procedure to open Windows Event Viewer where you can
view Maximizer event notifications.
 Select Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Event
Viewer.
 In the left pane, select Application Log.
Maximizer event notifications appear in the right pane of the
Event Viewer.
Chapter 7
173
Recording Holidays in the Holiday Editor
The Holiday Editor is a utility you can use to add or edit holidays in
the Maximizer calendar. By default, the Holiday Editor contains many
North American holidays. The holidays listed in the Holiday Editor
also appear in the Calendar page in Maximizer. You can use
Administrator to modify or delete existing holidays, or add new
holidays.
If you wish to add personal holidays or events to your calendar, such
as “Alice's birthday”, you must create a yearly recurring appointment
using the Calendar page in Maximizer.
The Holiday Editor's data file—Mxzhol.nam—is inserted in the
Maximizer program folder when you install Maximizer. In this
location, you use Administrator’s Holiday Editor to manage one set
of holidays for your installation of Maximizer.
Add a Holiday
Use this procedure to add a holiday to your calendar using the
Holiday Editor.
 In Administrator, select Utilities > Holiday Editor.
 Click Add.
 Enter the details of the new holiday.
 Click OK to close the Add Holiday dialog box.
174
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
CHAPTER
Configuring Email
8
In this chapter...
“Configuring Email” on page 176
“Configuring the Maximizer Print/Fax Service” on page 182
8
176
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Configuring Email
The Maximizer Email Service sends email messages as part of
automated campaigns, opportunity and case email notification, and
appointment reminders. You must configure the Maximizer Email
Service to use these features properly.
Automated campaigns track various statistics for email activities,
including the number of bounces and replies generated from email
activities. To track these statistics, you must specify the email
accounts to monitor.
The following sections contain information on configuring email:
•
“Configuring the Maximizer Email Service” on page 176
•
“Configuring Email Accounts for Campaign Monitoring” on
page 178
Configuring the Maximizer Email Service
The Maximizer Email Service is installed automatically with
Maximizer, and it works with the following operations in Maximizer:
•
Automated campaign email activities
•
Opportunity and customer service email notifications
•
Appointment notification using iCalendar attachments and
appointment reminders
•
Email messages sent through Maximizer Web Access or Mobile
Access
The Maximizer Email Service must be running for these operations to
function.
By default, Maximizer will delete any email messages queued by the
email service that are older than 14 days. Messages are queued when
the email service is stopped. To change the maximum age of unsent
email messages, modify the value of the EMGR_MSG_AGE_LIMIT key
in the MaConfig table. To disable email message age limits, set this
value to 0.
Ensure that users have an email address entered in their user
properties, so they can receive customer service case email
notifications and appointment reminders by email. Users should also
set their email appointment notification option in Maximizer (In the
Setup tab, select Preferences. In the Preferences dialog, select the
Calendar/Hotlist tab).
For more information about the properties in the Automated
Services tab, click inside the tab and press F1.
Chapter 8
Configuring Email
177
➤ To configure the Maximizer Email Service
 In Administrator, select File > Preferences.
 Select the Automated Services tab.
 Select Email from the Preferences for Activity type dropdown list.
 Set the Service cycle time check.
The service cycle time check controls how often the Maximizer
Email Service processes the email activities in automated
campaigns. By default, this option is set to 1 minute.
 To send large quantities of email messages, select the Enable
sending in batch mode option, and set the Batch size.
If you are using an ISP, it’s important to control the email batch
settings.
 Enter a URL in the URL of Campaign Manager Statistics field.
This URL specifies the URL of the script that redirects the email
recipients to the Landing page URL (as specified in the Add Email
Activity dialog box), which is included in automated email
activities. This option applies to automated email activities only,
and it is available only if Maximizer Components for Microsoft IIS
is installed.
 Choose a character set from the Character set used by email
service drop-down list. This is the friendly name for the
character set. The actual name of the character set is shown in
the field on the right of the drop-down list.
This character set is used for all outgoing email sent by the
Maximizer Email Service.
If the character set does not appear in the list, you can enter the
name of the character set in the field on the right. The field on
the left is then displayed as a blank value.
 Select the Activate services for the currently open Address
Book option.
This checkbox must be enabled to use automated email
campaigns, customer service case email notifications, and
appointment reminders by email.
 Enter the Service computer and SMTP server names and the
SMTP port number.
 The SMTP server is specified
during the Maximizer
installation and the port
number is set to 25 by default.
If the SMTP server requires authentication, select the
checkbox and enter the account name and password.
178
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 The authentication settings are
specified during Maximizer
installation.
Click OK.







Maximizer is now configured to use the Maximizer Email Service
for automated email campaign activities, customer service case
email notifications, and appointment reminders by email.
Configuring Email Accounts for Campaign Monitoring
To track some statistics for email campaigns, you must specify the
settings for the IMAP server and email accounts used for monitoring
bounces and replies for campaign email activities. Maximizer tracks
the number of email messages sent to these accounts and generates
statistics for each campaign.
You must specify settings for the same email accounts that are
specified as the “From” and “ReplyTo” addresses in the Email
Addresses tab of a campaign email activity.
➤ To configure campaign monitoring email accounts
 In Administrator, select File > Preferences.
 Select the Campaign tab.
 Under Campaign monitoring options, click Monitoring.
The Campaign Monitoring Settings dialog box opens.
Chapter 8
Configuring Email
179
 Under Server settings, specify settings for the IMAP email
server.
•
In the IMAP Server field, enter the URL for the IMAP server.
•
In the Port field, enter the port number for the IMAP server.
•
Select SSL if Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is enabled on the
IMAP server.
 Under Campaign “From” account, specify the name and
password for the email account that appears as the “From”
address in campaign messages.
This account must match the email address specified as the
“From” address in the Email Addresses tab of campaign email
activities.
 Under Campaign “Reply To” account, specify the name and
password for the email account to which to send replies.
This account must match the email address specified as the
“ReplyTo” address in the Email Addresses tab of campaign email
activities.
If the From and Reply To accounts are the same, you need to
specify the credentials only once, in either section. The specified
email account is monitored for both replies and bounces.
 Click OK to close the Campaign Monitoring Settings dialog box.
 Click OK to save the changes to the preferences.
180
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
User Account for SQL Server Reporting Services Integration
In order to enable the SQL Server Reporting Services Integration, you
must specify a user account to connect with the Maximizer database.
The user account must match the following criteria:
•
The user is a member of the SSRS Report Management security
group in Maximizer. For information on security groups, see
“Security Groups” on page 106.
•
The login for the user has the sysadmin server role on the SQL
Server hosting the Maximizer database. For information on user
logins in Microsoft SQL Server, see the SQL Server
documentation.
The MASTER user automatically meets these criteria.
Enabling SQL Server Reporting Services
You can enable SQL Server Reporting Services in the System Options
preferences in Maximizer Web Access Administrator. When you
enable SQL Server Reporting Services, a number of default reports
are automatically created on the SQL Server Reporting Services
server.
➤ To enable SQL Server Reporting Services
 Log in to Maximizer Web Access Administrator.
 In the left pane, under Preferences, click System Options.
 Select the SQL Server Reporting Services Settings tab.
 Click Modify Options.
 Select Enable SQL Server Reporting Services Integration.
The URL to the Reporting Services server and the path to the
current Address Book are automatically filled in.
Chapter 8
Configuring Email
181
 Under Database Account, enter the username and password
for the user account used to connect to the Maximizer database.
If you are using Windows Authentication, you must specify the
Windows domain and user account in the Account field.
Whenever the password changes, you must specify the new
password in this page.
 Click Save.
 The SQL Server Reporting Services settings are saved on the
report server. You may need to wait a moment for the settings
to save.
182
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Configuring the Maximizer Print/Fax Service
Much like the Maximizer Email Service, the Maximizer Print/Fax
Service enables you to create automated campaigns for fax and
printing. The Maximizer Print/Fax Service is part of the Maximizer
installation. However, you must configure it in Administrator before
you can use it for automated campaigns.
You must already have a fax modem and fax software installed and
functioning before you can integrate these services with Maximizer.
Note that for Windows XP Professional, the Maximizer Print/Fax
Service must run as an application, not as a service.
For more information about the properties in the Automated
Services tab, click inside the tab and press F1.
➤ To configure the Maximizer Print/Fax Service
 In Administrator, select File > Preferences.
 Select the Automated Services tab.
 Select Print/Fax from the Preferences for Activity type dropdown list.
 Set the Service cycle time check.
The service cycle time check controls how often the Maximizer
Print/Fax Service processes the Print/Fax activities in automated
campaigns. By default, this option is set to 1 minute.
 To send large quantities of faxes or print jobs, select the Enable
sending in batch mode option, and set the Batch size.
 Select the Activate services for the currently open Address
Book option.
This checkbox must be enabled to use automated fax or print
campaigns.
 Enter the Service computer name.
 Click the Initialize Print/Fax Service button to update the list
of available printers and faxes in the “Add or Modify Print/Fax
Campaign Activity” dialog box.
 Note that the Initialize Print/
Fax button is available on the
Maximizer server only; it is
disabled for workstations.
Each time you add or remove a printer or fax application on the
service computer, or when you install or re-install Maximizer,
you must initialize the Print/Fax Service.
Chapter 8
Configuring Email
183
 Click OK.








Maximizer is now configured to use the Maximizer Print/Fax Service
for automated fax or print campaigns.
184
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
CHAPTER
Configuring Web Access
9
In this chapter...
“Introduction to Web Access” on page 186
“Enabling Web Access Sites” on page 189
“Escona Tutorial Sample Sites” on page 190
“Application Settings for Web Access Sites” on page 197
“Setting Up Windows Authentication for Web Access” on page 205
“Web Access Users and Security Groups” on page 209
“Maximizer Web Access” on page 213
“Maximizer Web Access Administrator” on page 216
“Mobile Access” on page 217
“Customer Access and Partner Access” on page 220
“Advanced Site Configurations” on page 228
9
186
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Introduction to Web Access
 The Maximizer CRM Server
setup program installs and
registers several machine-level
COM DLLs and sets up some
machine-level registry settings.
If you are moving Maximizer
Web Access to a different
server, ensure you run the
setup program again.
Maximizer Web Access, Customer Access, Partner Access, and Mobile
Access are installed automatically with Maximizer CRM Server. The
Maximizer web access sites provide web browser access to a
Maximizer Address Book from any Internet-connected computer or
mobile device.
The Maximizer CRM Server installation provides the option to install
Start Menu shortcuts to the sites. These links are intended to connect
to Maximizer Web Access Administrator for the convenience of
internal users. Only one instance of a Partner Access and one instance
of a Customer Access can be set up for this quick access for each
Address Book. To set it up, log into the Address Book you want to set
up in Maximizer Administrator, select File > Web Access > Shortcuts,
and enter the URL to be accessed on the relevant line. Both the
Partner Access URL and the Customer Access URL can be specified
here.
Site Types
There are several site types, each with a different purpose and
functionality. The site types are described below.
Maximizer Web Access
Maximizer Web Access is a browser-based application providing the
functionality of Maximizer over the Internet. Employees can work
with Address Book entry information, notes, calendar appointments,
Hotlist tasks, user-defined fields, and opportunities, as well as view
company documents and other pertinent information.
•
Local path: C:\Program Files\Maximizer\Portals\Employee
•
Virtual folder: http://<server name>/MaximizerWebAccess
•
Main login URL: http://<server name>/MaximizerWebAccess/
Default.aspx
Mobile Access
Mobile Access provides access to Maximizer through mobile web
browsers. When users open Mobile Access from the Windows Start
menu, a URL displays. Users enter this URL into a mobile browser to
access Mobile Access.
•
Local path: C:\Program Files\Maximizer\Portals\Wireless
•
Virtual folder: http://<server name>/MaximizerMobileAccess
•
Main login URL: http://<server name>/MaximizerMobileAccess/
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
187
Partner Access
Partner Access is a browser-based application providing a two-way
flow of information between your organization and its business
partners. This medium allows for a multi-tier distribution group to
effectively distribute sales opportunities and keep all involved parties
informed.
All aspects of the site are administered with a separate web access
administrator application.
•
Local path: C:\Program Files\Maximizer\Portals\Partner
•
Virtual folder: http://<server name>/MaximizerPartner
•
Main login URL: http://<server name>/MaximizerPartner/
Default.aspx
•
Administrator login URL: http://<server name>/
MaximizerPartner/Admin/Default.aspx
The following third-party applications are installed with Customer
and Partner Access, and are available from the Windows Start menu:
•
Excentrics World Components
•
Microsoft Internet Explorer WebControls
Customer Access
Customer Access is similar to Partner Access. It’s a browser-based
application providing a two-way flow of information between your
organization and its customers. Customers have access to news and
events.
Like Partner Access, the site is administered with a web access
administrator application. This is separate from the main site.
•
Local path: C:\Program Files\Maximizer\Portals\Customer
•
Virtual folder: http://<server name>/MaximizerCustomer
•
Main login URL: http://<server name>/MaximizerCustomer/
Default.aspx
•
Administrator login URL: http://<server name>/
MaximizerCustomer/Admin/Default.aspx
The following third-party applications are installed with Customer
and Partner Access, and are available from the Windows Start menu:
•
Excentrics World Components
•
Microsoft Internet Explorer WebControls
188
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Supported File Types in Company Library and Documents
The following document types are supported in the Company Library
and Document window of the web access sites:
•
.DOC and .RTF (Microsoft Word)
•
.XLS (Microsoft Excel)
•
.PPT (Microsoft PowerPoint)
•
.HTM and .HTML
•
.BMP (bitmaps)
•
.TXT (text files and Company Library notes)
•
.JPG, .GIF, and .TIF (graphics files)
•
.PDF (Adobe Portable Document Format)
You can add support for other file types using Microsoft Internet
Information Services (IIS) Manager. For more information, see
“Adding Support for File Types” on page 32.
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
189
Enabling Web Access Sites
By default, all Maximizer web access sites are disabled. Enabling a
site is a simple process, which must be completed before anybody can
access them. You can activate them during installation, or modify the
Web.Config file for each site you want to enable. To enable a site
during installation, see “Installing Maximizer CRM Server” on
page 47.
➤ To enable a site via the Web.Config file
 Open the site’s Web.Config file in a text editor, such as
Notepad.
The Web.Config file is located on the Maximizer server at the
following path:
C:\Program Files\Maximizer\Portals\<site>\Web.Config
If Maximizer was installed in a folder other than the default
location of C:\Program Files\, replace that portion of the path
with the folder where Maximizer was installed.
 In the appSettings section, locate the Enabled key, which is
shown below:
<add key=”Enabled” value=”false” />
 Change the value to true, as show below:
<add key=”Enabled” value=”true” />
 Save the Web.Config file.
Note that if you are using Windows 2008 or 2012, you must also
select the “Detailed errors” option in IIS. This setting is found under
Error Pages > Edit Feature Settings.
190
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Escona Tutorial Sample Sites
 The IIS Server must be started
for the sites to function.
The Escona Tutorial Address Book includes sample web access sites.
The sample sites, Maximizer Web Access, Customer Access, and
Partner Access, require no configuration and are accessible from the
Maximizer folder on the Windows Start menu. These sample sites are
installed on the Maximizer IIS Server as part of the Maximizer
Components for Microsoft IIS installation.
You can access the sample sites using the following user IDs and
passwords.
Sample Site
User ID
Password
Maximizer Web Access Administrator
master
control
Maximizer Web Access
jnapoli
maximizer
Customer Access Administrator
jnapoli
maximizer
Partner Access Administrator
jnapoli
maximizer
Customer Access
mary
password
Partner Access
paul
password
Mobile Access
jnapoli
maximizer
This section steps you through the following procedures with the
Escona Tutorial sample sites:
•
“To start the Default Web Site” on page 191
•
“To change a site to an application” on page 191
•
“To access Escona Tutorial Customer or Partner Access
Administrator” on page 195
•
“To enable Address Book entries to access the site” on page 224
•
“To access Escona Tutorial Customer or Partner Access” on
page 196
Many of these procedures also apply to your own sites.
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
191
➤ To start the Default Web Site
 Before accessing the sample
sites, ensure that the Default
Web Site is started.
 On the Maximizer IIS Server, select Start > Programs > Control
Panel > Administrative Tools > Internet Information
Services Manager.
 Select Default Web Site, and click the Start item button.


When the Start item button becomes dimmed, the Default Web
Site is started, and you can access the sites.
➤ To change a site to an application
 Do not use this procedure
unless you received a “Server
Error in “/” Application” error
when you opened the site.
 On the Maximizer IIS Server, select Start > Programs > Control
Panel > Administrative Tools > Internet Information
Services Manager.
 Open the Default Web Site branch.
192
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 Right-click MaximizerWebAccess, and click Properties.


 Click Create.
Maximizer Web Access has now been converted to an
application.
 Click OK and then close Internet Information Services.

Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
Escona Tutorial Maximizer Web Access Administrator
➤ To access Escona Tutorial Maximizer Web Access
Administrator
 Select Start > Programs > Maximizer CRM > Web Access >
Maximizer Web Access Administrator.
 You can access Maximizer
Web Access Administrator
from Maximizer Web Access.
In the left navigation pane,
hover your mouse over
Administration and select
Administrator from the pop-up
window.
The Maximizer Web Access Administrator login page opens.
 Log into the site using the following login information:
User ID = MASTER
Password = control
193
194
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Escona Tutorial Maximizer Web Access
➤ To access Escona Tutorial Maximizer Web Access
 Select Start > Programs > Maximizer CRM > Web Access >
Maximizer Web Access.
The Maximizer Web Access login page opens.
 If the Maximizer Web Access
login page does not open, and
you see a “Server Error in “/”
Application” error message,
then you need to change the
site to an application. See “To
change a site to an
application” on page 191.
 Log into the site using the following login information:
User ID = JNAPOLI
Password = maximizer
Escona Tutorial Mobile Access
➤ To access Escona Tutorial Mobile Access
 On your mobile device, open a web browser.
 In the Address bar, enter the Mobile Access URL.
The default, the URL is in the form: http://<server name>/
MaximizerMobileAccess
 Log into the site using the following login information:
User ID = JNAPOLI
Password = maximizer
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
195
Escona Tutorial Customer and Partner Access Administrator
➤ To access Escona Tutorial Customer or Partner
Access Administrator
 On the server, select Start > Programs > Maximizer CRM >
Web Access > Customer Access or Partner Access.
The Maximizer Customer or Partner Access Viewer opens.
 Select Escona Tutorial, and click View.
The Customer/Access Partner Administrator login page opens.
 Log into Customer/Partner Access Administrator:
User ID = JNAPOLI
Password = maximizer
Customer/Partner Access Administrator opens, with either or
both of the News Manager and Configuration Manager links
available, depending on which web access security groups you
belong to.
 The News Manager link is
available only if you are logged
in with a User ID belonging to
the Customer or Partner
Access Administration Users
security group. The
Configuration Manager link is
available only if you are logged
in with a User ID belonging to
the Customer or Partner
Access Configuration Users
security group.
For information about web access security groups, refer to “Web
Access Security Groups” on page 209.
➤ To create a site PIN for the sample sites
•
Refer to “Assigning Site Login PINs to Contacts and Individuals”
on page 225 for an explanation of how to create a site PIN for
yourself. When you are creating the PIN for the Escona Tutorial
sample sites, modify the email address and category of one of
the Address Book entries, so you can use that Individual or
Contact as your site user account:
•
Email Address: When you are creating a customer and/or
Partner Access login account for the Escona Tutorial sample
sites, enter your own email address into a sample Contact or
Individual’s Address Book entry. Then, when you send a site
196
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
PIN email, it sends the PIN to your email address instead of to
the fictional email address in the sample database.
•
Category: Select both the Customer and Partner categories
in the Address Book entry.
Escona Tutorial Customer and Partner Access
➤ To access Escona Tutorial Customer or Partner
Access
 Select Start > Programs > Maximizer CRM > Web Access >
Customer Access or Partner Access.
The Maximizer Customer or Partner Access Viewer opens.
 Select Escona Tutorial, and click View.
The login page opens.
 Click the View Customer/Partner Access Site link.
 Log in to the site.
To log into the sample Partner Access site, use the sample
Address Book contact, Paul Samson of Samson Consulting:
•
User ID = paul
•
Password = password
To log into the sample Customer Access site, use the sample
Address Book contact, Mary Smart of Acme Tool Co.:
•
User ID = mary
•
Password = password
Customer or Partner Access opens.
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
197
Application Settings for Web Access Sites
The XML-formatted Web.config file, stored in the ...\Program
Files\Maximizer\Portals\<site> folder, is the key to configuring the
sites and any other ASP.NET web application.
You can edit this file using Windows Notepad or another text editor.
For Windows 2008 Server or later, you can also edit the settings in
Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager on the ASP.NET tab of
the site’s properties.
The settings that control the Outlook integration options for Web
Access are located in a Web.config file in the services folder
(...\Program Files\Maximizer\Portals\Employee\Services\). The only
settings that apply to the Web Access Outlook integration are the
maximum request length and timeout settings in the “httpRuntime”
element.
The Partner Access and Customer Access sites are configured to
connect to a single Address Book each. Which Address Book the site
connects to is defined in a file called Web.config, which is located in
the root folder of the Partner and Customer folders (which are
located in ...\Program Files\Maximizer\Portals\). Initially, the
Web.config file is configured to connect to the Escona Tutorial
sample Address Book. Before you deploy Partner Access or Customer
Access, you must update the Web.config file for your Address Book.
After you have deployed Maximizer Web Access, Mobile Access,
Customer Access, or Partner Access for your Address Book, you can
make further changes to the Web.config file at any time. You are not
required to restart the IIS service for changes to take effect.
➤ To configure the external site application settings
 Browse to the Web Access folder where you have installed
Maximizer Components for Microsoft IIS (...\Program
Files\Maximizer\Portals\<site>\).
 Open the Web.config file in the Employee, Customer, Partner, or
Wireless folder. Note that the following application settings do
not apply to all web access sites.
198
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Site Application Settings <appSettings>
 It is optional to change these
application settings with the
exception of the Enabled
setting. This value must be set
to true in order make the site
accessible.
You can update any of the site application settings values if they
appear under the appSettings parent node. The settings that appear
in the Web.config file are dependent on the Web Access application
that it is associated with.
Child
Description
<add key="AddressBook"
value="name" />
The name is the true name of the
Address Book. See ‘AddressBook”
on page 203.
<add key=
”AddressBookColumnSetup”
value=”user/Address Book
window column setup name” />
Specifies a specific column setup
to be used for the Address Book
page in Mobile Access.
Only the first two columns of a
column setup can be displayed
(from left to right). The user
specified in this setting is the
creator of the column setup. This
setting is optional.
<add key=“AlarmCheckPeriod_
Seconds” value=“x”>
The site will check for alarms every
x seconds.
Sets the largest allowable email
<add
key=“EmailAttachmentLimitSize attachment size to be x KiloBytes.
Note that if you increase this limit,
InKB” value=“x”>
you must also increase the
“maxRequestLength” setting on
the “httpRuntime” element by a
corresponding amount.
<add
key=“MaxFileUploadLimitSizeIn
KB” value=“x”>
Sets the largest allowable
document size that can be
uploaded in the Documents
following tab and Company
Library to be x KiloBytes.
Note that if you increase this limit,
you must also increase the
“maxRequestLength” setting on
the “httpRuntime” element by a
corresponding amount.
Sets the maximum number of files
<add
key=“MaxNumberOfFilesUpload that can be uploaded at one time
in the Documents following tab.
” value=“x”>
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
199
Child
Description
<add
key=”AllowUnsupportedBrowse
rsWithWarning” value=”True”>
This setting allows users to log in
to Maximizer Web Access with
unsupported web browsers, such
as Apple Safari. Users are
prompted with a warning
message when they first log in to
Maximizer Web Access with
unsupported browsers. You can
change the value to “False” to
block users from accessing
Maximizer Web Access with
unsupported web browsers.
Note that Maximizer Software
recommends that users access
Maximizer Web Access only with
supported web browsers. You can
access the current list of
supported browsers on our
website.
<add key=
“AlternateRequiredCategory”
value=“”>
By default, to access Partner
Access or Customer Access, an
entry must have a category of
Partner or Customer, respectively.
This setting specifies an
alternative category. See
‘AlternateRequiredCategory” on
page 203
<add key=“Context”
value=”MA_PARTNER”>
The only difference between the
default Partner Access site and the
default Customer Access site is the
value in the Context key. See
‘Context” on page 202.
<add key=
"CSCaseColumnSetup"
value="user/Customer Service
window column setup name" />
Specifies a specific column setup
to be used for customer service
cases. Only the first two columns
of a column setup can be
displayed (from left to right). The
user specified in this setting is the
creator of the column setup. This
setting is optional.
<add key=
“DefaultAddressBook”
value=“name” />
The name is the true Address Book
name, rather than the “friendly”
name, meaning it does not
contain spaces or special
characters.
200
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Child
Description
<add key=”Enabled”
value=“true”>
By default, sites are disabled, and
you must change the Enabled
setting to “true” before you can
use the sites.
Setting Enabled to “false”
instantly stops new visitors to the
site from being allowed to log in,
while allowing already-logged-in
visitors to continue with their
session.
<add key=
"EnableDBMgrInLogin"
value="1"/>
By default, users can create new
Address Books directly from the
Maximizer Web Access
Administrator Log In page.
Change the value to “0” to disable
this feature.
This setting applies only to
Maximizer Web Access
Administrator.
<add key=
"EnableOutlookIntegration"
value="true" />
The value must be set to true to
enable Microsoft Outlook
integration with Maximizer Web
Access. Note that this integration
applies to Outlook 2003 and
higher.
See ‘EnableWordIntegration/
EnableOutlookIntegration” on
page 203
<add key=
"EnableRecordLocking"
value="true" />
Enables record locking for Address
Book entries in Maximizer Web
Access to prevent two or more
people from modifying an entry
at the same time. Change the
value to “false” to disable record
locking.
<add key=
"EnableWordIntegration"
value="true" />
The value must be set to true to
enable Microsoft Word
integration with Maximizer Web
Access. Note that this integration
applies to Word 2003 and higher.
See ‘EnableWordIntegration/
EnableOutlookIntegration” on
page 203
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
201
Child
Description
<add
key=”JavaMaxRecToRetrieve”
value=”200”>
The maximum number of records
(Address Book entries,
opportunities, customer service
cases, notes, or documents) to
retrieve in a list in Mobile Access.
The default value is 200, but you
can change this setting to display
more or fewer entries in a list.
<add
key="MaximizerMobileRedirect
URL" value=""/>
Redirects mobile device users to
the specified URL.
<add key="MobileUserAgent"
value=""/>
Lists the HTTP user agent values
for mobile web browsers. Users
who visit the site from these web
browsers are automatically
redirected to the Mobile Access
URL specified in the
MaximizerMobileRedirectURL key.
<add key=
NotificationCheckPeriod_
Seconds” value=“x”>
The site will check for
notifications every x seconds.
<add key=
“OpportunityColumnSetup”
value=”user/Opportunity
window column setup name” />
Specifies a specific column setup
to be used for Opportunities in
Mobile Access.
Only the first two columns of a
column setup can be displayed
(from left to right). The user
specified in this setting is the
creator of the column setup. This
setting is optional.
This setting can be set to true and
<add key=
”ShowAllPhoneNumberAndEma it is an optional setting. All phone
numbers and email addresses are
il”value=”false” />
displayed in the appointment
dialog box if this is set to true.
<add key=“SubContext” value=
“name”>
The SubContext key is provided to
implement more than one of a
certain type (context) of site. See
‘SubContext” on page 202.
202
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Child
Description
<add
key="DaysToStartDisplayMainte
nanceExpire" value="45" />
Displays a reminder message on
the Web Access login page about
upcoming maintenance contract
expiry the specified number of
days prior to the maintenance
expiry date. By default, this
message is displayed 45 days prior
to maintenance contract expiry.
<add
key="URLtoRenewMaintenance
" value="https://
www.maximizer.com/url/
maxcrm/
maxcrm_maintenanceexpiry.ht
ml" />
The URL to use in the renewal link
that is displayed in the
maintenance expiry reminder
message on the Web Access login
page.
Context
The only difference between the default Partner Access site and the
default Customer Access site is the value in the Context key. The two
possible values for this key are MA_PARTNER and MA_CUSTOMER.
This key determines the following settings:
•
The default graphic for the main login page can be replaced
with a custom graphic. For more information, see “Customizing
the Graphic on the Site Main Page” on page 228.
•
The groups controlling access to the administration-side of the
sites (Customer Access Administration Users / Partner Access
Administration Users and Customer Access Configuration Users /
Partner Access Configuration Users)
•
The default name of the site —“Partner Access” and “Customer
Access”. These names can be overridden with the Name setting
under General Settings in the Configuration Manager.
•
The default name of the type of user accessing the site. For
example, when logged into Partner Access, Paul Samson could
expect to see “Partner: Paul Samson” at the top of the screen.
This name may be overridden with the Name setting under
General Settings in the Configuration Manager.
SubContext
The SubContext key is provided to implement more than one of a
certain type (context) of site. Application settings within an external
site’s Configuration Manager are stored in the Address Book (in the
ADMN_Config table) referencing the site’s Context and SubContext
keys.
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
203
If you would like two Customer Access sites, each with their own
application settings, you would give both instances a Context value
of MA_CUSTOMER, but make sure each instance has a different
value for SubContext. For example, give one a value of WINE and
one a value of BEER if you were in the business of selling both
products but wanted a different site for each customer base.
If, however, you were setting up the application across two servers in
a load-balancing scenario, you would give each version of the
application the same value for SubContext because you’d want
each instance to share one set of application settings.
AddressBook
The AddressBook key must be set with the database name of the
Address Book to use for this site. Note that this is not the friendly
name for the Address Book set in Administrator to reference the
Address Book but the actual SQL database name. It makes a specific
Address Book accessible for customers and partners and it must be
set to enable the sites for access.
AlternateRequiredCategory
In Maximizer CRM, membership in a segment of the Address Book is
specified using an Address Book entry’s Category field. By default,
Partner Access requires accessing visitors to have a Category of
Partner, and Customer Access requires accessing visitors to have a
Category of Customer. These defaults may be overwritten, however,
by setting a different value in the AlternateRequiredCategory key.
The company implementing Beer Customer Access and Wine
Customer Access would add items for each site to the Category field
in Maximizer, and then reference the required item’s name in the
AlternateRequiredCategory key for each site.
EnableWordIntegration/EnableOutlookIntegration
If the Word or Outlook integration is enabled, users can set up the
integration directly from Maximizer Web Access. The setup involves
downloading Active X controls, which may be disallowed on some
networks. To disable Word or Outlook integration, change the value
to “false”.
204
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Session State Storage Options <sessionState>
By default, the web access sites are configured to store session
identifiers in a cookie and to use a timeout value of 20 minutes.
Maximizer ships Mobile Access, Customer Access, and Partner Access
with a sessionState element containing default values. You can
modify the value of the “timeout” attribute to set a different
timeout value, in minutes, for the site.
Maximum Request Length and Timeout Options <httpRuntime>
The maximum request length and timeout options on the
“httpRuntime” element control the maximum size and duration of
requests that will be accepted by the IIS server. These settings take
precedence over any application settings related to upload file sizes,
and must be increased by a corresponding amount when increasing
the value of other settings like the maximum email attachment size,
for example.
Option
Description
maxRequestLength
The value following
maxRequestLength is the size, in
kilobytes, of the largest email
(including the size of all
attachments) that can be saved. It
is advisable to set this number to
twice the desired maximum size,
since temporary encoding can
require a larger request size. For
example, if your email system
allows attachments up to 20 MB in
size, set maxRequestLength to
"40000" to allow the largest
emails to be saved.
executionTimeout
The value following
executionTimeout is the maximum
number of seconds a request to
save an email is allowed to take
before an error occurs. The
default is 10 minutes (600
seconds).
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
205
Setting Up Windows Authentication for Web Access
In addition to specifying Windows Authentication as the means of
user authentication during the installation, you must follow
additional steps to set up Windows Authentication for web access.
The following sections contain information on setting up Windows
Authentication for web access sites:
•
“Setting Up Windows Authentication for Web Access in SQL” on
page 205
•
“Configuring the Web.config files for Windows Authentication
for Web Access” on page 205
•
“Downloading Documents” on page 207
•
“Configuring IIS for Windows Authentication for Web Access”
on page 207
•
‘Windows Authentication for Partner Access, Customer Access,
and Campaign Statistics” on page 207
Setting Up Windows Authentication for Web Access in SQL
➤ To set up Windows Authentication for Web Access
in SQL
 In SQL Server Management Studio, on the Security tab of the
SQL server properties, select Windows Only as the type of
authentication.
 Set the USE_NT_AUTHENTICATION key to YES in the MaConfig
table for each Address Book.
Configuring the Web.config files for Windows Authentication for Web Access
 To enable certain functionality
in Maximizer Web Access and
Maximizer Web Access
Administrator such as the
Auditing tab and System Audit
Report, you must set up
Maximizer.Web.Data for
Windows Authentication.
You must configure the Web.config file in the web access sites to use
Windows Authentication. The procedure is different depending on
which web access site you are configuring.
➤ To configure the Maximizer Web Access, Maximizer
Web Access Administrator, Maximizer.Web.Data, or
Mobile Access Web.config file for Windows
Authentication
•
Set the authentication setting to true as follows:
<authentication mode="Windows"/> <identity
impersonate="true">
206
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
➤ To configure the Microsoft Outlook Integration
Synchronization Service Web.config file for
Windows Authentication
 Comment-out the default anonymous authentication service
binding as follows:
<!-- Anonymous authenticaton - HTTP - default
<basicHttpBinding>
<binding>
<security mode="None"/>
</binding>
</basicHttpBinding>
-->
 Un-comment the service binding that is appropriate for your
environment. For example, to enable integrated Windows
Authentication over HTTP, un-comment the following section:
<!-- Windows authentication - HTTP -->
<basicHttpBinding>
<binding>
<security mode="TransportCredentialOnly">
<transport clientCredentialType="Windows" />
</security>
</binding>
</basicHttpBinding>
The file contains comments to help you identify the correct
binding that is appropriate for your environment. Note that only
one binding may be enabled at a time.
The Web.config file for the Microsoft Outlook Integration
Synchronization Service is located in the following sub-folder of
the Maximizer Web Access application folder:
Services\OutlookSync
➤ To configure the Customer Access, Partner Access,
or Campaign Statistics Web.config file for Windows
Authentication
 Set the authentication setting to true as follows:
<identity impersonate="true">
 Append the authentication setting with the IUSR machine name
and password as follows:
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
207
<identity impersonate="true"
userName="IUSR_MachineName"
password="IUSR_password">
The username and password are for a user to run under the
external site login. This user needs SQL permission equal to
WEBUSER, and file permissions equal to NETWORK SERVICE. File
permissions apply to the portal (web access site) folder, and to
the following folder:
C:\WINDOWS\Microsoft.Net\Framework\v4.0.30319\Temporary
ASP.NET Files.
Downloading Documents
To allow users to download documents, users must be able to access
the Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) metabase and other
directories used by ASP.NET.
➤ To set up access the IIS metabase and other
directories used by ASP.NET.
 Create a group on the IIS machine.
 Add the domain users or domain groups to the group on the IIS
machine.
 Run the following command in the command line. The command
is located in the
c:\Windows\Microsoft.NET\Framework\v4.0.30319\ folder.
Replace group_name with the name of the group you created.
aspnet_regiis -ga “group_name”
Configuring IIS for Windows Authentication for Web Access
The procedure for configuring Microsoft Internet Information
Services (IIS) for Windows Authentication is different depending on
the version of Windows Server you are using. For detailed
information on configuring Microsoft IIS for Windows
Authentication, see “Microsoft IIS for Windows Authentication” on
page 29.
Windows Authentication for Partner Access, Customer Access, and Campaign
Statistics
In some scenarios, you must complete an additional step to configure
Partner Access, Customer Access, and Campaign Statistics for
Windows Authentication. The IUSR_MACHINENAME user on the
208
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) server must be
duplicated on the SQL Server. The user must have the same username
and password on both computers. This step is necessary only if your
SQL Server is on a different computer than your IIS server and
Delegation is not set up between IIS and SQL Server.
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
209
Web Access Users and Security Groups
The following sections describe how to configure users in Maximizer
to access web access sites:
•
“Web Access Security Groups” on page 209
•
“Web Access Users” on page 212
Web Access Security Groups
Every Address Book contains several web-access-related security
groups, which are described in the following table. The MASTER user
belongs to these groups by default, but you can add additional users
to each group as required.
 The Company Announcements
Authors security group does
not apply to sites.
Every security group has a name and an ID. Changing the name has
no effect on the group functionality. However, you cannot change
the group ID. If you ever need to recreate these security groups, it is
imperative that you use the correct security group IDs (the group
name is irrelevant).
To be able to access Customer or Partner Access Administrator, a user
must belong to at least one of the Administration Users or
Configuration Users security groups for that site.
Enables group members to
access the...
Security Group Name
Group ID
Customer Access Admin
Users
C_ADM
News Manager section of
Customer Access
Administrator
Customer Access Config
Users
C_CFG
Configuration Manager
section of Customer Access
Administrator
Maximizer Web Access
Admin Users
EMPADM
Edit section of Maximizer
Web Access, where the user
can update external links
Partner Access Admin
Users
P_ADM
News Manager section of
Partner Access
Administrator
Partner Access Config
Users
P_CFG
Configuration Manager
section of Partner Access
Administrator
210
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
➤ To add a user to a site security group
 In Administrator, select File > Security Groups and Teams.
 Select the security group, and click Properties.
 Set the appropriate Access Settings for the group members.
 Click the Members tab.
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
211
 Select a member to add to the group, and click Add. Repeat this
process for all members to add to the group.
– or –
Click Add All to add all users to the group.
 Click OK to close dialog boxes.
 Repeat this procedure to add users to the other site security
groups.
The selected users can now log into the site and access the
functions available to their security group(s).
212
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Web Access Users
Address Book users are enabled to access the web access sites by
default. However, you can change user access to sites in the user’s
general properties if required. The “Web Access” access right in User
Properties applies to all sites.
➤ To set web access rights
 In Administrator, select File > Manage Users.
 Select the Maximizer user, and click Properties.
 In the Module Login section (bottom right), select Web
Access.
 From the drop-down list, select Enabled or Disabled.
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
213
Maximizer Web Access
Maximizer Web Access is functional automatically for all Address
Books. Anybody with a user account for that Address Book can access
it immediately, provided that the IIS Server is running and the “Web
Access Login” right has not been disabled in the user’s account. (For
more information about the “Web Access Login” right, refer to
“Web Access Users” on page 212.)
 Maximizer Web Access
settings follow the Maximizer
Address Book settings in
Administrator.
On the IIS Server, you can access the sites from the Windows Start
menu (Start > Programs > Maximizer CRM > Web Access). Other
computers can access Maximizer Web Access with the following URL
(unless it has been changed from the default):
http://<IIS_Server_Name>/MaximizerWebAccess/Default.aspx
The following sections contain information specific to Maximizer
Web Access:
•
“Creating External Links in Maximizer Web Access” on page 213
•
“Passing a Search String Parameter to the Login Page” on
page 214
•
“ActiveX Controls in Maximizer Web Access” on page 215
Creating External Links in Maximizer Web Access
To customize external links available on Maximizer Web Access, you
must log into the site as the MASTER user, or as a user who belongs
to the Maximizer Web Access Administration Users security group.
(For information on this security group and how to add users to it,
refer to “Web Access Security Groups” on page 209.)
➤ To create external links on Maximizer Web Access
 Log into Maximizer Web Access as MASTER or as a user who
belongs to the Maximizer Web Access Admin Users security
group.
 In the left navigation pane, hover your mouse over Links, and
select Edit from the pop-up window.
214
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 In Maximizer Web Access, an
external link must be a URL.
 Add, edit, or remove any groups or links as desired.
 Click Close to finish.
The External Links section of the Maximizer Web Access main
page now reflect the changes you just made.
Passing a Search String Parameter to the Login Page
You can pass a search string parameter to the login page to display a
search after logging in to Maximizer Web Access. The Address Book
page is opened directly after successfully logging in—the My Work
Day page and the Choose Address Book List dialog box is bypassed.
➤ To add a search string parameter to the Login Page
Append the Maximizer Web Access URL with the search string
parameter. Note that the search string must be URL encoded.
Following are some examples of the search string that you can use in
the URL:
•
To retrieve a Favorite List from the Address Book
http://[server name]/MaximizerWebAccess/
default.aspx?ss=FLIST%28[Favorite list key]%29
e.g., http://[server name]/MaximizerWebAccess/
default.aspx?ss=FLIST%288cFOcdn15sZIuP9HO7lucIrMRGl892Gp
%29
The above search retrieves the “All entries in Escona” Favorite
List in the Escona Tutorial Address Book.
•
To retrieve a particular company and its associated
contacts from the Address Book
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
215
http://[server name]/MaximizerWebAccess/
default.aspx?ss=EQ%28ClientID%2c[Identification]%29
Note that the [Identification] can be found in Properties of the
ABEntry > Identification.
e.g. http://[server name]/
MaximizerWebAccess?ss=EQ%28ClientID%2c37266200083%29
A simple way to build your search string is by copying the search
source code from Maximizer Web Access directly following a search
performed in the Address Book page.
➤ To use source code from Maximizer Web Access
 Perform a search in Maximizer Web Access.
 Immediately following the search, right-click in Internet
Explorer, and choose View Source.
 Copy the first line of source code shown at the top of the
window prefixed by http://[server name]/
MaximizerWebAccess?ss= as shown above in the examples.
For more information on Maximizer search string language, refer to
“Search String Language” on page 390.
ActiveX Controls in Maximizer Web Access
Maximizer Web Access uses an ActiveX control for its integrations
with Microsoft Office products, including Microsoft Word, Microsoft
Excel, and Microsoft Outlook. These integrations are supported only
in Microsoft Internet Explorer.
If your web server configuration includes a firewall, you may need to
configure the firewall to allow the MaThinIEActiveX.ocx file to be
downloaded from the server. The MaThinIEActiveX.ocx file is an
ActiveX control used to run the Export to Excel command and to
install the Word and Outlook integrations in Maximizer Web Access.
216
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Maximizer Web Access Administrator
 For login information, go to
“Escona Tutorial Maximizer
Web Access Administrator” on
page 208.
Use Maximizer Web Access Administrator for the following tasks:
•
Create and configure Address Books
•
Manage users, sales/marketing teams, and security groups
•
Manage Maximizer application settings
You can access Maximizer Web Access Administrator from Maximizer
Web Access. You can also enter the Maximizer Web Access
Administrator URL directly in a web browser. Only administrators can
log in to Maximizer Web Access Administrator.
➤ To log in to Maximizer Web Access Administrator
 Enter the Maximizer Web Access URL in a web browser:
By default, the URL is in the form: [server]/
MaximizerAdministrator.
– or –
From Maximizer Web Access, in the left pane, hover your mouse
over Administration, and select Administrator from the pop-up.
 If necessary, select the Address Book, enter the User ID and
password of an administrator, and click Log In.
If you are access Maximizer Web Access Administrator from
Maximizer Web Access, you are automatically logged in to the
Address Book.
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
217
Mobile Access
As with the other sites, Mobile Access is installed automatically when
you select the Maximizer Components for IIS option in the Server
Components screen of the Maximizer installation. You must then
enable the site as described in “Enabling Web Access Sites” on
page 189. To access the site, enter the Mobile Access URL into your
browser. By default, the Mobile Access URL is in the following form:
<Server Name>/MaximizerMobileAccess
e.g., http://mobile.maximizer.com/MaximizerMobileAccess
The following sections contain information specific to Mobile Access:
•
“Supported Browsers for Mobile Access” on page 217
•
“Configuring Automatic Redirection to Mobile Access” on
page 217
•
“Limiting the Number of Entries Displayed in Mobile Access” on
page 218
•
“Specifying the Mobile Access URL for Integration” on page 219
Supported Browsers for Mobile Access
The following web browsers are compatible with Mobile Access:
•
BlackBerry web browser
•
Apple Safari
•
Android web browser
Visit Maximizer’s website at www.maximizer.com for the most up to
date list of supported browsers.
To use the full functionality in Mobile Access, users may need to
configure their browsers in the following ways:
•
Enable JavaScript.
•
Enable browser cookies.
Configuring Automatic Redirection to Mobile Access
You can set up automatic redirection from Maximizer Web Access to
Mobile Access. When users access Maximizer Web Access from a
mobile web browser associated with a specified mobile user agent,
they are redirected to the Mobile Access URL.
218
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
➤ To configure automatic redirection for mobile users
 Open the web.config file for Maximizer Web Access.
The file is stored in the following folder:
...\Program Files\Maximizer\Portals\Employee
 In the <appSettings> section, locate the
MaximizerMobileRedirectURL key.
 Next to value, enter the Mobile Access URL between the
quotation marks.
 Locate the MobileUserAgent key.
 If necessary, next to value, modify the list of user agents that are
redirected to Mobile Access.
The major mobile browsers are included in the list by default.
 Save the changes to the web.config file.
Limiting the Number of Entries Displayed in Mobile Access
In the Mobile Access web.config file, you can specify the maximum
number of entries retrieved in lists. The default value is 200, but you
can change this setting to display more or fewer entries in a list. The
setting affects lists of Address Book entries, opportunities, customer
service cases, notes, and documents.
➤ To change the maximum number of entries
displayed in lists
 Open the Mobile Access web.config file.
The file is stored in the following folder:
...\Program Files\Maximizer\Portals\Wireless
 In the <appSettings> section, locate the
JavaMaxRecToRetrieve key.
 Next to value, enter the maximum number of entries between
the quotation marks.
 Save the changes to the web.config file.
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
219
Specifying the Mobile Access URL for Integration
You can specify the Mobile Access URL in Administrator to ensure the
site is available for integration with other programs. As well,
Maximizer users can access the Mobile Access URL from the Start
menu.
You must specify the URL in every Address Book that uses Mobile
Access.
Note that in previous versions of Maximizer, Mobile Access was
named Wireless Access. The default name of the Mobile Access
virtual directory and the default URL have also changed. If you are
upgrading from a previous version of Maximizer and you keep the
default virtual directory, you should update the Mobile Access URL
specified in Administrator.
➤ To specify the Mobile Access URL in Administrator
 Open Administrator and log in to the Address Book.
 Select File > Web Access.
 Next to Mobile Access URL, enter the URL.
By default the URL is in the form http://[server]/
MaximizerMobileAccess.
 Click OK.
 If necessary, repeat this procedure for any other Address Books
that use Mobile Access.
220
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Customer Access and Partner Access
Unlike Maximizer Web Access, you must enable Customer Access and
Partner Access yourself.
➤ To enable and configure Customer Access or Partner
Access
 Add administrators to the appropriate Security Groups in
Administrator, as described in “Adding Users to Site Security
Groups” on page 221.
 Ensure the Web Access Login right is enabled for any users
who will access the site. (This right is enabled by default. For
further information, refer to “Web Access Users” on page 212.)
 Customize the Web.config file for the site, as described in
“Application Settings for Web Access Sites” on page 197.
 Customize the graphic on the main site page. Typically, you
would replace it with your company’s logo. For instructions on
changing this graphic, refer to “Customizing the Graphic on the
Site Main Page” on page 228.
 Assign a URL to the site, as described in “Determining External
Site URLs” on page 221.
 Enable any site configuration options as desired, as described
in “Configuring Site Options” on page 223.
 Assign Contacts and/or Individuals the status of Customer or
Partner in the Category field as part of the entry’s basic
information, as described in “Setting Up Business Partners and
Customers” on page 224.
 Give business partners and customers access using the External
Site PIN merge field, as described in “Assigning Site Login PINs
to Contacts and Individuals” on page 225.
Introduction to Customer and Partner Access Administrator
Consisting of both the News Manager and the Configuration
Manager, Customer/Partner Access Administrator is part of each
instance of a Partner or Customer Access site and provides a way for
administrators to complete the following tasks:
•
turn site sections on and off
•
specify the properties of generated emails
•
specify the name of the site
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
•
221
add and modify news items
The options available in Customer and Partner Access are primarily
the same.
The main page of Customer/Partner Access Administrator contains
one or both of the following links, depending on which site security
groups you belong to:
•
News Manager – This link is available if you are a member of
the Customer Access Administration Users or Partner Access
Administration Users security group for the selected site type.
•
Configuration Manager – This link is available if you are a
member of the Customer Access Configuration Users or Partner
Access Configuration Users security group for the selected site
type.
You can also click the View Customer/Partner Access Site link in
the upper-right corner of the screen to view the site itself, rather
than the administrator.
For more specific information about Customer/Partner Access
Administrator, open it and click Help.
Adding Users to Site Security Groups
The default configuration for Customer and Partner Access allows
any Maximizer user to access Customer/Partner Access Administrator
if they have rights to the section granted through Security Groups.
Use the File > Security Groups and Teams dialog box in Administrator
to control user access. Site security groups function in the same way
as general Maximizer security groups. For more detailed information
about site security groups, refer to “Web Access Security Groups” on
page 209.
Determining External Site URLs
 You must configure the
external sites before these
URLs are enabled for the
Address Book as described in
the previous section.
Once you have configured the database and enabled both Partner
Access and Customer Access for an Address Book, the sites are
available for use through the URLs. Maximizer Web Access requires
no additional configuration for use with an Address Book.
The default URLs are listed below, although you can change them as
necessary. To determine the URL for a site, substitute your IIS Server
name for [YourServerName].
•
Maximizer Web Access URL
•
Customer Access URL
http://[YourServerName]/MaximizerWebAccess/Default.aspx
http://[YourServerName]/MaximizerCustomer/Default.aspx
222
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
•
Partner Access URL
•
Customer Access Administrator
http://[YourServerName]/MaximizerPartner/Default.aspx
http://[YourServerName]/MaximizerCustomer/Admin/
Default.aspx
•
Partner Access Administrator
http://[YourServerName]/MaximizerPartner/Admin/Default.aspx
Accessing Sites from the Start Menu
To access your sites through the Maximizer CRM program Start
menu, enter your URLs in the Sites dialog box in Administrator.
➤ To set up access for the sites from the Windows
Start menu
 In Administrator, select File > Web Access.
 Enter the URLs for sites in the corresponding fields.
For example, for Partner Access Administrator, you would enter
the following in the Partner Access URL field:
http://[YourServerName]/MaximizerPartner/Admin.aspx

Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
223
Configuring Site Options
Use the Configuration Manager to set preferences for the sites such
as Address Book, calendar of events, customer service, forgotten
credentials recovery, general settings, help, knowledge base, leads,
links, news, opportunities, personalization, and quick info.
To access the Configuration Manager, you must be a member of the
Customer or Partner Access Configuration Users security group.
When you log into Customer/Partner Access Administrator, you will
see a Configuration Manager link.
For information about each of the configuration options, open
Customer/Partner Access Administrator and click Help.
224
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Setting Up Business Partners and Customers
Start Maximizer and create Address Book entries for all the business
partners and customers who need to access the sites. Each customer
and partner must be set up as follows:
•
Be a Contact or Individual in Maximizer
•
Have an assigned email address in Maximizer
•
Have “Partner” and “Customer” as the assigned value in the
Category field
•
Have at least one entry in the Partner Interests or Customer
Interests user-defined field if you would like only certain new
items to appear by default
Set up a test account for yourself so you can log into the site as a
business customer and partner and confirm that everything is
working correctly. Do this by creating an Individual record with your
name, email address, and the selected values of Customer and
Partner for the Category field on the entry’s Details tab.
➤ To enable Address Book entries to access the site
 In the Address Book page, select the Address Book entry for the
Contact or Individual for whom to create a site login account.
 Click the Edit icon in the Details tab to edit the entry.
 Ensure that the Contact or Individual’s correct email address is
entered in the Email address field.
 Click the button beside the Category field.
 In the Category drop-down, select the checkbox beside either
the Customer or Partner category.
If you select Customer, the Contact or Individual will be able to
log into Customer Access.
If you select Partner, the Contact or Individual will be able to log
into Partner Access.
 Click Save.
 Repeat this procedure to enable any other Address Book entries
to access the sites.
After you have completed this procedure, you must provide the
customer or partner with a site PIN, which enables them to
register and log into the site.
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
225
Assigning Site Login PINs to Contacts and Individuals
You provide each business customer and partner with a PIN. The PIN
works only once. Each customer or partner can set up only one web
account. Site PINs and logins are shared for both Partner Access and
Customer Access.
Login PINs are created by a Maximizer merge field called External
Site PIN. The values of the External Site PIN merge field are
generated when you do a merge to email or when you generate an
automated activity for an automated campaign.
➤ To send Site PINs by email
 Select the Address Book entry or entries for whom you want to
generate a PIN.
 Select Actions > Write an Email.
– or –
Right-click and select Write an Email.
The Send Email dialog box opens.
 You can generate PINs for a
whole list of entries or just the
current entry.
 Choose how to use the current list, and click OK.
You can send the message to only the current entry, to all
selected entries, or to all entries in the list.
 If you are sending the email message to multiple Address Book
entries, choose the Separately option from the Send as dropdown list.
 You can include any content in
the merge document such as
the URL for the site.
 Enter a subject and the text of the email message.
You must include the External Site PIN merge field to send it to
customers or partners, so they can create their login accounts.
 To save the email template for re-use later, click the Template
icon in the editing toolbar and save the email as a template.
 Click Send.
An assigned PIN appears in each merged email that is sent.
➤ To activate a site login PIN through an automated
campaign activity
 For more information on
creating automated campaign
templates, refer to the
Maximizer CRM User’s Guide
and online help files.
•
When setting up your automated campaign template, use the
External Site PIN merge field in one of the automated
campaign activities.
226
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
➤ To open the main site for Partner Access or
Customer Access
 Set up a site PIN for yourself and activate a login.
 Log into either Partner Access Administrator or Customer Access
Administrator.
 Click the View Partner/Customer Access Site link to see the
main web access sites.
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
227
Activating a Login Account
The following procedure explains the steps for the business customer
or partner to activate a login account with the provided PIN.
➤ To activate a login account
 See “Determining External Site
URLs” on page 221 for more
information on the site URLs.
 Open Customer Access or Partner Access using the provided URL.
 At the Login screen, click the Register now link.
The registration page opens.
 Enter your last name, email address, PIN, user ID, and password.
The Customer or Partner Access page displays.
Removing Web Access
To block access to Customer or Partner Access for a business customer
or partner who currently has access, start Maximizer, locate the
Address Book entry, and remove the Customer or Partner value from
the Category field.
Retrieving a Forgotten Password
 For this feature to work, the
Forgotten Credentials
Recovery configuration must
have been set up previously in
Customer/Partner Access
Administrator.
A customer or partner who forgets a password can use the
“Forgotten Login Credentials” link to load a page that asks for an
email address and last name or user ID. The customer or partner then
receives the password by email.
Changing a Password
Partners or customers can change their password from inside the site
any time they want (if you enable that feature through the
Personalization link in Configuration Manager). All passwords are
encrypted; your Maximizer users do not have access to passwords.
228
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Advanced Site Configurations
This section describes the following additional site customizations:
•
“Customizing the Graphic on the Site Main Page” on page 228
•
“The sections.xml File” on page 229
•
“The followingWindowSets.xml File” on page 230
•
“Displaying Custom System Messages” on page 231
•
“Adding Custom Actions to the CustomActions.xml File” on
page 233
•
“Creating Custom Links to External Websites” on page 235
•
“Specifying the Address Book on the Site Login Screen” on
page 237
•
“Globalization of Sites” on page 238
•
“Configuring Multiple IIS Servers to Connect to a Single
Maximizer CRM Server” on page 239
•
“Moving a Site” on page 239
•
“Installing Sites to Non-Default Folders” on page 239
•
“Setting Up Multiple Customer or Partner Sites” on page 241
•
“Creating a Custom Case Wizard for Partner Access” on page 246
Customizing the Graphic on the Site Main Page
 With the exception of the
contents of the
\CustomGraphics folder, you
should not modify application
files, including graphics.
You can replace the default graphic on the site main page with your
own custom graphic. This procedure applies to all sites.
➤ To customize the graphic on the site main page
 Create a graphic that is 280 pixels wide by 130 pixels in height
and save it as LoginCorporate.gif.
 Copy the graphic file to the appropriate folder:
...\Program Files\Maximizer\Portals\<site>\CustomGraphics\
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
229
The sections.xml File
The sections.xml file contains information on modules that are
available to users in Maximizer Web Access and the other web access
sites such as Partner Access. By editing the sections.xml file, you can
add, disable, or change the default order that the modules appear.
The sections.xml file is located on the machine where the Maximizer
Components for IIS are installed, at the following path:
\\Program Files\Maximizer\Portals\<site>\Config\sections.xml
Disabling Modules in Sites
You can disable specific modules in the web access sites. The
sections.xml file determines what modules are displayed in the site.
The easiest way to disable a module is to comment out the shortcut
element for that module in the sections.xml file. The shortcut
element will remain in the file, but it will be enclosed between XML
comment tags and ignored by Maximizer.
➤ To disable a module in a site
 Always back up the
sections.xml file before making
any changes.
 Open the site’s sections.xml file in a text editor such as
Notepad.
 Locate the shortcut element containing the module.
The name of the module, as it appears in Maximizer, is displayed
between the title tags in the shortcut element.

Add an opening comment tag, <!--, before the shortcut opening
tag, <shortcut>.
 Add a closing comment tag, --!>, after the shortcut closing tag,
</shortcut>.
 Save the file.
The following example shows comment tags around the
opportunities shortcut element. In this example, the opportunities
module would be disabled on the site.
<!-<shortcuts>
<id>opp</id>
<title>Opportunities</title>
<image>opportunity</image>
<module_id>0<module_id>
<url>/Content/Opportunities.aspx</url>
230
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
<external>No</external>
<has_grid>Yes</has_grid>
</shortcuts>
-->
Changing the Order of Modules in the Icon Bar
In Maximizer Web Access, you can define the icons and the default
order that they appear in the icon bar by modifying the sections.xml
file. Users will only see the icons for the modules that they have the
rights to view.
The easiest way of doing this is copying the module section of the
module you want to move (the code surrounded by the <shortcut>
tags) and pasting it between other module sections.
If the order of the icons has been changed by a user in the Icon Bar
Properties dialog box (in Maximizer Web Access, from the top right
corner, select preferences), the new order is saved in the
ADMN_Config table where the TaskCode = the user’s ID and the
KeyCode = IconBarButtonOrder. If modules are hidden in the Icon
Bar Properties, references to the hidden modules are saved in the
ADMN_Config table where the TaskCode = the user’s ID and the
KeyCode = IconBarButtonHide.
See “ADMN_Config Table (Address Book Configuration)” on
page 364 for more information on the ADMN_Config table.
The followingWindowSets.xml File
The followingWindowSets.xml file contains information on
following windows that are available to users in Maximizer Web
Access and the other web access sites such as Partner Access. By
editing the followingWindowSets.xml file, you can change the name
(title) of a following window or disable a following window entirely.
The followingWindowSets.xml file is located on the computer where
the Maximizer Components for IIS are installed, at the following
path:
\\Maximizer\Portals\<site>\Config\followingWindowSets.xml
Renaming or Disabling Following Windows in Sites
You can rename or disable specific following windows in the web
access sites.
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
231
➤ To rename or disable a following window
 Always back up the
followingWindowSets.xml file
before making any changes.
 Open the site’s followingWindowSets.xml file in a text editor
such as Notepad.
 Locate the following window element.
The name of the following window, as it appears in Maximizer,
is displayed between the title tag.

Adjust the tags as necessary to rename or disable a following
window, as follows:
<title> - contains the name of the following window
<url> - contains the ASPX file that is displayed when a user
selects this following window
<visible> - the value of yes is specified to display the following
window and the value no is specified to disable or hide the
following window
 Save the file.
In the following example, the Contacts following window is renamed
to People.
<tab id="contacts">
<title>People</title>
<url>fwContacts.aspx</url>
<visible>Yes</visible>
</tab>
Displaying Custom System Messages
You can create custom system messages that are broadcast to all
Maximizer Web Access users. System messages display across the top
of web access pages. They can include two lines of text and a
hyperlink. The properties of a message are specified in the
SystemMessages.xml file. The file specifies the content of the
message, the appearance of the message, and the start and end date/
time that the message is displayed.
➤ To display a custom system message
 Open the site’s SystemMessages.xml file in a text editor such
as Notepad.
The file is located on the Maximizer server at the following path:
C:\Program Files\Maximizer\Portals\Employee\Config\
SystemMessages.xml
232
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 Use the XML tags in the bottom part of the SystemMessages.xml
file to specify the properties of the system message. The top part
of the file explains the role of each set of tags. The bottom part
of the file contains the actual tags that are used.
For descriptions and examples of each element, see “Elements in
SystemMessages.xml File” and “Example SystemMessages.xml
File” below.
 Between the Enabled tags, replace False with True. The line in
the file should be <Enabled>True</Enabled>.
 Save the file.
Elements in SystemMessages.xml File
The SystemMessages.xml file contains one <SystemMessages>
element, which in turn contains one <SystemMessage> element. This
element determines the properties of the message.
The following table describes each of the sub-elements in the
<SystemMessage> element.
Element
Description
<HeaderLine1>
Bolded text at the beginning of the first line
<TextLine1>
Plain text placed at the end of the first line.
<TextLine2>
Plain text placed at the beginning of the second line.
<Hyperlink
Text>
Text for a hyperlink placed at the end of the second
line.
<HyperlinkUrl>
The URL for the hyperlink.
<Background
Color1>
The background color of the message.
<StartDate>
The start date and time in the format yyyy-mm-dd
hh:mm. If specified, the message is displayed only
after this date and time.
<EndDate>
The end date and time in the format yyyy-mm-dd
hh:mm. If specified, the message is displayed only
before this date and time.
<Enabled>
True means the system message will display if at
least one text element has a value and the current
date/time is within the start and end date/time
values.
False means the system message will not display
regardless of the other elements.
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
233
Example SystemMessages.xml File
The following example shows the content of the <SystemMessages>
element:
<SystemMessages>
<SystemMessage>
<HeaderLine1>Notice</HeaderLine1>
<TextLine1>Maintenance to phone lines</TextLine1>
<TextLine2>The phone lines will be out of service
between 4:00 and 5:00 pm this evening.</TextLine2>
<HyperlinkText>More info.</HyperlinkText>
<HyperlinkUrl>http://Server/Maintenance</HyperlinkUrl>
<BackgroundColor1>Yellow</BackgroundColor1>
<StartDate>2011-11-10</StartDate>
<ExpiryDate>2011-11-10 17:30</ExpiryDate>
<Enabled>True</Enabled>
</SystemMessage>
</SystemMessages>
The example displays a message alerting Maximizer Web Access users
that phone lines are out of service. The message is displayed only on
the specified day until 5:30 pm.
Adding Custom Actions to the CustomActions.xml File
The Address Book, Customer Service, and Opportunities pages, along
with the Details tab in the Address Book following pane and the
read-only Address Book dialog in Maximizer Web Access each
contain an Actions menu, and you can add custom action commands
to those menus. Clicking on a custom action in the menu will open a
custom dialog box created by you, in which you can display
information about the current record, selected records, or all records
in the list. You can add as many custom actions as you want to the
Actions menu.
To enable Maximizer Web Access to register and recognize your
custom actions, you must add information to the CustomActions.xml
file. The file identifes which custom actions are enabled and defines
specifics about the dialog box. The file is located in the
<portal_root>\Config\ folder.
234
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
The file contains four sections, one for each page (Address Book,
Campaigns, Customer Service, and Opportunities). Each section
contains the following XML elements.
Element Tag
Description
<id>
Identifies which page the custom action is for (ab = Address Book,
cam = Campaigns, cs = Customer Service, and opp =
Opportunities). Do not change the value of this element.
<CustomAction>
Defines what page should be called when a user clicks a the
custom action in the Actions menu.
The following table describes each of the sub-elements in the
<CustomAction> element.
Element Tag
Description
<ID>
Unique ID of the menu command.
Can be any value, but must be unique within the <Page> element.
<Title>
Menu command title as it will appear in the Actions menu.
<Url>
Name of the file that will appear in the pop-up dialog box after
the command is called by a user. This file must reside in
<portal_root>\Dialogs\CustomDialogs\.
<MergeURL>
Custom URL containing a merge field from Maximizer.
<Width>
Width of the pop-up dialog box, in pixels.
<Height>
Height of the pop-up dialog box, in pixels.
<DisabledIfNo
Records>
Defines whether the custom Action menu command will be
disabled when there are no entries displayed in the grid on the
page. Must have a Yes or No value.
<Resizable>
Determines if the custom window can be resized. Must have a Yes
or No value.
<Scrollable>
Determines if the custom window can be scrolled. Must have a Yes
or No value.
<ShowLocation>
Determines if the custom action URL should be opened in a new
browser window/tab or not. Must have a No or blank value. If the
value is No, the URL will be opened in a pop-up window. If the
value is blank, the URL will be opened in a separate browser
window or tab.
Example of the CustomActions.xml File
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8" ?>
<!-ConfigActions.xml
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
235
===================
This file manages custom actions.
Sample:
=======
<CustomAction>
<ID>CA_id</ID>
: Must be unique
<Title>Custom Action...</Title>: As it will
appear in the Actions menu
<Url>c.aspx</Url>
: Must exist in
<EmployeePortalRoot>\Dialogs\CustomDialogs\ folder
<MergeUrl>No</MergeUrl> : Must be Yes or No
<Width>800</Width>
(width in pixels)
<Height>200</Height>
: Must be a number
: Must be a number (height
in pixels)
<DisabledIfNoRecords>Yes</DisabledIfNoRecords>:
Must be Yes or No
<Resizable>No</Resizable>: Must be Yes or No
<Scrollable>No</Scrollable>: Must be Yes or No
<ShowLocation>No</ShowLocation>: Must be No or
blank
</CustomAction>
Creating Custom Links to External Websites
You can create custom links in the CustomActions.xml file to external
websites that include merge fields from Maximizer. The custom URLs
are then accessible from the Actions menu in Maximizer Web Access.
This allows a user to link to a web page based on the contents of the
current record. For example, you could include the “city” merge field
as part of the external link URL and based on the city contained in
the record, information related to the associated city would be
shown in the web page.
Note the URLs must be encoded. Different types of encryption are
supported for passing parameters to URLs.
To create a custom link with a merge field, add the custom link
information to the CustomActions.xml file. See the following
example of a CustomActions.xml file for more information.
Example of an Integration with a Wikipedia Search
<CustomAction>
<ID>CA_id</ID>
<Title> Wikipedia...</Title>
236
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
<Url>http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/
[EncodingStartSpaceAsUnderscore] [C.CompanyName]
[EncodingEnd]</Url>
<MergeUrl>yes</MergeUrl>
<Width>700</Width>
<Height>400</Height>
<DisabledIfNoRecords>No</DisabledIfNoRecords>
<Resizable>Yes</Resizable>
<Scrollable>Yes</Scrollable>
</CustomAction>
Example of an Integration with a Google Search
<CustomAction>
<ID>CA_id2</ID>
<Title>Google Search...</Title>
<Url>http://www.google.ca/
search?q=[EncodingStartSpaceAsPlus][C.CompanyName][EncodingE
nd]</Url>
<MergeUrl>Yes</MergeUrl>
<Width>700</Width>
<Height>400</Height>
<DisabledIfNoRecords>No</DisabledIfNoRecords>
<Resizable>Yes</Resizable>
<Scrollable>Yes</Scrollable>
</CustomAction>
Example of an Integration with Google Maps
<CustomAction>
<ID>CA_id3</ID>
<Title>Google Map...</Title>
<Url>http://maps.google.ca/
maps?q=[EncodingStartSpaceAsPlus][C.AddressLine1]%2c[C.City]
%2c[C.StateProvince][EncodingEnd]</Url>
<MergeUrl>Yes</MergeUrl>
<Width>1100</Width>
<Height>800</Height>
<DisabledIfNoRecords>Yes</DisabledIfNoRecords>
<Resizable>Yes</Resizable>
<Scrollable>Yes</Scrollable>
</CustomAction>
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
237
Specifying the Address Book on the Site Login Screen
There are several methods of controlling which Address Books are
available through the login screens of Maximizer Web Access and
Mobile Access:
•
Users enter the site URL, and the resulting login page displays a
drop-down list of available Address Books
•
Users enter the site URL, appended by the “ab” parameter, and
the resulting login page displays the specified Address Book
name as a static field
•
You enter a value in the AddressBook key of the site’s
Web.config file, and when users enter the site URL, the resulting
login page displays the specified Address Book name as a static
field
Displaying a Drop-down List of Available Address Books
You can provide access to any Address Book through Maximizer Web
Access or Mobile Access. By default, when a user enters the site URL
in a browser, the resulting login screen includes a drop-down list of
available Address Books.
Specifying the Address Book in the URL
You can also specify the Address Book in the URL. By specifying the
new parameter called “ab” in the URL, you can provide a direct
shortcut to the Address Book in Maximizer Web Access or Mobile
Access.
•
Maximizer Web Access: http://SERVERNAME/
MaximizerWebAccess/default.aspx?ab=EsconaTutorial
•
Mobile Access: http://SERVERNAME/MobileAccess/
default.aspx?ab=EsconaTutorial
The value of the ab parameter must be the Address Book’s SQL
database name, not the user-definable Address Book name set in
Administrator (File > Preferences > System Options tab).
Enabling Access to a Single Address Book Only
You can also restrict an instance of Maximizer Web Access or Mobile
Access to be able to access a single Address Book only, rather than
showing the Address Book drop-down list or specifying the Address
Book in the URL. Specify the “AddressBook” property in the
appSettings section of the site’s Web.config file, as shown in the
following example:
<add key=”AddressBook” value=”EsconaTutorial” />
238
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
The value of the AddressBook key must be the Address Book’s SQL
database name, not the user-definable Address Book name set in
Administrator (File > Preferences > System Options tab).
If the value of the AddressBook key does not correspond to a valid
Address Book, the login page displays the Address Book list.
Similarly, you can display a default Address Book. This is also
specified in the appSettings section of the site’s Web.config file, as
shown in the following example:
<add key=”DefaultAddressBook” value=”EsconaTutorial” />
Globalization of Sites
The Globalization element in the web.config file enables you to
change the site’s regional display settings such as numbers and dates.
The Globalization element is optional. If it or any of its attributes are
not added to the Web.config file, US English is used by default.
In Maximizer Web Access, users can also choose a locale in the user
preferences. The user’s locale setting takes precedence over the
globalization element in the web.config file.
To change the globalization settings of a site, you must add the
section below as a child to the system.web element
<globalization
requestEncoding="utf-8"
responseEncoding="utf-8"
culture="en-US"
uiCulture="en"
/>
The regional settings are defined in the culture and uiCulture
attributes. To use display settings other than US English, replace the
values of the culture and uiCulture attributes in the Globalization
element. The following list includes some of the possible values:
Country, Language
culture
uiCulture
United States, English
en-US
en
Britain, English
en-GB
en
Canada, English
en-CA
en
France, French
fr-FR
fr
Canada, French
fr-CA
fr
Belgium, French
fr-BE
fr
Germany, German
de-DE
de
China, Chinese
zh-CN
zh
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
239
The country codes are defined in the ISO 3166 standard, which is
available at the following URL:
http://www.iso.org/iso/country_codes.htm
The concept of combining these country codes with language is
defined in RFC 3066, which is available at the following URL:
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc3066.html
Configuring Multiple IIS Servers to Connect to a Single Maximizer CRM Server
You can use the procedure described below to configure multiple
Address Books on multiple IIS servers to connect to a single
Maximizer CRM server.
➤ To configure multiple IIS servers to connect to a
single Maximizer CRM Server
 On each IIS server, install Maximizer Components for
Microsoft IIS from the Maximizer CRM Server disc and during
setup, select your Maximizer CRM Server machine.
 On each IIS server, change the AddressBook key of the
Web.config file for Customer and Partner Access to point to the
appropriate Address Book.
Moving a Site
Web access sites are ASP.NET web applications, which implies a level
of portability. If you choose, you can rename the virtual folder
holding the application and therefore its URL. You may even change
the physical path of the application by copying the application
someplace else on the IIS machine’s hard drive. When doing this, be
sure to move the entire folder.
Installing Sites to Non-Default Folders
The Maximizer installation creates an XML file called
PortalLocations.xml (unless the file already exists on the machine, in
which case it does not overwrite the existing file). The
PortalLocations.xml file is located in the folder where the sites are
installed. The default site installation folder is ...\Program
Files\Maximizer\Portals. There is only one PortalLocations.xml file for
each Maximizer CRM Server.
The PortalLocations.xml file describes the folder location of each site.
If you install any sites to a non-default location, you can optionally
add their location to the PortalLocations.xml file. Any sites identified
in this file will be updated by the Maximizer installation for any
240
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
upgrades or updates such as service releases. Any sites installed to
non-default locations will not be updated unless they are added to
the PortalLocations.xml file.
By default, the PortalLocations.xml file contains location information
for the four default sites.
<Portals>
<Portal ID="DefCustomerPortal">
<Location>C:\Program
Files\Maximizer\Portals\Customer</Location>
<Context>MA_CUSTOMER</Context>
<Description>Maximizer Default Customer Portal</
Description>
</Portal>
<Portal ID="DefPartnerPortal">
<Location>C:\Program
Files\Maximizer\Portals\Partner</Location>
<Context>MA_PARTNER</Context>
<Description>Maximizer Default Partner Portal</
Description>
</Portal>
<Portal ID="DefEmployeePortal">
<Location>C:\Program
Files\Maximizer\Portals\Employee</Location>
<Context>MA_EMPLOYEE</Context>
<Description>Maximizer Default Employee Portal</
Description>
</Portal>
<Portal ID="DefWirelessPortal">
<Location>C:\Program
Files\Maximizer\Portals\Wireless</Location>
<Context>MA_WIRELESS</Context>
<Description>Maximizer Default Wireless Portal</
Description>
</Portal>
</Portals>
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
241
The XML file contains a site ID, location, context, and description for
each site. These elements are described in the following table.
Element
Description
<Site/Portal>
This element has an ID attribute, which must be
unique for each site. This ID will not be displayed in
the site itself.
<Location>
Installation location of the site.
<Context>
Identifies the type of site. Must be one of the
following values:
• MA_Employee
• MA_Customer
• MA_Partner
• MA_Wireless
<Description>
Description of the site.
Setting Up Multiple Customer or Partner Sites
 If you want the sites to be
updated by the Maximizer
installation, refer to “Installing
Sites to Non-Default Folders”
on page 239.
To this point, the chapter has explained how to set up a single
Partner Access site and a single Customer Access site. However, you
can create additional Partner and Customer Access sites for one or
more Address Books. For example, you might want to create a Media
Site for your Address Book, or you might want to create a Customer
or Partner Access site for a second Address Book.
The major steps involved in creating additional Partner or Customer
Access sites is as follows:
•
Assign a Category field value to Address Book entries. The
Category field of an Address Book entry controls which sites(s)
an Address Book entry can access. Therefore, you must assign a
Category field value to all Address Book entries that should be
granted access to the new site. You can create a new field value,
or you can assign one of the existing field values.
•
Create the new site. The process of creating a new site is very
simple. Essentially, you duplicate an existing Customer or Partner
Access site folder, rename it, and edit the Web.config file for the
new site.
•
Configure the new site. At this point, the site is functional. The
only remaining task is to configure the new site using Customer/
Partner Access Administrator and provide access PINs to those
Individuals and Contacts who you want to be able to log into it.
Each of these procedures are described in detail below.
242
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
➤ To create a new Category field value
 Run Maximizer and log into the Address Book.
 Open an Address Book entry to grant access to the new site.
 If the Address Book entry is in View mode, click Edit to switch to
Edit mode.
 Click the ellipsis button beside the Category field.

 If a new field value is required, click New Value and add an item
to the list.
 Select the checkbox beside the field value that enables the
Address Book entry to access the new site, and click OK.
For example, if you are creating a Media Access site, you would
probably select Media as the required Category field value. If
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
243
you were creating an Investor Access site, you would create a
new Category field value of Investor.


 Repeat this process to assign the Category to any other Address
Book entries which should have access to the new site.
➤ To create the new site
 Open Windows Explorer, and navigate to the sites directory. (In a
default installation, this folder is located at
C:\Program Files\Maximizer\Portals.)
 Create a copy of the Customer or Partner folder inside the
Portals folder.
Make sure you copy the entire Customer or Partner folder,
including all subfolders and files.
244
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 Rename the folder with the new site name.
 Right-click the new folder, and select Properties from the
shortcut menu.
 Do not use spaces in the virtual
folder name.
 Select the Web Sharing tab.
 Select Default Web Site from the Share on drop-down list,
and select the Share this folder option.
The Edit Alias dialog box opens.
 Enter an alternate Alias if desired, select the Read access
permission, select the Scripts application permissions, and click
OK.
 Click OK to close the Properties dialog box.
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
245
 In the new folder, select the Web.config file and open it in a
text editor, such as Windows Notepad.
Assign a meaningful value to the SubContext key.
The sites have a Context value and a SubContext value. The
Context value is MA_PARTNER for a Partner Access site and
MA_CUSTOMER for a Customer Access site. The Context value
for the new site is already defined because you copied it from an
existing site, so you just need to assign a SubContext value,
which differentiates this new site from the original.
For example, if you are creating a Media site, you would
probably choose to assign a SubContext value of “Media”.
Enter the Category field value (from the previous procedure)
as the AlternateRequiredCategory value.
If you used the “Media” Category field value, you would assign
“Media” as the AlternateRequiredCategory value.
Save the Web.config file.
Do not change the name or location of this file.
246
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
➤ To configure the new site
 Open a web browser and enter the URL of the new site. The
default site URL is
http://<web_server_name>/<site_alias>/Admin.aspx
In the case of the example site, the URL is http://test-server/
MaximizerMedia/Admin.aspx.
Customer/Partner Access Administrator opens. The login page
appears as the Partner Access Administrator or Customer Access
Administrator login page, depending on which site you copied
the new one from.
 Log into Customer /Partner Access Administrator.
 Configure the site as desired. Refer to the previous sections of
this chapter for more information.
Include setting the site name as part of the configuration. You
can set the name in the General Settings page of the
Configuration Manager.
 Assign a site PIN to all Individuals and Contacts who should have
site access, as described in “Assigning Site Login PINs to Contacts
and Individuals” on page 225.
Creating a Custom Case Wizard for Partner Access
Partner Access includes a wizard for creating new customer service
cases. It is available from the Edit > Create a Customer Service Case
menu item on the Customer Service page of the site. You can also
create your own custom customer service case wizards and make
them accessible from the Edit menu.
Create your own case wizards by describing them in an XML file,
naming the file CustomCSCaseWizards.xml, and placing it in the
Config folder of Partner Access. The XML elements that your
CustomCSCaseWizards.xml file may contain are described below,
along with a sample XML file. When you create multiple case
wizards, they must all be described in the same XML file, with each
wizard set apart by the <CSCaseWizard> element.
Note that if the XML is not well-formed, the custom wizards will not
appear in the Edit menu, and no error messages will appear.
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
247
➤ To create a custom customer service case wizard
 Create an xml file describing the contents of each screen of the
wizard.
For more information, refer to the custom wizard example and
the table describing the XML tags, which are provided in this
section.
 Name the xml file CustomCSCaseWizards.xml.
 Place the xml file in the following folder:
...\Maximizer\Portals\Partner\Config
This folder is typically located in the C:\Program FIles\ folder.
Custom Wizard Example
Below are the contents of an example CustomCSCaseWizards.xml
file.
<CustomCSCaseWizards>
<CSCaseWizard>
<Id>SuggestionWizard</Id>
<MenuOption>Enter a Suggestion</MenuOption>
<HeaderStep1>Categorize your suggestion</HeaderStep1>
<ShowOrigin>true</ShowOrigin>
<OriginPrompt>Suggestion origin</OriginPrompt>
<DefaultOrigin>Website</DefaultOrigin>
<MandatoryOrigin>true</MandatoryOrigin>
<ShowType>true</ShowType>
<TypePrompt>Suggestion type</TypePrompt>
<DefaultType>Suggestion</DefaultType>
<MandatoryType>true</MandatoryType>
<ShowProduct>true</ShowProduct>
<ProductPrompt>Product or service</ProductPrompt>
<DefaultProduct>Accessories</DefaultProduct>
<MandatoryProduct>true</MandatoryProduct>
<ShowCategory>true</ShowCategory>
<CategoryPrompt>Category</CategoryPrompt>
248
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
<DefaultCategory>Other</DefaultCategory>
<MandatoryCategory>true</MandatoryCategory>
<ShowPriority>true</ShowPriority>
<PriorityPrompt>Priority</PriorityPrompt>
<DefaultPriority>Medium</DefaultPriority>
<ShowSeverity>true</ShowSeverity>
<SeverityPrompt>Severity</SeverityPrompt>
<DefaultSeverity>Medium</DefaultSeverity>
<DefaultAssignedTo>JNAPOLI</DefaultAssignedTo>
<DefaultOwner>JNAPOLI</DefaultOwner>
<DefaultQueue>Standard</DefaultQueue>
<udfPrompt1>Send acknowledgement email</udfPrompt1>
<udfTypeId1>107</udfTypeId1>
<MandatoryUdf1>true</MandatoryUdf1>
<DefaultUdf1>No</DefaultUdf1>
<HeaderStep2>Provide details</HeaderStep2>
<SubjectPrompt>Short description</SubjectPrompt>
<DescriptionPrompt1>Details</DescriptionPrompt1>
<DescriptionPrompt2>More details</DescriptionPrompt2>
<HeaderStep3>Review your suggestion</HeaderStep3>
</CSCaseWizard>
<CSCaseWizard>...(Second custom wizard)...</CSCaseWizard>
<CSCaseWizard>...(Third custom wizard)...</CSCaseWizard>
</CustomCSCaseWizards>
The first screen of the example custom wizard displays the following
fields: Suggestion origin, Suggestion type, Product or service,
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
249
Category, Priority, Severity, and Send acknowledgement email. All of
the fields have default values.
The second screen of the example custom wizard contains three
fields: Short description, Details, and More details.
250
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
The third screen in the example custom wizard displays a summary of
the values entered in the previous screens.
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
251
XML Tags in the CustomCSCaseWizards.xml File
The following table lists each of the XML tags in the
CustomCSCaseWizards.xml file, as well as their data type and a
description.
All XML tags are case-sensitive.
XML Tag
Data Type
CSCaseWizard
Description
Contains all other tags describing
a single wizard. Each custom case
wizard must be set apart by its
own set of CSCaseWizard tags
inside the file.
Id
string
Mandatory.
Unique identification of the
wizard.
MenuOption
string
Mandatory.
Menu item text as it will appear in
the Edit menu of the Customer
Service page.
HeaderStep1
string
HeaderStep2
string
HeaderStep3
string
Header text that appears at the
top of each page of the wizard.
Header text is automatically
prefixed by “Step 1 - “, “Step 2 - “,
or “Step 3 - “.
If these tags are not included, the
wizard will use the default header
text, as it appears in the default
Customer Service Case Wizard.
ShowOrigin
boolean
ShowType
boolean
ShowProduct
boolean
ShowCategory
boolean
ShowPriority
boolean
ShowSeverity
boolean
Specifies whether to display the
Case origin, Case type, Products/
Services, Categories, Priority, and
Severity fields:
• If “true”, the field(s) appear
on the first page of the
wizard.
• If “false”, the field(s) do not
appear in the wizard.
• If you omit the XML tag, all of
these fields, except “Origin”
appear in the wizard by
default.
252
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
XML Tag
Data Type
Description
DefaultOrigin
string
DefaultType
string
DefaultProduct
string
DefaultCategory
string
DefaultPriority
string
DefaultSeverity
string
DefaultAssignedTo
string
DefaultOwner
string
DefaultQueue
string
Specifies the default value of the
Case origin, Case type, Products/
Services, Categories, Priority, and
Severity fields.
The value of the XML element
must be a valid value of the
related field in the Address Book.
The values of the
DefaultAssignedTo,
DefaultOwner, and DefaultQueue
fields are not visible in the wizard
because there is no related
“Show...” XML tag. Therefore, site
users cannot change the value of
these fields through the wizard.
 The DefaultAssignedTo tag does not
check whether the specified user has the
“Customer Service Representative” or
“Customer Service Manager” access
right. It is up to you to verify that the
user identified in the DefaultAssignedTo
tag has the appropriate access rights.
OriginPrompt
string
TypePrompt
string
ProductPrompt
string
CategoryPrompt
string
PriorityPrompt
string
SeverityPrompt
string
SubjectPrompt
string
DescriptionPrompt1
string
DescriptionPrompt2
string
Specifies the text that appears
beside the field in the wizard.
If you omit an XML tag, the
wizard uses the default prompt, as
it appears in the “Create a
Customer Service Case” wizard.
Specifies the text that appears
above the last two fields on the
second page of the wizard.
If you omit an XML tag, the
wizard uses the default prompt, as
it appears in the “Create a
Customer Service Case” wizard.
Chapter 9
Configuring Web Access
253
XML Tag
Data Type
Description
MandatoryOrigin
boolean
MandatoryType
boolean
MandatoryProduct
boolean
MandatoryCategory
boolean
Specifies whether site user must
provide a value for the Case
origin, Case type, Products/
Services, or Categories field in the
wizard:
• If “true”, the site user must
select a value for the field
before proceeding to the next
page in the wizard.
• If “false”, the site user may
leave the field blank.
• If you omit the XML tag, the
fields are not mandatory.
udfTypeId1 ...
udfTypeId7
integer
Specifies the user-defined field to
include on the first page of the
wizard. Specify the Type_Id of the
user-defined field as the value of
this XML tag.
You can include up to seven userdefined fields. The wizard can
display only table user-defined
fields defined for customer service
cases.
udfPrompt1 ...
udfPrompt7
string
Specifies the text that appears
beside each user-defined field
included in the wizard.
MandatoryUdf1 ...
MandatoryUdf7
boolean
Specifies whether the site user
must provide a value for each
user-defined field included in the
wizard.
DefaultUdf1 ...
DefaultUdf7
string
Specifies the default value of each
user-defined field included in the
wizard.
254
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
CHAPTER
Live Update
10
In this chapter...
“Introduction to Maximizer Live Update” on page 256
“Installing Live Update Manager” on page 257
“Configuring Live Update Manager” on page 259
“Downloading Updates from Maximizer with Live Update” on page 260
“Approving Updates” on page 261
“Copying the Update and XML Files to the Web Server” on page 263
“Configuring the Maximizer Live Update Service” on page 264
“Updating Maximizer with Live Update” on page 265
10
256
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Introduction to Maximizer Live Update
The Live Update service checks for and downloads appropriate
Maximizer CRM software updates for your local Maximizer CRM
installation. The Live Update service can be configured to point to
either the Maximizer Software update server (which is the default
setting) or to your organization’s own Live Update server. The Live
Update service is installed and enabled automatically as part of the
regular Maximizer CRM installation. However, to use your own Live
Update server, you must install and configure Live Update Manager
separately, as described in this chapter.
Live Update Manager is an optional component of the Maximizer
Live Update service and is available on the Maximizer CRM Server
disc. Live Update Manager is a standalone component that enables
you to control the timing and distribution of software updates, as
well as to test them before releasing Maximizer software updates to
your users.
Chapter 10
Live Update
257
Installing Live Update Manager
Before you install Live Update Manager, you will need to create a
virtual directory on your web server. The following sections describe
how to install LIve Update Manager:
•
“Creating a Virtual Directory for Live Update on your Web
Server” on page 257
•
“Installing Maximizer Live Update Manager” on page 257
Creating a Virtual Directory for Live Update on your Web Server
 For instructions on creating a
virtual directory, refer to your
web server software
documentation.
Designate a machine as your Live Update server, which will serve
updates to the Live Update service on Maximizer machines in your
organization. It can be a web server outside the firewall if Internet
access is required (for example to support remote offices) or a web
server available locally only. In either case, it must be an IIS server.
Create a virtual directory for Live Update on your web server. You
will be prompted for the URL of your Live Update server during the
Live Update Manager installation.
You will also be prompted for the location to save updates that Live
Update Manager downloads from Maximizer Software. If possible,
use the same location as the physical location of the virtual directory
of your Live Update server. However, in some situations (such as
when the URL is of a web server outside the firewall) this
configuration is not the most secure and you should specify a
different location.
Installing Maximizer Live Update Manager
Live Update Manager is the program that enables you to check for,
download, and manage updates for Maximizer CRM installations.
The Live Update Manager installation is available on the Maximizer
CRM Server disc. Live Update Manager does not need to be colocated with a Maximizer CRM Server, but it can be if desired. The
installation location of the Live Update Manager (by default
C:\Program Files\Maximizer Live Update) must have network access
to the physical folder that will be used to store Maximizer CRM
product updates downloaded from the Maximizer Software update
server.
➤ To install Maximizer Live Update Manager
 Close all programs running on the machine.
 Insert the Maximizer CRM Server disc.
258
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 On the Autorun screen, click Install Maximizer Live Update
Manager.
 If the setup doesn’t start
automatically, you can start it
manually by running setup.exe
from the disc.
 On the Welcome screen, click Next.
 On the Customer Information screen, enter your User Name,
Company Name, and select whether to install the application
for all users of the computer or only for the current user.
 On the Choose Destination Location screen, click Next to install
the application to the default folder.
– or –
Click Browse, select an alternative location, and click Next.
 On the Corporate Update Server properties screen, enter the
URL for the Live Update virtual directory you created previously
(e.g., http://www.escona.com/liveupdate).
 You can modify the URL and
Download settings through
Live Update Manager after it is
installed.
– or –
Enter the UNC network path of the Live Update folder on your
Live Update web server (e.g., \\LiveUpdateServer\liveupdate).
The Download field specifies the folder that updates from
Maximizer will download to. You can change this path if
needed.
Click Next.
 On the Start Copying Files screen, review your installation
settings and click Next to begin the installation.
 When the installation is complete, click Finish.
Live Update Manager is now accessible from the Start menu.
Chapter 10
Live Update
259
Configuring Live Update Manager
Once you have installed Live Update Manager, configure it and enter
the PSNs for your Maximizer products.
➤ To configure Live Update Manager
 Run Live Update Manager. It is available from Start > Programs
> Maximizer Live Update > Live Update Manager.
 Click the Settings tab.
 Ensure that the URL of your corporate update server field
contains the URL (e.g., www.escona.com/liveupdate) or the UNC
network path (e.g., \\LiveUpdateServer\liveupdate) of the Live
Update virtual folder on your Live Update web server.
 The Base URL of the update
server field may already be
completed if you provided the
information during the Live
Update Manager installation.
 In the Product list, ensure the checkboxes are selected for all
Maximizer Software Inc. products installed in your organization.
De-select the checkboxes for any products not installed.
 For each installed product, select the product, click Edit, enter
your PSN(s) for that product, and click OK. If you have more
than one PSN for a product, separate the PSNs with commas.
 You can optionally change any of the settings on the
Preferences tab. For information about each of these options,
select the Preferences tab and press F1.
 Click Apply to save your changes.








260
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Downloading Updates from Maximizer with Live Update
The Live Update Wizard in the Live Update Manager connects to the
Maximizer Live Update Server and downloads available updates from
Maximizer Software Inc.
➤ To start the Live Update Wizard
•
If the Enable automatic Maximizer Live Update
notification option is selected on the Preferences tab, a
message box notifies you when new updates are available. Click
OK to start the Live Update Wizard.
– or –
•
In Live Update Manager, click the Check for updates button on
the Updates tab, which opens the Live Update Wizard.
➤ To download software updates from Maximizer
 Start the Live Update Wizard as described above.
If you started the Live Update Wizard from the automatic
notification message box, it takes you directly to the Available
Updates screen. Skip to step 3.
 Click Next on the welcome screen.
The Live Update Wizard connects to the Maximizer Live Update
Server to check for any available updates.
 Select the update(s) to download.
 Click Next to download the selected updates.
 Click Finish to close the wizard.
The update files are now located in the updates download
folder. The default location of this folder is C:\Documents and
Settings\All Users\Application Data\Maximizer\Live
Update Manager.
 The updates download folder
path is specified in the
Preferences tab of Live Update
Manager.
If your Live Update Manager configuration does not use the
default location, this folder may be in a different location.
Chapter 10
Live Update
261
Approving Updates
Once you have downloaded any available updates with the Live
Update Wizard, they appear in the Available Updates list of the
Updates tab in Live Update Manager. You must approve these
updates before copying them (and the MaxUpdates.xml file) to your
Live Update server.
Use the Approve button on the Updates tab to approve and
disapprove updates. Approving an update modifies the
MaxUpdates.xml file, which keeps track of approved updates. Once
an update is approved, it is available to any Maximizer CRM servers
that check for updates.
The following sections contain more information on approving
updates for Maximize users:
•
“Testing Updates Before Approval” on page 261
•
“Approving Updates for Download” on page 261
Testing Updates Before Approval
Between receiving an update from Maximizer Software and
releasing it to your organization, you should test the update in a test
environment and once satisfied should deploy it to all Maximizer
CRM servers that host Address Books. Assuming that you have
already deployed a production Live Update Manager deployment,
the two ways to set up testing are as follows:
•
Install a test deployment of Live Update Manager on another
machine, with its own testing Live Update server URL. The
download location could be the same as for the production Live
Update Manager. One or more Maximizer CRM servers should be
configured for testing and to download updates from the test
Live Update server. Once these updates are verified, you can
return to the production Live Update Manager and approve the
updates.
•
Alternatively, rather than using a test Live Update Manager to
manage updates, simply copy the downloaded updates to the
test Maximizer CRM server(s) and run the update(s) manually on
the test machines (i.e., distribute the updates for testing
manually rather than using Live Update Manager to distribute
the updates). Following testing, return to the production Live
Update Manager and approve the updates.
Approving Updates for Download
After testing the updates, you can use Live Update Manager to
approve updates. After approving the updates, you must copy the
262
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
update files and MaxUpdates.xml file to your Live Update server
before users can download the updates from Administrator or
Maximizer.
➤ To approve software updates for download
 In the Updates tab of Live Update Manager, select one or more
downloaded update(s).
 Click the Approve button.
The values of the Approved column changes from “No” to
“Yes”.
 Click Apply to save your changes.
 Repeat these steps to approve any other updates, as needed.
Chapter 10
Live Update
263
Copying the Update and XML Files to the Web Server
After you have downloaded and approved any updates, you must
copy the files and the MaxUpdates.xml file to the virtual directory on
your Live Update server. The location of the files on the server must
match the URL specified in the updates properties.
Once you have copied the files to your Live Update server, you can
verify the URLs for each update using Live Update Manager. The
Verify URLs button checks that the approved update file(s) and
updated MaxUpdates.xml file actually exist at the location specified
by the Live Update server URL.
➤ To copy the update files to the Live Update server
•
Copy the following files to the virtual directory on your Live
Update server.
File(s) to copy
Location to copy file(s) from
Downloaded update
file(s)
Updates download folder, specified on the
Preferences tab of Live Update Manager.
The default updates download folder is
C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Application Data\Maximizer\Live
Update Manager
MaxUpdates.xml
Live Update Manager program folder
(usually C:\Program Files\Maximizer Live
Update).
This file contains information about
downloaded updates and gets updated
every time you download an update.
You have to copy the most recent version
of this file to your web server each time
you approve a new update.
➤ To verify update URLs
•
On the Updates tab of Live Update Manager, click Verify URLs.
Live Update Manager verifies all approved updates. If the
verification succeeds, your Maximizer server(s) can download the
updates from your Live Update server.
If the verification fails, ensure that the update files and current
MaxUpdates.xml file have been copied to the correct location on
the Live Update server, that the URL defined for the update is
correct, and that your web server settings are correct.
264
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Configuring the Maximizer Live Update Service
The default configuration for Maximizer CRM servers is with the Live
Update service enabled and using the URL for the Maximizer
Software update server. Change the URL in Administrator
Preferences to point to your own Live Update server to enable all
Maximizer CRM servers to use the Live Update service through your
Live Update server.
➤ To configure the Live Update Service
 In Administrator, select File > Preferences.
 On the System Options tab, click Live Update.
 The Enabled Maximizer Live Update checkbox is selected by
default. If it has been cleared, make sure to select it.
 By default, the URL of update server field contains the URL of
the Maximizer Software Live Update server. Change it to the
URL (e.g., www.escona.com/liveupdate) or the UNC network
path (e.g., \\LiveUpdateServer\liveupdate) of the Live Update
folder on your web server.
 By default, Enable automatic Maximizer Live Update
notification is turned on. When enabled, Live Update displays a
message on the Maximizer server(s) and workstations when a
new update becomes available on the Live Update server. If you
turn automatic notification off, users must manually check for
updates on each machine.
 By default, Live Update automatically checks for updates every
14 days. You can optionally change the Interval to check for
updates.
 Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box.





Chapter 10
Live Update
265
Updating Maximizer with Live Update
The Maximizer Live Update Service is installed automatically with
Maximizer CRM server. It enables servers to download updates such
as hot fixes and service releases, and you can configure Live Update
to provide automatic notification of available updates.
The Live Update Wizard on Maximizer servers connects to your Live
Update Server and downloads any available updates.
After downloading the software updates, the downloaded
executable file should launch immediately to start the installation. If
you need to locate the downloaded file, it is in the user’s Application
Data folder (typically C:\Documents and
Settings\<CurrentUser>\Application Data\Maximizer\Live Update).
 The updates download folder
If the Enable automatic Maximizer Live Update notification option is
selected in the Live Update options in Administrator, a message box
you when new updates are available. You can also check for updates
at any time from Maximizer or Administrator.
 Live Update options iare
➤ To download software updates from the server
path is specified in the
Preferences tab of Live Update
Manager.
accessible through the Live
Update button on the System
Options preferences in
Administrator. (Select File >
Preferences.)
 If you are notified that new updates are available, click OK in the
message box to start the Live Update Wizard.
– or –
In Administrator, select Help > Maximizer Live Update.
 Click Next.
The Live Update Wizard connects to the Live Update Server to
check for any available updates.
 Select the update(s) to download.
 Click Next to download the selected updates.
 Click Finish to close the wizard.
266
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
CHAPTER
SQL Server Reporting
Services
11
In this chapter...
“About Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services” on page 268
“Integrating SQL Server Reporting Services with Maximizer Web Access” on
page 269
11
268
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
About Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services
Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services is a server-based reporting
system that’s included with most editions of Microsoft SQL Server.
Maximizer and Maximizer Web Access can integrate with SQL Server
Reporting Services. You can create custom reports that point to
Maximizer data, and host the reports in SQL Server Reporting
Services. Then, you can access the reports from Maximizer or
Maximizer Web Access, depending on the integration you use.
The Maximizer Web Access integration with SQL Server Reporting
Services works only with SQL Server 2008 R2 Service Pack 1 or later.
This integration creates a number of default reports that users can
access from the Reports page in Maximizer Web Access. Users can
also create new reports using Microsoft SQL Server Report Builder.
Chapter 11
SQL Server Reporting Services
269
Integrating SQL Server Reporting Services with Maximizer
Web Access
You can integrate Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services with
Maximizer Web Access. This Integration is available only on Microsoft
SQL Server 2008 R2 Service Pack 1 or later. If you have an earlier
version of SQL Server 2008 R2, you should first upgrade SQL Server to
the latest service pack. The integration is installed automatically
when you install Maximizer CRM Server. To use the integration, you
must complete the following steps:
•
Install SQL Reporting Services Integration from the Maximizer
CRM Server disc. For information, see “Installing SQL Reporting
Services Integration” on page 269.
•
Set up a user account for the integration. For information, see
“User Account for SQL Server Reporting Services Integration” on
page 271
•
Enable SQL Server Reporting Services in Maximizer Web Access
Administrator. For information, see “Enabling SQL Server
Reporting Services” on page 271.
If you use Windows Authentication or you run Maximizer Web Access
on HTTPS, you must also follow additional steps to configure SQL
Server Reporting Services. For information, see “Configuring SQL
Server Reporting Services for Windows Authentication” on page 272
and “SQL Server Reporting Services with Maximizer Web Access on
HTTPS” on page 273.
Installing SQL Reporting Services Integration
SQL Reporting Services Integration integrates Microsoft SQL Server
Reporting Services with Maximizer Web Access. You should install
SQL Reporting Services Integration on the same computer where SQL
Server Reporting Services is installed. This computer may be a
different computer than the one where Maximizer CRM Server is
installed.
If you plan to use SQL Server Reporting Services for any purposes
other than integrating with Maximizer Web Access, you should
install a dedicated instance of SQL Server for the integration. When
you install SQL Reporting Services Integration, the security settings
on the selected instance of SQL Server Reporting Services are
replaced with security settings appropriate for integrating with
Maximizer.
270
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
➤ To install SQL Reporting Services Integration
 On the computer running SQL Server Reporting Services, close all
programs.
 Insert the Maximizer CRM Server disc.
 Select Install SQL Reporting Services Integration.
The Maximizer CRM SQL Reporting Services Integration
installation wizard opens.
 Click Next.
 Read the license agreement, select I accept the terms of the
license agreement, and click Next.
 From the SQL Reporting Service instance drop-down list,
select an existing instance of SQL Server Reporting Service.
The security settings of the selected instance will be replaced
with security extensions for Maximizer. You should select a
dedicated instance of SQL Server Reporting Services for
integration with Maximizer.
 In the Maximizer Web Access URL field, enter the URL for
Maximizer Web Access, and click Next.
 Click Install to begin the installation.
Chapter 11
SQL Server Reporting Services
271
User Account for SQL Server Reporting Services Integration
In order to enable the SQL Server Reporting Services Integration, you
must specify a user account to connect with the Maximizer database.
The user account must match the following criteria:
•
The user is a member of the SSRS Report Management security
group in Maximizer. For information on security groups, see
“Security Groups” on page 106.
•
The login for the user has the sysadmin server role on the SQL
Server hosting the Maximizer database. For information on user
logins in Microsoft SQL Server, see the SQL Server
documentation.
The MASTER user automatically meets these criteria.
Enabling SQL Server Reporting Services
You can enable SQL Server Reporting Services in the System Options
preferences in Maximizer Web Access Administrator. When you
enable SQL Server Reporting Services, a number of default reports
are automatically created on the SQL Server Reporting Services
server.
➤ To enable SQL Server Reporting Services
 Log in to Maximizer Web Access Administrator.
 In the left pane, under Preferences, click System Options.
 Select the SQL Server Reporting Services Settings tab.
 Click Modify Options.
 Select Enable SQL Server Reporting Services Integration.
The URL to the Reporting Services server and the path to the
current Address Book are automatically filled in.
 Under Database Account, enter the username and password
for the user account used to connect to the Maximizer database.
If you are using Windows Authentication, you must specify the
Windows domain and user account in the Account field.
Whenever the password changes, you must specify the new
password in this page.
272
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 Click Save.
 The SQL Server Reporting Services settings are saved on the
report server. You may need to wait a moment for the settings
to save.
Configuring SQL Server Reporting Services for Windows Authentication
If you are using Windows Authentication, you must perform
additional steps to configure SQL Server Reporting Services. After
configuring Windows Authentication, you must continue to specify
the Maximizer username and password when you log in to SQL
Server Reporting Services to configure the report server or to create
reports using SQL Server Report Builder.
When you enable SQL Server Reporting Services Integration in
Maximizer Web Access Administrator, you must specify the Windows
domain and user account in the name of the database account. For
information on enabling SQL Server Reporting Services, see
“Enabling SQL Server Reporting Services” on page 271. If your
domain enforces password changes at regular intervals, you may
want to create a user account where the password never changes for
this purpose.
In Reporting Services Configuration Manager, you must specify the
Local System as the service account.
➤ To specify the service account for SQL Server
Reporting Services
 On the computer hosting SQL Server Reporting Services, open
Reporting Services Configuration Manager (Start > All
Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 > Configuration
Tools > Reporting Services Configuration Manager).
Chapter 11
SQL Server Reporting Services
 Specify the name and instance of the report server, and click
Connect.
 In the left pane, select Service Account.
 Select Use built-in account.
 From the drop-down list, select Local System.
 Click Apply.
SQL Server Reporting Services with Maximizer Web Access on HTTPS
If you run Maximizer Web Access using HTTP Secure (HTTPS), you
must configure SQL Server Reporting Services to connect with
Maximizer Web Access under HTTPS.
➤ To configure SQL Server Reporting Services for
HTTPS
 On the computer hosting SQL Server Reporting Services, open
the Report Manager web.config file.
The file is stored in the following location:
[SQL Server Installation Folder]\Reporting Services\
ReportManager\web.config
 In the <appSettings> element, locate the
MaxAuthWebServicesURL key.
 Next to value, change http to https.
 Save the file.
 Open the rsreportserver.config file.
The file is stored in the following location:
[SQL Server Installation Folder]Reporting Service\
ReportServer\rsreportserver.config
 Locate all lines containing the <MaxAuthWebServicesURL>
element.
The element is located in the <Security> and
<Authentication> elements.
 In the URL for each <MaxAuthWebServicesURL> element,
change http to https.
 Save the file.
273
274
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
CHAPTER
Customizing Dashboards
12
In this chapter...
“Working with Dashboards” on page 276
“SQL Metrics for Indicators” on page 277
12
276
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Working with Dashboards
Dashboards are graphical display of quantitative Address Book
information. They includes a variety of indicators that display
information about Address Book entries, opportunities, campaigns,
customer service cases, quotas, and activities. Dashboards are
accessible from the My Work Day window in Maximizer. Users can
also view dashboards from mobile devices using Mobile Access.
Users must have the rights to be able to view and modify dashboards.
For more information, see “User Access Rights and User/Group Access
Settings” on page 100.
In Administrator, you can delete or view the properties of
dashboards and create SQL metrics for dashboard indicators. In
Maximizer, you can create and modify dashboards and dashboard
indicators. For information on setting up dashboards and dashboard
indicators, see the Maximizer CRM User’s Guide.
Dashboard Indicators
Indicators display the information in dashboards. Each dashboard
can contain multiple indicators.
You can set up indicators to access information in the Address Books
in the following ways:
•
Searches – Users can link indicators with existing searches in the
search catalog. The indicator reports either the number of
entries returned in the search or a calculation based on fields in
the entries.
•
SQL metrics – In Administrator, you can set up SQL queries that
report on any information in your Address Book. While they are
defined in Administrator, users can add any of these metrics to
dashboard indicators in Maximizer.
Users can choose from a number of indicator controls to display the
data. These controls format your Address Book data in charts, lists,
and gauges.
Chapter 12
Customizing Dashboards
277
SQL Metrics for Indicators
Dashboard indicators display numeric values returned by catalog
searches or by custom SQL queries. You can define your own SQL
metrics in Administrators to display custom data in dashboard
indicators. The SQL metrics consist of custom SQL queries and the
click-through URL for the indicator.
Users can associate indicators with SQL metrics in Maximizer. Users
can also link indicators with catalog searches.
The following sections contain information on setting up SQL metrics
for dashboard indicators:
•
“Queries for SQL Metrics” on page 277
•
“SQL Queries Across Databases” on page 277
•
“Creating or Modifying Custom SQL Metrics” on page 278
•
“Click Through URLs for SQL Metrics” on page 279
Queries for SQL Metrics
A SQL query used in a SQL metric must return a single numeric value
(real). Otherwise, the indicator will display a 0. You must have a good
understanding of SQL syntax and the database structure to create
SQL queries.
SQL queries are run for the current logged in user. A dashboard
indicator using a SQL metric may display different results to different
Maximizer users.
SQL queries must select data from database views, and not from
tables. For example, to query data in AMGR_CSCases_Tbl, you should
write the query for the AMGR_CSCases view.
SQL Queries Across Databases
SQL queries for dashboard indicators are not restricted to the current
Maximizer Address Book database. You can define SQL metrics that
query another database on the same SQL server.
To create a cross-database SQL query, use the following syntax:
Select * from <database name>.<db owner>.<table name>
The following example shows a cross-database SQL query:
Select SUM (Revenue) from Accounting.dbo.Purchases
278
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Requirements for Cross-Database Queries
To successfully use cross-database SQL queries in dashboard
indicators, the following conditions must be met:
•
Database(s) referenced in the SQL query must all reside on the
same SQL Server as the Maximizer Address Book where the
dashboard indicators are being created.
•
The Maximizer user running the SQL queries must be granted
Select access (read access) to the views in database(s) being
queried.
Alternatively, in the Maximizer Address Book, you can create
views that reference an external database and grant users access
to these views. This method may require enabling the “Cross
database ownership chaining” option on the SQL server, which is
not recommended for security reasons.
Creating or Modifying Custom SQL Metrics
Use the procedure below to create a new SQL metric. You can also
follow these instructions to modify an existing SQL metric. Instead of
clicking Add, select the indicator to change and click Properties.
➤ To create a custom SQL metric
 In Administrator, select File > Preferences.
 Click the Dashboard tab.
 Click Add.
 Enter a Name and Description for the SQL metric.
 To link the SQL metric to a report or to a search, enter the clickthrough URL for the metric in the Click Through URL field.
For information on the syntax for Click Through URLs, see “Click
Through URLs for SQL Metrics” on page 279.
 Enter the SQL Query.
 SQL metrics query only values
that the logged in user can
access.
The SQL query must return a single numeric value (real).
Otherwise it displays a 0 in the dashboard.
 Click Test Query to test the SQL query.
Chapter 12
Customizing Dashboards
279
 Click OK to save the new SQL metric.





Click Through URLs for SQL Metrics
You can link SQL metrics to reports that display in SQL Server
Reporting Services or to searches by defining a Click Through URL. If
you link a metric to a report, the report opens in the Reports page
when the indicator is clicked. SQL Server Reporting Services reports
are available only in Maximizer Web Access. If you link a metric to a
search, the entries that the search returns are displayed in Maximizer
Web Access when the indicator is clicked.
Syntax for Click Through URLs to Reports
Click Through URLs to reports use the URL of the report. To get the
URL, open the report from the Reports page, and copy the URL from
the title bar in the web browser.
Syntax for Click Through URLs to Searches
Click Through URLs to searches use the following (all in one line):
http://[web server name]/MaximizerWebAccess/
Redirector.aspx?mdl=Module_Name&ss=Search_
String&cs=Column_Setup
•
Module_Name – Value indicating the module to search. It
can take the following values:
AbEntry – Address Book
Opportunity – Opportunities
CsCase – Customer Service
Campaign – Campaigns
280
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Hotlist – Hotlist tasks
Quota – Quota
•
Search_String – Search string used to retrieve values from
the specified module. For Quota and Hotlist tasks, only the
LIST operator is supported.
For information on search string syntax in Maximizer.Data,
see “Search String Language” on page 390.
•
Column_Setups – The column setup to display for the
entries. If a valid key is not provided, the column setup
remains unchanged from the last time the user was in that
window.
The following examples show search string syntax for different
Maximizer windows.
Examples: Address Book Window
http://[web server name]/MaximizerWebAccess/
Redirector.aspx?mdl=abentry&ss=EQ(OwnerUserId,MASTER)
http://[web server name]/MaximizerWebAccess/
Redirector.aspx?mdl=abentry&ss=OR(EQ(ReadAccessUserId,MASTER),EQ(Own
erUserId,MASTER))
http://[web server name]/MaximizerWebAccess/
Redirector.aspx?mdl=abentry&ss=AND(NEQ(ModifiedByUserId,MASTER),NEQ(
ModifiedByUserId,JNAPOLI))
http://[web server name]/MaximizerWebAccess/
Redirector.aspx?mdl=ABentry&ss=OR(LIKE(city,vanco%),EQ(city,"NEW
YORK"))
http://[web server name]/MaximizerWebAccess/
Redirector.aspx?mdl=ABentry&ss=RANGE(LastModifyDate, "2009-01-01",
"2009-06-30")
http://[web server name]/MaximizerWebAccess/
Redirector.aspx?mdl=ABentry&ss=WNOTE("Hi ","2009-07-07","2009-0707")
Examples: Opportunities Window
http://[web server name]/MaximizerWebAccess/
Redirector.aspx?mdl=opportunity&ss=EQ(CreatorUserId,MASTER)
http://[web server name]/MaximizerWebAccess/
Redirector.aspx?mdl=opportunity&ss=AND(NEQ(ModifiedByUserId,MASTER),N
EQ(ModifiedByUserId,JNAPOLI))
http://[web server name]/MaximizerWebAccess/
Redirector.aspx?mdl=opportunity&ss=AND(NEQ(TeamLeaderUserId,MASTER),
NEQ(TeamLeaderUserId,jnapoli))
Chapter 12
Customizing Dashboards
http://[web server name]/MaximizerWebAccess/
Redirector.aspx?mdl=opportunity&ss=RANGE(CloseDate,"2008-0119","2009-01-19")
Examples: Customer Service Window
http://[web server name]/MaximizerWebAccess/
Redirector.aspx?mdl=cscase&ss=EQ(CaseOwnerUserId,MASTER)
http://[web server name]/MaximizerWebAccess/
Redirector.aspx?mdl=cscase&ss=WNOTE("[search text]","2009-0101","2009-07-07")
http://[web server name]/MaximizerWebAccess/
Redirector.aspx?mdl=cscase&ss=RANGE(DeadlineDate,"2009-01-01","200907-07")
Example: Campaigns Window
http://[web server name]/MaximizerWebAccess/
Redirector.aspx?mdl=campaign&ss=EQ(CreatorUserId,MASTER)
281
282
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
CHAPTER
Managing
Address Book Data
13
In this chapter...
“Backing Up and Restoring Address Book Data” on page 284
“Converting Embedded Documents to Linked Documents” on page 285
“Verifying and Recovering Address Book Data” on page 287
“Importing Address Book Data from MXI or XML Files” on page 290
“Importing Data from Other File Formats” on page 293
“Moving an Address Book to a Different Server” on page 313
“Purging Outdated Notes and Documents” on page 328
“Using Log Files for Diagnosis” on page 330
“System Reports” on page 332
13
284
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Backing Up and Restoring Address Book Data
This section explains how to back up Maximizer Address Book
database files, which contain the majority of your Maximizer data,
including Address Book entries, opportunities, customer service
cases, campaigns, etc. However, if your Address Book uses a custom
dictionary or holidays, you must back up those files separately.
The following sections contain information on backing up Address
Book data in Maximizer:
•
“Backing Up and Restoring an Address Book” on page 284
•
“Backing Up the Dictionary File” on page 284
Backing Up and Restoring an Address Book
Back up your Address Book on a regular basis. If a problem occurs
and you have to restore your data, you will have to re-enter all of the
information since the last backup. While one backup copy is often
enough, you may want to keep two or three copies on a rotating
basis. You can store your backup files on a network or on removable
media such as a backup tape. You may want to have one backup at
an off-site location.
Because a Maximizer Address Book resides on a SQL Server, you use
Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio or SQL Server Enterprise
Manager to create a backup and restore your Address Book data. See
your SQL Server documentation for more information.
Backing Up the Dictionary File
The Maximizer dictionary file is not backed up as part of the Address
Book backup procedure described previously. Therefore, if you have
customized the dictionary, you need to back up that file separately,
especially before upgrading or re-installing Maximizer.
To back up the dictionary file, copy it from the following location
and paste it to another location, preferably the same location where
your Address Book is backed up.
 By default, the Maximizer
program folder is C:\Program
Files\Maximizer. If Maximizer
was installed in a different
folder, then change the path
accordingly.
User Dictionary File Location:
...\Program Files\Maximizer\MaData6\Userdict.lex
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
285
Converting Embedded Documents to Linked Documents
Maximizer has a built-in utility in Administrator for converting
embedded documents to linked documents. This allows you to
manage the size of your Address Book.
 Note that a converted Address
Book size cannot exceed 10
GB.
Converting embedded documents to linked documents causes the
documents to be unavailable to Web Access, Mobile Access, Partner
Access, and Customer Access users.
If necessary, you can move your linked documents from one location
to another.
➤ To convert embedded documents to linked
documents
 In Administrator, select File > Document Administration >
Convert Embedded Documents.
 Select the Convert embedded documents checkbox.
 Specify the document size and age limits. If these values are left
as zeros, all embedded documents regardless of size/age are
converted to linked documents.
 Optionally, select the Shrink database when completed
checkbox. This reduces the size of the Address Book once the
conversion is complete. If you haven’t chosen to convert your
embedded documents, this reduces the size of the Address Book
by removing any unused space.
 Specify the folder in which linked documents will be stored in
the Link Folder field.
You should use the full UNC path as the location. For example,
enter \\[computer name]\Linked Documents\. To ensure the
286
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
correct UNC path is used, browse to computer and folder where
the linked documents are to be stored.
 Click the Recalculate button after revising the conversion
settings to estimate the size of the Address Book with the
revised settings.
➤ To modify the location of linked documents
 In Administrator, select File > Document Administration >
Move Linked Documents.
 Specify the folder where the linked documents were previously
stored in the From folder.
 Specify the new folder where the linked documents will be
stored in the To folder.
You should use the full UNC path for both folders.
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
287
Verifying and Recovering Address Book Data
 You can verify and recover only
one Address Book at a time.
Address Book verification enables you to quickly identify and resolve
invalid and orphan items in your Address Book. You should always
run Address Book verification and recovery after upgrading or
restoring an Address Book. Also, if database views have not been
created for any user-defined fields and are needed for generating
reports, use Address Book verification and recovery to create the
missing database views.
Address Book verification and recovery identifies the following
Address Book items.
Address Book Item
Description
Orphan Contacts
Contacts that are not associated with a
Company record.
Orphan alternate
addresses
Addresses that are not associated with an
Address Book record.
Orphan notes
Notes that are not associated with an Address
Book entry, campaign, customer service case, or
opportunity.
Opportunity records
with invalid
Start_Date field
value
Opportunities whose start date does not match
the earliest Sales Step start date (applies only to
opportunities with an assigned strategy).
Notes with
undefined Entity
Type
Notes that do not have an entity type value
(Address Book entry, opportunity, campaign,
customer service case, or user) assigned to the
record.
Orphan Link Records Opportunities that do not have a related
Address Book entry.
Broken Company
Library links
Company Library links that try to connect to a
missing document (link exists but the document
is missing).
Orphan Company
Library links
Company Library links that link to a missing
Company Library folder (document exists, link
exists, but the Company Library folder is
missing).
Orphan Company
Library documents
Company Library documents not listed in the
Company Library folders (document exists but
the link is missing).
Misplaced
Document records
Documents whose Owner field contains an
incorrect value.
288
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 To see recovered entries, you
must log in as MASTER or have
rights to open other users’
entries.
Address Book Item
Description
User-defined fields
that do not have
associated database
Views
User-defined fields for which a database view
has not been created.
Invalid Table UDF
Item records
Table user-defined field items that have the
wrong type (Company, Individual, Contact, etc.).
Invalid/orphan Table
UDF values
Table user-defined field values that reference
non-existent table items.
When you choose to recover the Address Book, Maximizer transfers
recovered Address Book entries into a single entry called “Recovered
on [date of recovery]”, and it transfers recovered Company Library
documents into a single folder called “Recovered on [date of
recovery]”. You can then view the recovered entries and either
delete or move them as needed.
➤ To verify an Address Book
 In Administrator open the Address Book.
 Select File > Address Book Verification.
 Choose either the Verify Only or Verify and Recover option,
and click OK.
 If you select Verify Only and
Maximizer detects invalid
records, it prompts you to
recover them.
Maximizer runs the Address Book verification process, as well as
the recovery process if you selected the second option. When it is
complete, you see the Address Book Verification and Recovery
Information dialog box, which contains a summary of each
verification performed and the results of the verification.
 If you selected the Verify and Recover option, open the
Address Book in Maximizer, and view the Recovered on [date]
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
289
Address Book entry. You can then delete or move the recovered
entries.
290
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Importing Address Book Data from MXI or XML Files
You can use Administrator to import Address Book entries, customer
service cases, knowledge base articles, and other data from MXI
(Maximizer XML Interface) or XML Files. These MXI and XML files
may have been created by exporting from a previous version of
Maximizer or by exporting the information from another source and
converting it to XML using the Maximizer XML schema. For more
information about the Maximizer XML Schema, refer to “” on
page 371.
After importing Address Book entries into Maximizer, a list of
imported Address Book entries is stored in a favorite list named
according to the file format and import date and time.
The following sections contain additional information on importing
data from MXI and XML files:
•
“Importing MXI or XML Files Using Advanced Import” on
page 290
•
“Unattended Import of MXI or XML Files” on page 292
Importing MXI or XML Files Using Advanced Import
For more control over importing MXI files, or to import XML files, use
the Advanced Import method described below, which enables you to
specify a number of preferences about how to import the file.
Note that customer service cases are always imported as separate
records and are never merged with existing cases. Formula userdefined fields are imported as formulas as values.
➤ To import from an MXI or XML file
 Always back up the Address
Book before importing.
 In Administrator, select File > Import > Advanced Import.
 For the File name field, click Browse and locate the .XML or
.MXI file to import.
Once you have selected the file to import, Maximizer fills in the
Log File field automatically.
 To change the default Log File, click Browse and provide an
alternate log file location and/or name.
 Select a Log Level from the drop-down list.
 Specify any additional import options in the other group boxes,
or just use the default values.
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
 Click OK to begin the import.





Maximizer imports the data and then displays the number of
records inserted, updated, and failed for each record type.
 Click OK to close the message box.
291
292
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Unattended Import of MXI or XML Files
 To import an MXI or XML file
using OLE automation, refer to
the ImportXMLFile function
documentation in the
Customization Suite
documentation.
An alternative to Advanced Import is an unattended import, which
you can initiate by double-clicking the MXI or XML file or by passing
parameters to the Maxwin executable (MaxWin.exe) through a
command-line interface. When using unattended import, you may
choose to specify some of the import preferences within the MXI or
XML file itself. For more information about MXI and XML files, refer
to “” on page 371.
Importing MXI or XML Files by Double-Clicking
➤ To import an MXI or XML file by double-clicking
 Locate the MXI file on the computer.
 Double-click the file.
 Select the Address Book to import into, and click Open.
 Enter your User ID and Password in the Login dialog box, and
click OK.
Maximizer imports the data, and then displays a message
identifying the number of records inserted, updated, and failed
for each record type.
 Click OK.
Maximizer displays a message with the name of the Favorite List,
which lists the imported Address Book entries.
 Click OK to view the Favorite List.
Importing MXI or XML Files from the Command Line
To import an MXI or XML file from a command line, call Maxwin.exe
with the following command-line syntax:
 The command-line syntax
Maxwin.exe /DATABASE "EsconaTutorial" /USERID "JNAPOLI"
/PASSWORD "maximizer" /FILE="d:\ABentries051013.mxi"
shown here uses sample
parameter values.
Keep the following points in mind:
•
Only one space is allowed after the DATABASE, USERID, and
PASSWORD keywords.
•
Values must be surrounded by double quotation marks.
•
The equal sign (=) after the FILE keywords must NOT have space
before or after it.
•
The FILE parameter must be the last parameter.
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
293
Importing Data from Other File Formats
You can use Administrator to import Address Book information from
other sources, such as ACT!, GoldMine, or Outlook.
After importing Address Book entries into Maximizer, a list of
imported Address Book entries is stored in a favorite list named
according to the file format and import date and time.
Administrator provides the following methods of importing data.
The best import method depends on the type of data you are
importing.
•
Address Book Entries: This method imports entries from a CSV
(comma-separated values) or tab-delimited text file that is
created when you export from Maximizer or another
application. Outlook, for example, can export its address book to
a text file. When you import from a text file, you must choose to
import all the entries as Companies/Individuals or as Contacts, or
you can do a two-tier import to import Companies/Individuals
first and then import the associated Contacts. For more
information, refer to “Two-Tier Import” on page 295.
•
ACT! or GoldMine Database: Importing an ACT! or GoldMine
database is straightforward because Maximizer can detect the
ACT! or GoldMine database version and map the fields
automatically. Refer to “Importing Data from ACT! and
GoldMine” on page 301.
•
Other Contact Manager Database: This option enables you to
import a variety of data file formats, including Organizer,
Clipper, dBASE, FoxBase, and FoxPro, among others. For more
information, refer to “Importing from Other Contact Managers”
on page 298.
294
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Use the following table to determine which import method to use.
File Type
Import Method(s)
(File > Import > ...)
ACT! 1.x, 2.x, 3.x, 4.x, 2000, 6.x
(*.dbf)
ACT! 6.0 or 2004 or earlier
ACT! 2005–2012 or ACT! Premium
for Workgroups 2005–2012
ACT! 2005–2012 and ACT!
Premium for Workgroups 2005–
2012
GoldMine 2.x, 3.x, 4.x, 5.x, 6.x
(*.dbf)
GoldMine 6.7 or earlier
GoldMine 6.7 Corporate Edition
(MSSQL)
GoldMine 6.7 Corporate Edition
or earlier
GoldMine 8.x Premium Edition
(Firebird SQL, MSSQL)
GoldMine Premium Edition 8.x
Organizer 1.x (*.org)
Other Contact Manager Database
Delimited (*.txt, *.prn)
Other Contact Manager Database
Comma Delimited (*.csv)
Tab Delimited (*.txt)
Address Book Entries
Clipper Summer '87 (*.dbf)
Other Contact Manager Database
Clipper 5.x (*.dbf)
Other Contact Manager Database
dBase III, III+, IV (*.dbf)
Address Book Entries
dBase V (*.dbf)
Other Contact Manager Database
Visual dBase 5.x (*.dbf)
Other Contact Manager Database
FoxBase/FoxBASE+ (*.dbf)
Other Contact Manager Database
FoxPro 1.x, 2.x (*.dbf)
Other Contact Manager Database
Visual FoxPro 3.x (*.dbf)
Other Contact Manager Database
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
295
Field Mapping
 When you import from a
recognized database type,
such as GoldMine or ACT!,
Maximizer automatically maps
the fields for you.
When importing some types of data files, you need to map (create an
association between) the fields in the source file and the fields in
Maximizer. Keep in mind that different applications name their fields
differently. For example, the field for a company name is called
“Company” in Outlook and “Company or Individual” in Maximizer.
When you are importing a file type that requires you to map fields
Field Mapping dialog box opens where you can map Maximizer fields
to fields in the source file. For each field in the source file, select one
of the available Maximizer fields, and click Add to map the fields.
Select a corresponding Maximizer field for every field in the source
file. If there is no corresponding field, select <Skip Field> from the list
of Maximizer fields. When you have finished mapping the fields, the
Order of Import (middle column) displays the corresponding
Maximizer field beside each field in the Fields from File column.
Two-Tier Import
 If you import a Company
record, and an existing
Company record in the
database has an identical
“Company” field, then the
records are considered
duplicates, and Maximizer will
not import the duplicate
Company record. However,
Maximizer will import
duplicate Individual and
Contact records.
Many contact management programs keep two types of address
book entries:
•
Companies
•
Contacts for Companies
Maximizer keeps its Address Book entries organized in a similar way:
•
Companies/Individuals
•
Contacts (associated with a Company or Individual)
The Import Address Book Entries function enables you to perform a
two-tier import. In a two-tier import, you first import Company
entries as Companies/Individuals Address Book entries, and then you
import the people as Contacts.
296
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Two-tier importing is only applicable to comma-separated value files,
tab-delimited files, dBase III, III+, or IV, or XML files using the File >
Import > Address Book Entries command.
➤ To import Address Book entries (two-tier import)
 Always back up the Address
Book before importing.
 From the File menu, select Import > Address Book Entries.
The Import Address Book Entries dialog box opens.
 User-defined fields containing
more than one available item
are not supported in a CSV
(comma-separated values)
import. Use the Advanced
Import feature or MTI
(Maximizer Transfer Interface)
as an alternative.
 Click Browse and locate the file to import.
 Select the Companies / Individuals option to import all records
in the source file as Company or Individual Address Book entries.
(After you complete this procedure, repeat it a second time to
import the Contacts. If you choose not to do a two-tier import,
just select either Companies / Individuals or Contacts.)
 In the Lead handling box, select the appropriate option for
importing records as lead or non-lead Address Book entries.
 Click OK.




The Select Fields for Import dialog box opens.
 In the Available Maximizer fields column, select the field that
best corresponds to the first field in the Fields from file
<filename> column, and click Add.
Repeat this step until you have mapped all the fields from the
source file to Maximizer fields.
 To exclude a field from being
imported into Maximizer, add
<Skip Field> to the middle
column for that field position.
For example, if the first field in the right column is First Name,
select First Name from the Available Maximizer fields.
For fields that contain more than one value such as non-single
valued table user-defined fields, and full/read access fields, each
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
297
value must be its own column in the file and the same field must
be mapped to each of those items.
The fields listed in the Available Maximizer Fields column is
slightly different, depending on whether you selected
Companies / Individuals or Contacts as the Type of Import in
step 3.
 To convert text that is in capital letters (uppercase) into mixed
case, select the Convert to name case checkbox.
 Many comma-delimited data files use the first line as a column
header. To exclude the first line from being imported, select the
Do not import first record; it is a header checkbox.
 You can save the field
mapping for reuse by clicking
the Catalog button.
 Click Import.




The data from the source file now imports into Maximizer.
Repeat this procedure a second time to import the second tier,
except select Contacts instead of Companies / Individuals as
the Type of Import in step 3.
298
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Importing from Other Contact Managers
The instructions below describe importing data from a contact
manager other than ACT! or GoldMine. For information about
importing from ACT! or GoldMine, refer to “Importing Data from
ACT! and GoldMine” on page 301.
➤ To Import Contacts from another type of contact
management database
 Always back up the Address
Book before importing.
 Select File > Import > Other Contact Manager Database.
The Import Databases dialog box opens.
 From the List files of type drop-down list, select the file format
of the database you are importing.
 Locate the file you are importing. If the file is a network file, click
the Network button or use the Drives drop-down list to access
the network drive.
 In the Import Options group box, select the options you want
to include. Depending on the type of database you are
importing, some of these options may not be available.
 If you are importing a character delimited text file, you must
specify a Date Format.
To do so, click the Date Format button, select the date format
used in the source file, and click OK.
 If you are importing a .txt or .prn file, you must also specify the
character used as the field Delimiter in the import file.
Click the Delimiter button, select the delimiter type, and click
OK.
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
299
 In the Duplicate handling group box, select one of the options
to specify what Maximizer should do when it encounters
duplicate Address Book entries, and click OK.






The Select Fields for Import dialog box opens.
 In the Contact fields or Address Book entries fields lists,
select the field that best corresponds to the first field in the
Fields from file <filename> column, and click Add. Repeat
this step until you have mapped all the fields from the source file
to Maximizer fields.
 To exclude a field from being
imported into Maximizer, add
<Skip Field> to the middle
column for that field position.
For example, if the first field in the right column is First Name,
select First Name from the Contact fields or Address Book entries
fields list.
Use Contact fields to create Contacts for Companies or
Individuals.
Use Address Book entries fields to create Company or
Individual Address Book entries.
300
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 Click Import to begin the import process.


Once Maximizer imports the data from the import file, the
Conversion Completed or Import Completed message box
displays the number of fields read, imported, skipped, failed,
merged and the number of records with associated import
warnings.
The Error Log appears next displaying the location of the import
error message file. If you want to view this file, make a note of
where it is located. Unless the import utility reports that all
records were imported successfully, carefully review the
ERRORLOG.TXT file to identify and resolve import problems.
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
301
Importing Data from ACT! and GoldMine
 Duplicate Contacts are created
on the second Import of the
same ACT! or GoldMine
database.
This section describes the procedure for importing data from ACT! or
GoldMine, as well as the field mapping for data imported into
Maximizer.
Importing Contacts from ACT! 6.0, 2004, or Earlier, or from GoldMine 6.5 or Earlier
➤ To import contacts from ACT! 6.0, 2004, or earlier, or
from GoldMine 6.5 or earlier
 Always back up your
Maximizer Address Book
before importing data.
 From the File menu, select Import > ACT! 6.0 or 2004 or
earlier.
– or –
Select Import > GoldMine 6.5 or earlier.
 When importing GoldMine
Contacts, GoldMine must be
installed on the same machine
as Maximizer; the Borland
database engine is required
during the import.
The Import Databases dialog box opens. The file type is selected
for you automatically.
 Locate the file you are importing. If the file is a network file, click
the Network button or use the Drives field drop-down list to
access the folder.
 In the Import Options group box, select the Log Errors to File
checkbox if you want to log any errors that occur during the
import process to a text file.
All other options in the Import Options group box are handled
automatically by Maximizer.
 Specify how you want duplicate records handled, and click OK.
If duplicate records are found in the data, the option you select
here determines whether or not duplicate records are combined.
They will be added to the Address Book.
Maximizer requires that each Address Book entry be assigned a
unique Address Book entry ID. If the import record contains an
Address Book entry ID that is the same as an existing Maximizer
Address Book entry or Contact, the Address Book entry ID of the
imported entry is automatically changed when that entry is
added to Maximizer and this action is recorded in the import
error message file.
302
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 Click OK to begin the Import process.




During the import process, a status indicator appears on the
screen. Click Cancel if you want to halt the import process.
 The Errorlog.txt file appears in
the same folder as the import
file. Unless the import utility
reports that all records were
imported successfully, carefully
review the ERRORLOG.TXT file
to identify and resolve import
problems.
 Once the data is imported, the Conversion Completed or Import
Completed message box displays the number of fields read,
imported, skipped, failed, or merged, and the number of records
with associated import warnings. Click OK to close the message
box.
Importing from ACT! 2005–2012 or ACT! Premium for Workgroups 2005–2012
There are two methods of importing from an ACT! 2005–2012
database. The first method explains how to import from ACT! when
both ACT! and Administrator are installed on the same machine. The
second method explains how to import from ACT! when ACT! and
Administrator are on separate machines.
➤ To import from ACT! 2005–2012 or ACT! Premium
for Workgroups 2005–2012 – Primary Method
 Make sure you are logged into Windows as an administrator on
the SQL Server machine. Also ensure no users are logged into the
ACT! database.
 In Administrator, log into the Address Book where you want to
import the ACT! database.
 In Administrator, select File > Import > ACT! 2005-2012 and
ACT! Premium for Workgroups 2005-2012.
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
303
The Reattaching ACT! databases process may take several
minutes.
 Select the ACT! database to import from the drop-down list, and
click OK.
Maximizer imports the database. When the import is complete,
it displays the Import Statistics dialog box.
 Click OK to close the dialog box.
The import is complete.
➤ To import from ACT! 2005–2012 or ACT! Premium
for Workgroups 2005–2012 – Secondary Method
 Always back up your
Maximizer Address Book
before importing data.
 Back up your ACT! database in ACT!.
The Backup is typically saved to C:\Documents and Settings\<User
Name>\My Documents\ACT\ACT for Win 7\Databases\
 In the Backup folder, there should be a zip file. Open this zip file
and extract the .BAK file that contains the name of your ACT!
database in the filename.
 The extracted file is a SQL backup. Restore this backup to a
normal SQL 2005 (or later) server.
See your SQL Server documentation for details on how to restore
backups.
 Once the backup is restored, create a DSN to point to the
database on the SQL Server. For instructions on creating a DSN,
refer to the procedure below.
 Start Administrator.
 Open the Address Book to import the data into.
 Select File > Import > ACT! 2005-2012 and ACT! Premium
for Workgroups 2005-2012.
 Click OK on the message box.
 Click the Machine Data Source tab, select the DSN you created
in step 4, and click OK.
You will be prompted for your sa password.
Enter the sa password, and click OK.
Maximizer begins importing the data.
304
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
➤ To create a DSN to point to the database on the SQL
Server
 Open Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Data Sources
(ODBC).
 Click the System DSN tab, and click the Add button.
 Select SQL Server, and click Finish.
 Give a meaningful name and description, select the SQL server
where you placed the restored backup, and click Next.
 Select the With SQL Server authentication option, fill in the
Login ID as sa, enter the sa password, and click Next.
 Select Change the default database to, select the restored
ACT! database from the drop-down list, and click Next.
 Click Finish.
 Click the Test Data Source button to make sure the DSN was
configured correctly.
 Click OK and then OK again to save the DSN.
Importing from GoldMine 6.7 Corporate Edition (or Earlier) SQL Databases
➤ To import from a GoldMine 6.7 Corporate Edition
(or earlier) SQL database
 Always back up your
Maximizer Address Book
before importing data.
 Start Administrator.
 Select File > Import > GoldMine 6.7 Corporate Edition or
earlier.
 Click OK on the message box.
 Click the Machine Data Source tab, select the GoldMine DSN,
and click OK.
You will be prompted for your sa password.
 Enter the sa password, and click OK.
Maximizer begins importing the data.
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
305
Importing from GoldMine 8.x Premium Edition SQL Databases
Maximizer supports importing data from GoldMine 8.x Premium
Edition with MSSQL or Firebird SQL.
➤ To import from a GoldMine 8.x Premium Edition SQL
database
 Always back up your
Maximizer Address Book
before importing data.
 If you are importing from GoldMine 8.x with Firebird SQL,
convert the Firebird SQL database to MSSQL. You can convert
the database in GoldMine 8.02 or later. (In GoldMine, select
Tools > Database > New Databases.) For more information,
see the GoldMine documentation.
 In Administrator, select File > Import > GoldMine Premium
Edition 8.x.
 Click OK in the message box.
 Click the Machine Data Source tab, and select GoldMine DSN.
Click OK.
You will be prompted for your sa password.
 Enter the sa password, and click OK.
Maximizer begins importing the data.
Setting User Passwords and Properties After Import
Note that if a user name contains spaces, the spaces are replaced
with underscores, and the user names are shortened to 9 characters if
necessary. After importing data, synchronize user passwords before
imported users can log into Maximizer.
➤ To synchronize user passwords after import
 In Administrator, select Utilities > System Configurations.
 Click the Synchronize button. When synchronization is
complete, all user passwords are “maximizer”.
➤ To set user passwords, preferences, and properties
after import
 In Administrator, select File > Manage Users.
 Select the Maximizer user, and click Administer User.
The Administer User dialog box opens.
306
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 In the Administer User dialog box, set the user properties,
preferences, password, and other settings.
For more information on these settings, see “User
Administration” on page 96.
ACT! Data Conversion
The following table describes field mapping between ACT! and
Maximizer. Before importing data into Maximizer, export the data
from ACT! to a DBF file and use the DBF file for the import.
ACT! 2000 (5.0), 6.0,
or 2004–2012
Maximizer
Imported?
Company
Company
Yes
Contact
First Name & Last
Name
Yes
Title
Position
Yes
Department
Department,
Position
Yes
In Maximizer, Department is populated
with the Department information of the
first Contact and the rest in the Position
field separated by comma.
Phone
Phone 1
Yes
Adds “Business” to the Phone Description
field in Maximizer.
Fax
Phone 2
Yes
Adds FAX to Extension field in Maximizer.
Toll-Free
Phone 3
Yes
Adds “Toll-Free” to the Phone Description
field in Maximizer.
Mobile
Phone 4
Yes
Adds CELL to Extension field in Maximizer.
Alt Phone
Ticker
Comments
ACT! Contacts are imported as Contacts in
Maximizer and the basic information about
each Contact such as email address are
imported into the Basic Info tab in the
Address Book entry dialog box. If any of the
information associated with the Contact
cannot be mapped to a Maximizer field in
this tab, the information is imported as
user-defined fields. In ACT!, First and Last
Name belong to the same single field. The
correct names may not be properly
imported into Maximizer. For example, a
Contact ‘Toni Spooner (female)’ in ACT! is
imported into Maximizer as “Toni
Spooner” in the First name field and
“(female)” in the Last name field.
No
UDF Ticker Symbol
Yes
Adds UDF to Company.
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
307
ACT! 2000 (5.0), 6.0,
or 2004–2012
Maximizer
Imported?
ID/Status
Category
Yes
Address
Address
Yes
Address
Division
City
City/Town
Yes
Imported correctly to main and alternate
addresses.
State
St/Co/Prov
Yes
Imported correctly to main and alternate
addresses.
Zip
Zip/Postcode
Yes
Imported correctly to main and alternate
addresses.
Country
Country
Yes
Imported correctly to main and alternate
addresses.
Salutation
Salutation
Yes
Referred By
UDF Referred By
Yes
Adds UDF to Company.
Web Site
Website
Yes
Imported into the Company’s website field.
E-mail Address
Email
Yes
Imported into the Contact’s email field.
Last Result
Creates Table UDF
named “Result”
Yes
Adds Company Table UDF with
corresponding items selected for each
Contact.
No
Asst. Title
No
Asst. Phone
No
Creates UDFs for
Contacts and
Companies with the
same name as in the
source database
First address line in ACT! is imported as
Address 1 in Maximizer. Second line goes to
Address 2. Address comes from one of the
Contacts for this Company and if there is no
address, it may end up empty. Alternate
addresses are added to Maximizer from
different Contacts of the Company and
alternate addresses are named by that
Contact. The same address is not added but
renamed by the other Contact. For some
Contacts, the appropriate alternate address
may not be selected.
Division in Maximizer may be populated by
the address line in ACT!.
Assistant
User fields for
Contacts and
Companies
(ACT! 2005–2012 &
ACT! 2005–2012
Premium only)
Comments
Yes
These fields can be renamed and can be
changed to different field types. Any fields
that are of MEMO type or are more than
120 Characters are converted to Notes in
Maximizer.
308
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
ACT! 2000 (5.0), 6.0,
or 2004–2012
Maximizer
Imported?
Comments
User 1...User 15
(ACT! 2000 (5.0), 6.0,
or 2004 only)
Creates UDFs named
“Details Field 1”…
“Details Field 15”
Yes
Adds UDFs to Company. Some UDFs that
belong to some different Contacts in ACT!
may be lost.
Users
Users
Yes
ACT! users are imported into Maximizer as
users. Passwords are set to “maximizer” if
the import was done using a DBF file. Users
are displayed in the Administrator’s
Manage Users dialog box which may be
accessed by selecting File > Manage Users.
If a user name contains spaces, the spaces
are replaced with underscores, and the user
names are shortened to 9 characters if
necessary.
Password synchronization from Utilities >
System Configurations menu is necessary
before any imported user is able to log into
Maximizer. Passwords are then set to
“maximizer”.
Notes
Notes
Yes
Schedule Call
Schedule To-do
Schedule
Appointment
Schedule Personal
Activitiy
Hotlist Task
Yes
The Company name of some conflicting
tasks may not be preserved.
The Duration information in ACT! is not
imported to Maximizer.
Schedule Meeting
Appointments
Yes
Recurring appointments are not imported.
Notes Attachments
Notes Attachments
No
Document
Document
No
Groups
Groups
No
Sales/
Opportunities
Opportunities
No
History
(ACT! 2005-2012 &
ACT! 2005-2012
Premium only)
Notes
Yes
Each entry from the History tab in ACT!
becomes a Note in Maximizer.
GoldMine Data Conversion
The following table describes field mapping between GoldMine and
Maximizer.
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
309
Note that Action, Call, and Appointment notes in GoldMine 6.x and
8.x may be in HTML format. When you import these notes into
Maximizer, they contain HTML tags.
GoldMine 5.x,
6.x, & 8.x
Maximizer
Imported? Comments
Company
Company
Yes
Contact
First Name Initial
Last Name
First Name Initial
Last Name
Title
Position
Yes
Dept
Dept.
Yes
In Maximizer, Dept. is populated with the
department of the main Company’s Contact.
Asst
Assistant (UDF)
Yes
Adds UDF to Contact record.
Source
Contact type (UDF)
Yes
Adds UDF to Contact record.
Address
Address1 & Address2 Yes
Address from the main Contact becomes the
main Company address. The first line in the
Address field from GoldMine goes to Address1
in Maximizer. The second line goes to
Address2. The third line from GoldMine is NOT
imported.
Alternate Addresses in Maximizer are created
from the addresses of the Contact from the
Contacts tab in GoldMine. Appropriate
Alternate Addresses are selected for imported
Contacts.
City
City/ Town
Yes
Imported correctly to main and alternate
addresses.
State
St/Co/Prov
Yes
Imported correctly to main and alternate
addresses.
Zip
Zip
Yes
Imported correctly to main and alternate
addresses.
Country
Country
Yes
Imported correctly to main and alternate
addresses.
Phone 1-3
Phone 1-3
Yes
Appropriate extensions are imported.
Fax
Phone 4
Yes
Adds FAX to Extension field in Maximizer.
E-mail
Email
Yes
Email address of the main Contact is imported.
Email addresses of Contacts from the Contacts
tab in GoldMine are also imported.
Web Site
Website
Yes
Imported to main Contact record.
Contact Type
Contact Type
Yes
Adds UDF to Contact record.
Yes
GoldMine’s Contact field contains (First Name)
(Initial) (Last Name) separated by spaces. In
Maximizer, appropriate fields are populated
accordingly.
310
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
GoldMine 5.x,
6.x, & 8.x
Maximizer
Imported? Comments
Business
Business
Yes
Adds UDF to Contact record.
Interest
Interest
Yes
Adds UDF to Contact record.
Accnt Mngr
Accnt Mngr
Yes
Adds UDF to Contact record.
Open
Open
Yes
Adds UDF to Contact record.
Summary
Note
Yes
A note containing details from the Summary
tab is created for the Company.
Role
Status
Account Type
Account Size
No. of Users
Key Interest
Competitor
Platform
User role
Purchase Status
Account Type
Account Size
Users
Key Interest
Competitor
Platform
Yes
Appropriate UDFs are created in Maximizer
and populated with proper values.
Notes
Note
Yes
A note is created for the Contact in Maximizer
and contains all the notes from the Notes tab in
GoldMine.
Documents
Document
No
Users
Users
Yes
GoldMine’s users are imported into Maximizer
as users. Users are displayed in the
Administrator’s Manage Users dialog box,
which is accessible through the
File > Manage Users menu.
If spaces are included in a user name, the
spaces are replaced with underscores, and the
user names are shortened to 9 characters if
necessary.
After import, users’ Windows Access, Web
Access, and Mobile Access are disabled in
Maximizer and must be enabled by the
administrator.
Password synchronization from Utilities menu >
System Configurations is necessary before any
imported user is able to log into Maximizer.
Passwords are then set to “maximizer”.
Details
Notes
Yes
For every detail, a note is created. Details are
referred to as Profiles in the notes.
Pending
Hotlist Task
Yes
Each entry from the Pending tab in GoldMine is
imported as Hotlist task in Maximizer.
Calendar
Hotlist Tasks
Yes
Calls and Activities from GoldMine’s Calendar
are imported as Hotlist tasks in Maximizer.
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
GoldMine 5.x,
6.x, & 8.x
Maximizer
Imported? Comments
Referrals
Notes
Yes
A note is created for every Referral. Referrals
are called References.
History
Notes
Yes
Each entry from the History tab in GoldMine
becomes a Note in Maximizer.
Members
No
Tracks
No
Links
No
Opptys
No
Projects
No
Partner
Notes
Yes
Limited information is imported.
Email text (email)
Documents
Yes
Imports email as documents in the Documents
window. This feature is supported for
GoldMine 8 only.
Field Mapping for Outlook
The following table describes the field mapping that is used in
Outlook Synchronization.
Microsoft Outlook
Maximizer
Appointments
Subject
Subject
Start and End time date
Date
Start time
Start time
End time
End time
Reminder
Alarm time
Toggle alarm
Toggle alarm
Importance
Priority
Private
Private
Location
Location
Note (text box)
Note (text box)
Tasks
Due date
Date
311
312
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Microsoft Outlook
Maximizer
Alarm time
Time
Subject
Activity
End time
End time
Reminder set
Alarm set
Priority
Priority
Private
Private
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
313
Moving an Address Book to a Different Server
This section explains how to move a Maximizer Address Book from
one SQL Server computer to another. These instructions assume you
already have knowledge in administering SQL Server. These
instructions are written for SQL Server 2005. The instructions are
similar for other versions of SQL Server.
The following sections describe how to move an Address Book to a
different server:
•
“Step 1: Back Up the Address Book” on page 313
•
“Step 2: Restore the Address Book on the New Server” on
page 316
•
“Step 3: Create the MaConfig Table” on page 321
•
“Step 4: Connect to the Address Book in Administrator” on
page 322
•
“Step 5: Delete Existing Users from the Address Book” on
page 323
•
“Step 6: Grant the MASTER User Access to the Database” on
page 326
•
“Step 7: Synchronize Maximizer Users with SQL Server” on
page 327
•
“Step 8: Apply Maximizer Licenses” on page 327
Step 1: Back Up the Address Book
➤ To back up the database on the source server using
SQL Server Management Studio
 Start SQL Server Management Studio (Start > Programs >
Microsoft SQL Server 2005 > SQL Server Management
Studio) on the source server.
 Navigate to the Databases folder:
 Right-click the Maximizer database to move, and select Tasks >
Back Up from the shortcut menu.
 The Maximizer database has
the same name as your
Address Book.
The Back Up Database dialog box opens.
 In the Backup type drop-down box, select Full.
 In the Backup component area, select Database.
314
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 Click Remove until the Destination box is cleared. Then, click
Add.



The Select Backup Destination dialog box opens.
 Leave the File name option selected and click the ellipsis.

The Locate Database Files dialog box opens
 Use the default location, or browse to an alternate location to
save the backup file.
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
315
 Enter a File name for the backup file, and click OK.


Click OK to close the Select Backup Destination dialog box.
Click Options.
Select the Back up to the existing media set option, then
select the Overwrite all existing backup sets option.
316
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Click OK.



The backup process begins.
Step 2: Restore the Address Book on the New Server
➤ To restore the database to the destination server
using SQL Server Management Studio
 Copy the backup file from the source server to the destination
server.
 Start SQL Server Management Studio (Start > Programs >
Microsoft SQL Server 2005 > SQL Server Management
Studio) on the destination server.
 Navigate to the Databases folder:
 Right-click the Databases folder and select New Database.
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
317
 Enter the Name of the database, and click OK.
The database can use the same name as the Address Book on the
source server, or it can use a different name. The extra step for
changing the database name is explained in step 15.


 Right-click the new database and select Tasks > Restore >
Database.
The Restore Database dialog box opens.
318
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 Select the From device option, and click the ellipsis button.


The Specify Backup dialog box opens.
 Click Add.

The Locate Backup File dialog box opens.
 Browse to the folder where you saved the backup and select the
file. If necessary, select All Files in the Files of type drop-down
list.
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
Click OK.



Click OK to close the Specify Backup dialog box.
The backup file is added to the list of backup sets.
319
320
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Select the checkbox beside the name of the new backup file.

Click Options.
Select the Overwrite the existing database option.
NOTE: SQL Server databases consist of a primary data file and a
transaction log file. For example, if a database is named
“Maximizer”, the data file will be named Maximizer_Data.MDF.
This file contains the startup information and data for the
database. The corresponding log file will be named
“Maximizer_Log.LDF”. This file logs all transaction information
since the last backup and is used to recover the database. There
must be at least one log file for each database.
It is strongly recommended that the transaction log be stored on
a separate drive from the primary data file.
If the database from the source server and the database on
the destination server have the same name and have been
installed in the same physical path, skip to the next step.
– or –
If the name of the new database is different from the original,
change the database name in the Restore As fields:
•
OriginalName_Data.mdf to NewName_Data.mdf
•
OriginalName_Log.mdf to NewName_Log.ldf
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
 Do not change the original file
names.
321
Example:
If the name of the Address Book on your old server was
“EsconaTutorial”, the “Restore As” column shows as
[BackupFileLocation]\EsconaTutorial_Data.MDF for the primary
data file and [BackupFileLocation]\EsconaTutorial_Log.LDF for
the transaction log file. If you renamed the database to
“EsconaBackup” on your new server, then the “Restore As”
column must be changed to
[BackupFileLocation]EsconaBackup_Data.MDF and
[BackupFileLocation]EsconaBackup_Log.LDF.
Click OK.




The Restore process begins.
Step 3: Create the MaConfig Table
 This process must be
completed to successfully
transfer the database to a new
server.
Install the Maximizer server on one machine to create the MaConfig
table. For instructions, refer to “Installing Maximizer CRM Server” on
page 47.
You must install Maximizer CRM Server to create the MaConfig
(Address Book configuration) table. However, you do not have to
install it on the new server. You can install it on any machine in your
network.
During the Maximizer CRM installation process, you will see the
Microsoft SQL Server Name screen, which prompts you to select the
322
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
SQL Server that Maximizer will use to host its system configuration
database (MaConfig). By selecting the SQL server where you just
restored the Address Book database, you will cause the installation
to create the MaConfig database on that server.
After the installation completes, you can verify that the MaConfig
table was created by launching SQL Sever Management Studio and
navigating to the Databases folder. You should see the MaConfig
database listed there.
Step 4: Connect to the Address Book in Administrator
At this point, the SQL database is located on the new server, but it is
not yet connected to Maximizer as an Address Book.
➤ To connect Maximizer to the newly restored
Database
 Open Administrator (Start > Programs > Maximizer CRM >
Administrator).
 Select File > New Address Book.
 Select the SQL Server from the Database server drop-down list,
and click Next.

 Enter the SQL Server administrator login credentials, and click
OK.
 Select the Employ an existing Maximizer database option.
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
323
 Select the restored SQL database from the Database name
drop-down list, and click Next.


 Click Start.

 If prompted for the MASTER user’s password, click Cancel.
Maximizer begins connecting to the restored database. This
process may take a few minutes. When the process is complete,
the Start button changes to Close.
 Click Close.
Step 5: Delete Existing Users from the Address Book
This procedure removes any existing user accounts from the database
that may conflict with user accounts in the Maximizer Address Book.
324
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
➤ To delete existing users from the restored Address
Book
 In SQL Server Management Studio, navigate to the Console
Root.
 Right-click the SQL Server and select Properties.
 Click Security.
 Select the Allow direct updates to system tables option, and
click OK.


 Navigate to the Databases folder.
 Right-click the new database, and select New Query.
A new tab opens for your query.
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
325
 Enter the following SQL query into the Query Window (replace
[yourDatabase] with the name of your SQL database):
DECLARE @NM AS varchar(40), @CMD AS varchar(200), @DB
varchar(40)
SET @DB = '[yourDatabase]'
DECLARE SCHEM CURSOR GLOBAL SCROLL STATIC READ_ONLY
FOR SELECT [name] FROM sys.schemas
WHERE principal_id IN (SELECT principal_id FROM
sys.database_principals
WHERE [type] = 'S' AND principal_id > 4)
OPEN SCHEM
FETCH FIRST FROM SCHEM INTO @NM
WHILE @@Fetch_Status = 0 BEGIN
SET @CMD = 'USE ' + @DB + ' DROP SCHEMA ' + @NM
EXEC (@CMD)
FETCH NEXT FROM SCHEM INTO @NM
END
CLOSE SCHEM
DEALLOCATE SCHEM
DECLARE PRINCIP CURSOR GLOBAL SCROLL STATIC READ_ONLY
FOR SELECT [name] FROM sys.database_principals
WHERE [type] = 'S' AND principal_id > 4
OPEN PRINCIP
FETCH FIRST FROM PRINCIP INTO @NM
WHILE @@Fetch_Status = 0 BEGIN
SET @CMD = 'USE ' + @DB + ' DROP USER ' + @NM
EXEC (@CMD)
FETCH NEXT FROM PRINCIP INTO @NM
END
CLOSE PRINCIP
DEALLOCATE PRINCIP
 Click the Execute button on the toolbar
The query executes against your database.
 Close the SQL Query tab.
326
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Step 6: Grant the MASTER User Access to the Database
➤ To grant the MASTER user access to the database
 In SQL Server Management Studio, navigate to the Security >
Logins folder.
 Right-click MASTER, and click Properties.
When you install Maximizer, the MASTER password is set to
control. You must change the password so that it matches the
MASTER password on the original server.
 In the Password field, enter the MASTER password on the
original server. In the Confirm password field, re-enter the
password.
 From the Default Database drop-down list, select the restored
Address Book.
 Click User Mapping.
 Select the checkbox beside the new database name to give
MASTER access to it.
 In the Database role membership section, verify that public
and db_owner are selected for the database, and click OK.



Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
327
Step 7: Synchronize Maximizer Users with SQL Server
This step recreates the Maximizer users in the SQL database. Any
Maximizer users who did not previously exist in the new SQL
database will be created in the SQL database. However, if the users
already exist in the SQL database, their passwords in the Maximizer
Address Book being synchronized will overwrite their existing SQL
database passwords. As a result, when those users subsequently log
into a pre-existing Address Book on that SQL Server, their SQL
passwords will not match their Maximizer Address Book passwords,
and they will be prompted to provide both passwords. Those users
should then change their passwords in the other Maximizer Address
Books to match their new SQL database password.
➤ To synchronize Maximizer users with SQL Server
 Log in to the new Address Book in Administrator.
 Select Utilities > System Configurations.
 Click Synchronize.
 When synchronization is complete, click Close.
 Verify that the users were synchronized to SQL Server by
opening SQL Server Management Studio and navigating to the
Security > Users folder for the database.
You should now see the users of your restored database. If not,
press F5 to refresh the screen.
Step 8: Apply Maximizer Licenses
Apply Maximizer licenses. For instructions, refer to “Installing
Licenses” on page 66.
328
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Purging Outdated Notes and Documents
After a long period of activity, you may want to delete outdated
notes and documents using Administrator’s purge feature.
When you purge notes, you must specify the note types to delete.
Note Type
Creation Method
Accounting
Created from accounting transactions. Applicable
only to previous versions of Maximizer.
Customer
Service
Notes created in the Address Book window when
you add a case.
Email
Notes created in the Address Book window when
you send an email to one or more Address Book
entries. Email notes are also created when you
launch a campaign.
History
Created when opportunities cases, or campaigns are
added or changed. History notes can be printed or
searched only from these windows.
Incoming call
Created when you receive a phone call.
Mail-out
Created when users print labels, envelopes, or letters
using the Maximizer Word Processor's merge
feature. Mail-out notes are also created when users
send an email to more than one Address Book entry.
Manual
Added manually to the Notes window.
Opportunity
Created in the Address Book window when
opportunities are added or changed. Opportunity
notes can be printed or searched only from the
Address Book window.
Other
Third-party or custom notes created by the
administrator.
Outgoing call
Created when phone an Address Book entry.
Tasks
Created when appointments or Hotlist tasks are
scheduled or completed.
Timed notes
Created when the Timer is used while writing a note.
Transfer log
Notes logged when Address Book entries are
transferred between Address Books. Applicable only
to previous versions of Maximizer.
The purge command deletes all notes, with the exception of other
user’s private notes (unless the user purging the notes has rights to
delete other users’ notes), in the specified date range for all Address
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
329
Book entries in the open Address Book. You should back up the
Address Book before purging notes.
➤ To purge notes
 In Administrator, open the Address Book you want to clean up.
 Select File > Purge > Notes.
 Specify a date range.
Maximizer deletes notes dated between the specified dates.
 Select the type(s) of notes to delete, and click OK.
➤ To purge documents
 In Administrator, open the Address Book you want to clean up.
 Select File > Purge > Documents.
 Specify a date range.
Maximizer deletes documents dated between the specified
dates.
 If you want to purge private documents belonging to other
users, select the Delete other users’ private documents
option.
 Click OK.
330
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Using Log Files for Diagnosis
One of the most powerful tools in diagnosing a Maximizer
installation is the automated logging feature. Maximizer supports
logging for a number of server and client components.
You can control the amount of detail that is logged for various
modules. The range of logging levels is 0 through 7:
•
0 = logging disabled
•
1 = least detailed
•
7 = most detailed
You can also control the frequency in which the log files are purged
and if the information is sent to the Windows event log.
Logs are written into the default folder “\Program
Files\Maximizer\Logs”. You can define logging preferences in
Administrator and Maximizer. These preferences control the
following registry keys.
Email Service
(CMGREmail)
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SO
FTWARE\
Maximizer
Software\Maximizer\
Modules\AutoProgService\E
mail
CMGREmail_yyyymmdd.log
CMGRService_yyyymmdd.log
PrintFax
Service
(CMGRPrintFax)
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SO
FTWARE\
Maximizer
Software\Maximizer\
Modules\AutoProgService\P
rintFax
CMGRPrintFax_yyyymmdd.log
CMGR-PrintService_yyyymmdd.log
MaAccess
(MACC)
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SO MACC_yyyymmdd.log
FTWARE\
Maximizer
Software\Maximizer\
Modules\MACC\EVENTLOGS
ETTINGS
➤ To set logging preference values
 In Maximizer, click the Setup tab and select Preferences. In
Administrator, select File > Preferences.
 Select the Diagnostic tab.
If you want logs for all modules saved in one specific location,
specify a default folder where your log files will be saved. If you
don’t specify a location in this field or a location per module,
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
331
logs are saved in the Logs folder where Maximizer is installed
(e.g., Program Files\Maximizer\Logs).
 Select a module from the Preferences for this module dropdown list.
 If you want logs related to a module saved in a specific location,
specify a folder in the Module log folder field.
 Select a logging detail level from the Maximizer log level
drop-down list.
 Set your other logging preference values such as the frequency
logs are purged. By default, logs are purged after 5 days.
 Repeat the previous steps to configure logging for any other
module(s).
 Click OK.
 If you changed the log settings for the Email Service (CMGR-
Email) or PrintFax Service (CMGR-PrintFax), you must restart
the service(s) for the changes to take effect.
Restart these services from Windows Control Panel > Services.
For samples and explanations of Maximizer Email Service log files,
see “Maximizer Email Service Log Files” on page 352.
332
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
System Reports
 HTML reports can be opened
easily in Microsoft Excel,
where you can edit the data as
required.
The Reports menu in Administrator enables you to quickly create a
number of reports about the open Address Book, as described below.
Report
Information Reported
User ID List
•
Total number of users in the Address
Book
• Total number of security groups in the
Address Book
For each user in the Address Book:
• User ID
• Display Name
• First and Last Name
• Phone number
• Email Address
• Maximizer Login Enabled/Disabled status
• User’s Roles (Access Rights)
For each security group in the Address Book:
• Group Name
• Group ID
• Group members
User-Defined Fields
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Folder (if applicable) and field name
Type of entry the field is applicable to
(Company, Individual, Contact,
Opportunity, Campaign, Case, or User)
Full Access and Read Access
Type (Table, Date, Alphanumeric,
Numeric, Formula, Yes/No)
Creator
Requested by
Description
Attributes
Items in table user-defined fields
Usage count (only if Show Usage Count
checkbox selected in Print Report dialog
box)
Chapter 13
Managing Address Book Data
Report
Information Reported
Address Book Summary Total number of each of the following types
of entries in the current Address Book:
• Users
• Security groups
• Companies and Individuals
• Lowest, highest, average, and total
number of contacts per Company and
Individual
• Opportunities (total and per status)
• Automated campaigns (total and per
status)
• Traditional campaigns (total and per
status)
• User-defined fields (total and per type)
• User-defined field entries (total and per
type)
• Notes
• Documents
• Knowledge base articles (total and per
status)
• Customer service cases (total and per
status)
Sales/Marketing Teams
Details about teams and team members,
sorted by Team Type (Sales or Marketing)
• Team name
• Member user ID
• Member name
• Member status (member or team leader)
333
334
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Report
Information Reported
Installed Workstations
Details about any Maximizer workstation
that has connected to the current Address
Book on the current server:
• Name of the Maximizer workstation
machine
• Module used to connect to the server
(Administrator, Maximizer, etc.)
• Date and time when the module
connected to the server
• Maximizer version, series, and build of
the module
 This report applies only to previous versions of
Maximizer.
Current Users
• Number of licenses in use
For each user currently logged into the
Address Book:
• User name
• Computer name
• Date and time logged in
• Maximizer module connected
Licenses installed:
• Product license number (PLN)
• Computer name
• Product
• User count
• Description
• Total number of applied licenses
 This report displays on-screen rather than printing. To
print the report, press Alt and Print Screen to capture
the report window to the Windows clipboard, and then
paste it into a word processor or graphics program.
CHAPTER
Troubleshooting
14
In this chapter...
“Recreating the Maximizer_Default User” on page 336
“Resolving Issues with SQL Server” on page 336
“Troubleshooting Issues with Automated Campaigns” on page 342
“Resolving Issues with Microsoft IIS” on page 345
“Troubleshooting Web Access Sites” on page 348
“Restoring the Escona Tutorial Sample Address Book” on page 351
“Maximizer Email Service Log Files” on page 352
14
336
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Recreating the Maximizer_Default User
The maximizer_default security login is created during the initial
installation of Maximizer.
The following are steps to recreate the Maximizer_Default user if it is
not in the list of security logins in SQL.
➤ To create the maximizer_default security login
•
Select Utilities > Repair Database.
Resolving Issues with SQL Server
All of the data required for Maximizer is stored in a Microsoft SQL
Server database. Many of the problems encountered in Maximizer
environments are related to the inability to access and authenticate
the SQL Server. The following are some of the methods and tools
that can be used to troubleshoot potential issues with SQL Server.
The following sections contain information on troubleshooting
issues with SQL Server:
•
“Testing the SQL Server Connection” on page 336
•
“Confirming the Validity of the SQL Server Account” on
page 338
•
“Windows Authentication with Maximizer and SQL Server” on
page 339
•
“Connecting Maximizer Services to SQL Server” on page 339
•
“Running DBCC on a Maximizer Database” on page 340
•
“Missing Users” on page 340
•
“Using Non-Default Database Collations” on page 341
Testing the SQL Server Connection
All Maximizer components connect to a Maximizer Address Book
that is hosted by Microsoft SQL Server. When using the TCP/IP port
for SQL Server, the connection(s) are established on TCP port #1433.
If any component is unable to connect to this server, it will not
operate correctly. There are some simple procedures that can be used
to confirm that the connection can be established.
Chapter 14
Troubleshooting
337
Using the Telnet Utility to Access the SQL Port
The Telnet client utility is installed by all Windows operating systems.
This utility is typically used to enable remote access to a host server.
This tool, however, can be used as a quick means to test any TCP port
that can be connected to remotely.
The following are the steps required to test the connection to the
SQL Server port:
➤ To test the connection to the SQL Server port using
the Telnet utility
 You can combine these steps
into a single command in the
Run dialog box: telnet <IP
address> 1433.
 From the Start menu select Run.
 Type telnet in the Run dialog box, and press Enter. Windows
Telnet opens.
 Select Connect > Remote System.
The Connect dialog box opens.
 Enter the host name or IP address of the Windows Server that is
running SQL Server.
 In the Port box, enter port number 1433, and click Connect.
If the connection to the SQL Server is successful, the Disconnect
command will be enabled on the Connect menu. If the
connection is unsuccessful, Telnet displays a “Connect Failed”
message.
Using NETSTAT to Confirm Connections
From a command prompt, issue the following command:
NETSTAT -N
The following information should be returned:
Proto
Local Address
TCP
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:xxxx
ESTABLISHED
 It's likely that more than one
connection on this port will be
reported.
Foreign Address
State
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:xxxx
If the state is only reported as “TIME_WAIT” and never as
“ESTABLISHED”, the connection is not being successfully made.
338
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Confirming the Validity of the SQL Server Account
The server components of Maximizer connect to the Maximizer SQL
Address Book through two accounts, WEBUSER and EMAILUSER, that
use standalone security. If the account listed in this file can't be
authenticated by the SQL Server, the server components fail. There is
a simple procedure that can be used to confirm the validity of a SQL
user account.
➤ To confirm the validity of a SQL user account
 In the Windows Control Panel, open ODBC Data Sources.
 In the ODBC Data Sources Administrator dialog box, click the
System DSN tab.
 Locate the MA_SQL_<SERVER_NAME>_<Address
Book_NAME> entry, and click the Configure button. The
Microsoft SQL Server DSN Configuration wizard starts.
 Ensure that the correct Windows server name is displayed in the
Server box, and click Next.
 Select the With SQL Server authentication using a login ID
and password entered by the user option.
 Enable the checkbox Connect to SQL Server to obtain
default setting for the additional configuration options.
 In the Login ID field, enter the account name.
 In the Password field, enter the account password, and click
Next.
If any of the account information is incorrect, a “connection
failed” warning is shown; otherwise, the next screen is displayed.
 Click Next to advance to the next screen, and click Finish.
In the final screen, click the Test Data Source button to test
the connection.
If the test is successful, the following information is displayed:
Running connectivity test…
Attempting connection
Connection established
Verifying option settings
Disconnecting from the server
TEST COMPLETED SUCCESSFULLY!
Chapter 14
Troubleshooting
339
Windows Authentication with Maximizer and SQL Server
When Windows Authentication is specified as the means of user
authentication during the installation, all new Address Books created
use Windows Authentication. You can modify this setting on a per
Address Book basis in the MaConfig table. You can also modify the
global setting for Windows Authentication. In addition, you must
change the Windows Authentication registry key in the Windows
Registry on the computer where SQL Server is installed.
➤ To modify the Windows Authentication MaConfig
setting for an Address Book
 In SQL Server Management Studio, open the MaConfig table.
 For the Address Book, change the USE_NT_AUTHENTICATION
key to Yes to use Windows Authentication and Null or No if you
want to use SQL Server Authentication.
➤ To modify the Windows Authentication MaConfig
setting globally
 In SQL Server Management Studio, open the MaConfig table.
 Change the global USE_NT_AUTHENTICATION key to Yes to use
Windows Authentication and Null or No if you want to use SQL
Server Authentication.
➤ To modify the Windows Authentication registry key
 Click Start > Run.
 Type regedit and click OK.
 Navigate to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/SOFTWARE/Maximizer
Software/Maximizer/Common/Sys.
 Double-click Windows Authentication.
 Enter 1 to use Windows Authentication, or enter 0 to use SQL
Server Authentication. Click OK.
 Close the Registry Editor.
Connecting Maximizer Services to SQL Server
The Maximizer Email Service and the Maximizer Print/Fax Service
must be able to log in to the SQL Server. If Windows Authentication
is used to log in to SQL Server, a Windows account that has access to
the SQL Server must be provided to the Maximizer Email Service and
340
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
the Maximizer Print/Fax Service. The Windows Authentication option
and the user credentials are specified during installation. If necessary,
you can modify the user credentials for a Maximizer service after
installation.
➤ To modify user credentials for a Maximizer service
 On the Windows Control Panel, select Administrative Tools >
Services.
 Right-click on Maximizer Email Service or Maximizer Print/
Fax Service, and select Properties.
 In the Properties dialog box, select the Log On tab.
 Select This account.
 Enter the Windows domain and the user credentials for a
Windows account that has access to both the Maximizer server
computer and the SQL Server. Click OK to save the changes.
 Restart the service.
Running DBCC on a Maximizer Database
Running DBCC on a Maximizer SQL Server database may fail with the
following error message:
DBCC failed because the following SET options have incorrect
settings: 'QUOTED_IDENTIFIER, ARITHABORT'.
This error message may occur when you run DBCC explicitly, or when
DBCC runs as part of a maintenance plan created using the SQL
Database Maintenance Plan Wizard.
This error message occurs because Maximizer databases have indexes
on computed columns. However, this error message is not the result
of a problem with Maximizer. This behavior is by design in SQL
Server.
For information about working around this issue, refer to Microsoft
Knowledge Base Article 301292, which is available at the following
URL:
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/301292
Missing Users
In most situations, if you have missing users the SQL database, it is
due to incorrectly moving a SQL database. Refer to “Moving an
Address Book to a Different Server” on page 313 for more
information.
Chapter 14
Troubleshooting
341
Using Non-Default Database Collations
If you experience problems using a database collation other than the
default SQL_Latin1_General_CP1_Ci_AS, ensure the Auto Translate
setting is turned off on the SQL Server with the database.
➤ To turn off Auto Translate
 Log in to the SQL server as a user with rights to Insert records in
the MaConfig database.
 Run the following query:
insert into MaConfig (eFile,eSection,eKey,eValue) values
('','Global Settings','AUTO_TRANSLATE','no'),
('','DatabaseName','AUTO_TRANSLATE','no')
Note: DatabaseName is the name of the Maximizer database.
342
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Troubleshooting Issues with Automated Campaigns
Use this section to troubleshoot potential issues with automated
campaigns.
The following sections contain information on troubleshooting
issues with automated campaigns:
•
“Dropped SQL Server Connection” on page 342
•
“SMTP Time-out Error” on page 342
•
“Email Messages Use Wrong Character Set” on page 343
•
“Campaigns Remain “In Progress” without Activity” on page 343
Dropped SQL Server Connection
The issue describes how to troubleshoot a dropped SQL Server
connection for automated campaigns.
Problem
The connection to the SQL Server is lost.
Symptom
The Maximizer Email Service stops.
Resolution
Re-establish a connection to the SQL Server and start
the Maximizer Email Service manually from the
Services window in the Windows Control Panel.
SMTP Time-out Error
This issue describes SMTP time-out errors in automated campaigns.
Problem
For some subscribers, an automated campaign fails
due to Time_out, and you are sure the subscriber's
email address is valid.
Symptom
A Time_out message displays in the notes of the
affected campaign and Address Book entry.
Resolution
Verify that the subscriber’s email address is valid. If it
is valid, then increase the SMTP_TIMEOUT value. You
can find the SMTP_TIMEOUT value in the MaConfig
table Global Settings section. The default value for
SMTP_TIMEOUT is 100 (seconds). You can increase it
to 500, 1000...n.
Chapter 14
Troubleshooting
343
Email Messages Use Wrong Character Set
This issue affects email messages sent by automated campaigns using
the wrong character set
Problem
Email messages sent by Maximizer Email Service use
the wrong character set, ignoring the regional
settings on a user’s computer.
Symptom
Email messages sent by automated campaigns are
illegible.
Resolution
In Administrator, configure the Maximizer Email
Service to use the correct character set. For more
information, see “Configuring Email” on page 176.
Campaigns Remain “In Progress” without Activity
This issue is a problem with campaigns remaining “In Progress”
without any activity.
Problem
If the password for EMAILUSER is not synchronized,
automated campaigns do not function properly.
Symptom
A campaign’s status is “In Progress” but it is inactive
and does not send out emails, faxes, or print jobs.
Resolution
Change the EMAILUSER password to EMAILSYSTEM
(which is the default), synchronize passwords, and
restart the Maximizer Email Service and Print/Fax
Service.
➤ To change the EMAILUSER password
 In Administrator, select File > Manage Users.
 Select EMAILUSER, and click Password.
 Type EMAILSYSTEM in the New Password and Confirm
Password fields, and click OK.
Maximizer prompts you to apply the new password across all
databases.
 Click Yes to synchronize passwords.
344
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
➤ To restart the Maximizer Email and Print/Fax
Services
 Select Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Services to
open the Services window.
 Double-click Maximizer Email Service.
 Click Stop.
 Click Start to restart the service.
 Double-click Maximizer PrintFax Service.
 Click Stop.
 Click Start to restart the service.
 Click OK.
Chapter 14
Troubleshooting
345
Resolving Issues with Microsoft IIS
The following sections contain information on troubleshooting
potential issues with Microsoft IIS:
•
“Configuring Maximizer Web Access on a 64-bit Operating
System” on page 345
•
“Maximizer Components for IIS and Windows Server 2008 or
2012” on page 345
•
“Resolving DSN Creation Problems on a Maximizer Web Server”
on page 347
Configuring Maximizer Web Access on a 64-bit Operating System
This issue affects computers running Maximizer Web Access on a 64bit Operating System.
Problem
Maximizer Web Access requires the 32-bit version of
ASP.NET 4.0 in order to run on a 64-bit operating
system.
Symptoms
Maximizer Web Access does not work when installed
on a 64-bit operating system.
Resolution
Enable the 32-bit version of IIS on the machine that
Maximizer Web Access is installed on. For more
information, see “Microsoft IIS on 64-Bit Operating
Systems” on page 28.
Maximizer Components for IIS and Windows Server 2008 or 2012
If you are using Windows Server 2008 or 2012, you may need to
perform additional steps before installing Maximizer components for
IIS. For more information, see “Microsoft IIS on Windows Server 2008
or 2012” on page 26.
If you continue to have problems, you may need to install additional
roles for Web Server (IIS). In particular, ensure the following roles are
installed:
•
Under Common HTTP Features, Static Content.
•
Under Application Development, ASP.NET and .NET
Extensibility.
•
Under Security, Basic Authentication and Windows
Authentication.
346
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
•
Under Management Tools, all roles.
Chapter 14
Troubleshooting
347
Resolving DSN Creation Problems on a Maximizer Web Server
This issue is a problem creating the Data Source Name (DSN) on a
Maximizer web server.
Problem
Running Microsoft IIS and SQL Server on different
computers.
Symptom
Maximizer Web Access sites do not work.
Resolution
Run Maximizer on the same server as Microsoft IIS to
automatically create the DSN (Data Source Name)
for the project and open the database in
Administrator.
348
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Troubleshooting Web Access Sites
The following sections contain information on troubleshooting
potential issues with web access sites:
•
“Maximizer Web Access Templates” on page 348
•
“User-Defined Field Visibility” on page 348
•
“Site Tree Control” on page 349
•
“Blocked Files in Maximizer Web Access” on page 350
Maximizer Web Access Templates
When the Sites (File > Web Access) dialog box is opened in
Administrator (File > Web Access), a “master list” of templates is
compared with the template list stored for the Address Book. If any
of the templates differ, you are prompted to overwrite the Address
Book templates with the master templates. If you have customized
any of the templates used for Maximizer Web Access, you may wish
to keep a backup copy or mark the templates as read-only so the files
are not inadvertently overwritten.
The “master list” of templates is the list of files stored under:
\MxServer\Thinclients on the Maximizer application server
The list of templates available for publishing for an Address Book is
stored under:
\MxData\<Address Book Name>\Html on the application server
If you have problems with an Address Book’s site templates, delete
the “Html” folder under MxData and open the Sites dialog box in
Administrator—the Address Book’s templates folder. The template
files then regenerate from the master template list. Other files in the
folder—such as the online site Help files—are also regenerated.
User-Defined Field Visibility
Visibility of user-defined fields for Web visitors (external web access
users) is based on what WEBUSER has security rights to view. To allow
external visibility for a user-defined field, ensure WEBUSER has access
to the field; if the user-defined fields belongs to a group, WEBUSER
must be part of that group.
Chapter 14
Troubleshooting
349
Site Tree Control
This issue affects the tree view control in web access sites.
Problem
The sites use the Microsoft Internet Explorer
TreeView WebControl to display tree structures.
Maximizer CRM Server installs the graphical
components of this tree control in the
C:\INETPUB\wwwroot folder in a subfolder called
webctrl_client. Since C:\INETPUB\wwwroot is the
default location of the Internet Information Services
(IIS) root folder, the control is assumed to be
available from the root. However, if the location of
the root folder (Default Web Site or other web site
to which you may have moved the sites) has been
changed, the graphical components of this control
are no longer available and the control displays as
simple text.
Symptom
The tree view control in Maximizer Web Access,
Partner Access, and Customer Access may display
External Links, UDFs when in tree mode, and
Company Library data as long strings of text rather
than the expected graphical tree structure
representation. No interaction is available.
Resolution
To correct this issue, copy the
C:\INETPUB\wwwroot\webctrl_client folder, and all
its contents, to the new root folder designated as
the Local Path of the new root under Properties for
the Default Web Site in the IIS Manager. Detailed
steps for this procedure are provided below.
➤ To resolve the site tree control display issue
 Open the IIS Manager.
 Right-click on the Default Web Site, or other web site to which
you may have moved the sites, and click Properties.
 Click the Home Directory tab.
 Take note of the path in the Local Path field. This is the folder
that you will copy the C:\INETPUB\wwwroot\webctrl_client
folder and its contents to.
 Close the Default Web Site Properties dialog box.
 Open Windows Explorer.
350
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 Copy the C:\INETPUB\wwwroot\webctrl_client folder and its
contents to the Local Path identified in step 4 above.
The site tree structures should now display correctly.
Blocked Files in Maximizer Web Access
This issue affects users after first logging in to Maximizer Web Access.
Problem
The web server configuration includes a firewall or
other software that is blocking the
MaThinIEActiveX.ocx file.
Symptom
When a user logs in to Maximizer Web Access, the
web browser displays a message that the
MaThinIEActiveX.ocx file is blocked.
Resolution
Configure the firewall to allow this file to be
downloaded from the server. For more information,
see “ActiveX Controls in Maximizer Web Access” on
page 215.
Chapter 14
Troubleshooting
351
Restoring the Escona Tutorial Sample Address Book
If the installation of the Escona Tutorial sample Address Book fails,
you can restore the sample database using the EsconaTutorial.bak
backup file located on the Maximizer application server. The file is
located in the following shared folder:
\All Users\Application Data\Maximizer\AddrBks\EsconaTutorial\
If you are accessing the shared folder from a workstation, the path is
as follows:
\\<server_name>\MxData\EsconaTutorial
After you have restored the Address Book from the backup file, you
must employ it before anybody can open it in Maximizer. For
instructions on employing an Address Book, refer to “Employing an
Existing Address Book” on page 82.
352
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Maximizer Email Service Log Files
The Maximizer Email Service log files store the following codes:
•
1 = Initialization or database connection problem
•
2 = Not used
•
3 = Exception (other error code)
Samples and explanations of both Maximizer Email Service log files
are included below. For more information on log files, see “Using
Log Files for Diagnosis” on page 330.
Sample CMGR-Email_yyyymmdd.log File
 Line numbers are not written
17:50:14
into an actual log and are
provided here for convenience.
================ OPENING LOG ================
CURRENT DATE:2010/05/16
1.
17:50:14 INFO
[Line 1506]
COMMON_SERVER_SETTING =
[ini]
2.
17:50:14 INFO
BookS = Escona
[Line 1516]
[ini] COMMON_Address
3.
17:50:14 INFO
Book = Escona
[Line 1534]
[***] current Address
4.
17:50:14
INFO
[Line 1552]
[ini] AUTO_EMAIL_RUN = 1
5.
17:50:14
Escona
INFO
[Line 1570]
[ini] SQL_DB_NAME =
6.
17:50:14 INFO
Servername
[Line 1579]
[ini] SQL_SERVER =
7.
17:50:14 INFO
EMAILUSER
[Line 1588]
[ini] SERVICE_USERID =
8.
17:50:14 INFO
[Line 1607]
Book_PATH = DSN:MA_SQL_ESCONA
9.
17:50:14 INFO
[Line 1637] [ini]
AUTO_EMAIL_TEMPLATES = C:\Program
Files\Maximizer\ServerShared\Email Templates\
[ini] SERVICE_Address
10. 17:50:14 INFO
[Line 1646] [ini]
AUTO_EMAIL_SMTP_SERVER = mail.maximizer.com
11. 17:50:15 WARNING [Line 512]
email to
'devsupport@maximizer.com' failed (Reason: Load template
'.etf' failed)
 The test environment that
produced this log had an
invalid path for the email
template directory, resulting in
a detailed error in line 11.
12. 17:50:17 WARNING [Line 396]
0 email messages were
sent successfully, 1 email messages failed
17:50:17
================ CLOSING LOG ================
Chapter 14
Troubleshooting
353
Description of Sample CMGR-Email_yyyymmdd.log File
The following table describes some of the numbered lines from the
previous example.
Line #
Description
1
Confirmation as to whether the Common Server setting
parameter is enabled in the MaConfig table.
NOTE: This setting controls whether passwords are
encrypted or not encrypted.
2
A list of all of the Maximizer Address Books—read from the
MaConfig table.
3
The current Address Book that the service is using.
4
Whether the Email Service is active or not.
1 = active; 0 = inactive
5
The name of the SQL database that the service is accessing.
6
The name of the SQL Server that hosts the database.
7
The name of the SQL Server account that will be used to log
in to the database.
9
The location of the email templates directory.
10
The name of the SMTP Server that the service will send
email through.
11
Explanation why the email failed.
12
Count of successful and unsuccessful emails sent.
Sample CMGR-Service_yyyymmdd.log File
 Line numbers are not written
into an actual log and are
provided here for convenience.
 The error code #2 in line 6
identifies a problem locating
the email template.
CURRENT DATE:2010/05/16
1.
17:49:12
INFO
[Line 64]
email service started
2.
17:49:12 INFO
[Line 402]
AUTO_EMAIL_CYCLE_TIME = 1
[ini]
3.
17:49:12 INFO
[Line 410]
AUTO_EMAIL_TIME_UNIT = 0
[ini]
4.
17:50:13 INFO
[Line 402]
AUTO_EMAIL_CYCLE_TIME = 1
[ini]
5.
17:50:13 INFO
[Line 410]
AUTO_EMAIL_TIME_UNIT = 0
[ini]
6.
17:50:17 INFO
[Line 256]
cycle with error code 2
email service finished
354
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
 The warning in line 7 confirms
7.
that the email message was
not sent.
17:50:17 WARNING [Line 396]
0 email messages were
sent successfully, 1 email messages failed
Description of the Sample CMGR-Service_yyyymmdd.log File
The following table describes some of the numbered lines from the
previous example. Due to the error in the configuration as stated
above, the send attempt failed.
Line #
Description
1
Launching of the send application.
2
The setting for the email send cycle; stated in minutes.
6
The status of the last send attempt.
7
Count of successful and unsuccessful emails sent.
APPENDIX
Administrator’s
Reference
In this chapter...
“MaConfig Table (Server and Address Book Configuration)” on page 356
“ADMN_Config Table (Address Book Configuration)” on page 364
“Maximizer File Types” on page 367
“Adding a Microsoft IIS machine” on page 368
“Virtual Directories” on page 368
“Database Views for User-Defined Fields” on page 371
“Maximizer XML Interface (MXI)” on page 363
“Search String Language” on page 390
A
356
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
MaConfig Table (Server and Address Book Configuration)
Maximizer uses a special SQL database called MaConfig to store the
settings for the Address Books, global settings, and some IIS settings.
During a Workstation installation, the Maximizer Workstation Setup
program reads from the server’s MaConfig table in the MaConfig
database to obtain the correct registry settings for the workstation.
The following sections contain information on the MaConfig table:
•
“Editing the MaConfig Settings” on page 356
•
“Four-letter Module Codes” on page 356
•
“MaConfig Table: Entries and their Meanings” on page 347
Editing the MaConfig Settings
If you need to edit the MaConfig table directly, you can access it
through Microsoft SQL Enterprise Manager.
➤ To edit the Maximizer configuration settings in the
MaConfig table using Microsoft SQL Enterprise
Manager
 Open Microsoft SQL Enterprise Manager.
 Browse to the SQL Server, and select the MaConfig database.
 Under Tables locate and select the MaConfig table.
 Right-click the table, and select Open Table > Return All Rows.
Enterprise Manager displays the entire MaConfig table.
 Edit the entries as needed, and close the table.
Four-letter Module Codes
Entries in the MaConfig table often contain a four-letter code to
identify which component uses that particular entry.
Code
Module
ADMN
Administrator
AMGR
Maximizer
AUTO
Maximizer Automated Services
CMGR
Campaign Manager
DSGN
Portals (not used)
Appendix A
Administrator’s Reference
Code
Module
EMPP
Maximizer Web Access
EXTP
Partner Access and Customer Access
EXCH
MaxExchange
357
MaConfig Table: Entries and their Meanings
The MaConfig table contains information about a set of Maximizer
Address Books. The MaConfig table is stored in the MaConfig
database in SQL Server. Some of the entries in the table may not
apply depending on the edition of Maximizer you are using.
The following tables describe the keys in the MaConfig table.
Table 1
Address Book Configuration Settings in the MaConfig Table
Section
Key
Value
<Address Book>
AUTO_EMAIL_TEMPLATES
Path to the automated campaign email
template files (*.etf).
<Address Book>
DASHBOARD_DISABLED
Determines if dashboards are disabled for the
current Address Book:
yes = Dashboards are disabled
This key is not included by default in the
MaConfig table. You must manually add a
new entry to the table with this key for the
specific Address Book.
<Address Book>
Dashboard_URL
URL of dashboards.
<Address Book>
DB_NAME
Actual name of the Maximizer database. It can
be different from display name.
<Address Book>
DB_SERVER
Network machine name of the computer that
hosts the Maximizer configuration table
(MaConfig table).
<Address Book>
DB_SYS_TYPE
Type of database used for the Maximizer
Address Book.
<Address Book>
DB_USERFRIENDLY_NAME
Display name of Maximizer database in
Address Book list.
<Address Book>
DSGN_ISAPI_CUSTOMER
URL of Customer Access.
<Address Book>
DSGN_ISAPI_PARTNER
URL of Partner Access.
<Address Book>
DSGN_SSL_ISAPI
<Address Book>
EADV_MASRCH_FILE
<Address Book>
EADV_MASRCH_Update_URL
358
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Table 1
Address Book Configuration Settings in the MaConfig Table
Section
Key
Value
<Address Book>
HTML_TEMPLATES_PATH
Path of the root HTML folder on the
Maximizer Application Server.
(Maximizer\Address
Books\<AddressBook>\Html).
<Address Book>
HTML_TEMPLATES_URL
<Address Book>
IN_MEMORY_RESPONSE_TABLE
<Address Book>
LIST_LIMIT
<Address Book>
Refresh ISAPI Details
<Address Book>
RPTR_START_FINANCIAL_DAY
Day of the month (specified in
“RPTR_START_FINANCIAL_ MONTH”) in which
the fiscal year begins.
<Address Book>
RPTR_START_FINANCIAL_
MONTH
Month (i.e., 1–12) in which the fiscal year
begins.
<Address Book>
SERVICE_CMGR_PASSWORD
Default email service password for automated
campaigns (emailsystem).
<Address Book>
SERVICE_CMGR_USERID
Default User ID for email service login user.
(EMAILUSER).
<Address Book>
SERVICE_DSGN_PASSWORD
Default WEBUSER password. (websystem).
<Address Book>
SERVICE_DSGN_USERID
Default User ID for ISAPI login user.
(WEBUSER).
<Address Book>
SERVICE_PASSWORD
<Address Book>
SERVICE_SMTP_SERVER
<Address Book>
SERVICE_USERID
Controls the maximum value of the Maximum
entries field in the Search dialog boxes that
can be carried forward to the next session.
The value of the Maximum entries field in any
of the Search dialog boxes will always be less
than or equal to the LIST_LIMIT value the next
time the Search dialog box is opened. If the
user selects a value less than LIST_LIMIT, that
value will be selected automatically the next
time they open the dialog box. If the user
selects a value greater than LIST_LIMIT, the
value will be reset to LIST_LIMIT the next time
they open the dialog box. This control helps
avoid overloading the SQL server.
By default, the value of LIST_LIMIT is 1000.
Setting LIST_LIMIT to 0 allows the “All” option
to be saved for the next session.
Appendix A
Administrator’s Reference
Table 1
Address Book Configuration Settings in the MaConfig Table
Section
Key
Value
<Address Book>
SERVICE_WORKSPACE_PATH
DSN of the Address Book.
<Address Book>
PUBLISHED_PROJECTS
<Address Book>
AUTO_TRANSLATE
Table 2
359
This key must be created manually.
Create this key when a workstation that uses
non-English regional settings must access a
database that uses an English database
collation. It affects the “Perform translation
for character data” flag in the database DSN.
Set the value of this key to 0 or 1.
0 = Turn “Perform translation for character
data” flag OFF
1 = Turn “Perform translation for character
data” flag ON
If you use a database collation other than the
default, SQL_Latin1_General_CP1_Ci_AS, set
the value to 0.
This Key must also be added to the Global
Settings section.
Global Address Book Server Configuration Settings in the MaConfig Table
Section
Key
Value
Global Settings
AcntQB
Global Settings
AcntQB0
Global Settings
AcntQBDesc0
Global Settings
AUTO_EMAIL_BATCH_CYCLE
Global Settings
AUTO_EMAIL_BATCH_SIZE
Number of emails sent in the specified interval
of time for the batch.
Global Settings
AUTO_EMAIL_CYCLE_TIME
Number of polls in the time unit specified under
“AUTO_EMAIL_TIME_UNIT” in which the SQL
Server is checked for outgoing automated
emails.
Global Settings
AUTO_EMAIL_JOB_PER_
THREAD
Length of prepared messages sent to queue per
thread. The default is 20.
Global Settings
AUTO_EMAIL_REDIRECT_URL_
BASE
Specifies the URL of the script that redirects the
email recipients to the Landing page URL in
automated email campaign activities.
360
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Table 2
Global Address Book Server Configuration Settings in the MaConfig Table
Section
Key
Value
Global Settings
AUTO_EMAIL_REQUIRES_AUTH
Specifies if SMTP server requires authentication:
0 = Authentication not required
1 = Authentication required
Global Settings
AUTO_EMAIL_SERVICE
Default server that hosts the Email Service.
Global Settings
AUTO_EMAIL_SMTP_PORT
Port number of the SMTP server. The default is
25.
Global Settings
AUTO_EMAIL_THREAD_COUNT
Number of email threads. This value cannot be
higher than 31 and the default is 20.
Global Settings
AUTO_EMAIL_TIME_UNIT
Time unit used for AUTO_EMAIL_CYCLE_TIME:
0 = Minutes
1 = Hours
2 = Days
3 = Months
Global Settings
AUTO_PRINTFAX_BATCH_CYCLE
Global Settings
AUTO_PRINTFAX_BATCH_SIZE
Number of print jobs for each batch.
Global Settings
AUTO_PRINTFAX_CYCLE_TIME
Number of polls in the time unit specified in
AUTO_PRINTFAX_TIME_UNIT, in which the SQL
Server is checked for outgoing automated print
jobs and faxes.
Global Settings
AUTO_PRINTFAX_TIME_UNIT
Time unit used for
AUTO_PRINTFAX_CYCLE_TIME:
0 = Minutes
1 = Hours
2 = Days
3 = Months
Global Settings
BTI_PATH
Defines the UNC location of the
“Maximizer\Address Books” folder on the
Maximizer Main Server. The “Address Books”
folder is usually shared as “EAddress Books”, so
that in a typical installation the UNC path would
be “\\<servername>\ EAddress Books”.
Global Settings
CAMPAIGN_PRINTFAX_DEVICES
List of printers and fax software used by the
Maximizer Print/Fax Service.
Appendix A
Administrator’s Reference
Table 2
361
Global Address Book Server Configuration Settings in the MaConfig Table
Section
Key
Value
Global Settings
COMMON_WORKSPACES
Defines the Maximizer Address Books that are
to appear in the Address Books list when you
open an Address Book. The Address Book names
should be separated by a comma, as in
“COMMON_ Address BookS=Address
Book1,Address Book2,Address Book3”. Each
Address Book listed here should have a
corresponding section in the MaConfig table.
For example “Address Book1” would have a
“[Address Book1]” section.
Global Settings
Dashboard_URL
URL of dashboards.
Global Settings
DB_SERVER
Name of database server.
Global Settings
DB_SYS_TYPE
Type of database (SQL).
Global Settings
EMPLOYEE_PORTAL_URL
URL of Maximizer Web Access.
Global Settings
ENCRYPTION_TYPE
Type of encryption:
0 = Standard
1 = No encyption
2 = BLOWFISH40
Global Settings
IIS
Name of the IIS Server.
Global Settings
IIS External Server
Network machine name of the IIS Server that
you have set up for external Internet access.
Global Settings
IIS Internal Server
Network machine name of the IIS Server that
you have set up for internal access.
Global Settings
Install Path
Local path of the Maximizer program folder on
the Maximizer Application Server.
Global Settings
License_MAXIMIZER
Number of installed Maximizer PLNs (Product
License Numbers).
Global Settings
License_MAXIMIZER_DESCn
Description of nth Maximizer PLN.
Global Settings
License_MAXIMIZERn
nth Maximizer PLN.
Global Settings
License_PORTAL
Number of installed Web Access Site PLNs
(Product License Numbers).
Global Settings
License_PORTAL_DESCn
Description of nth Web Access Site PLN.
Global Settings
License_PORTALn
nth Web Access Site PLN.
Global Settings
Maximizer Server
Network machine name of the Maximizer
Server.
Global Settings
Maximizer Server Setup
Maximizer series number installed on the
Maximizer Application Server. This value is set
by the installation program.
362
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Table 2
Global Address Book Server Configuration Settings in the MaConfig Table
Section
Key
Value
Global Settings
NONTESTED_COLLATION_LIST
Global Settings
ONETOONE_REQUIRES_AUTH
Global Settings
ONETOONE_SMTP_SERVER
Global Settings
ONETOONE_SMTP_SERVER_
PORT
Global Settings
Server Path UNC
Refers to the UNC path of the “Maximizer\
ServerShared” folder. The “ServerShared”
folder is shared as “MaximizerServer” during a
Maximizer installation. For example, a typical
installation would have the entry “Server Path
UNC=\\<servername>\ MaximizerServer”.
Global Settings
SMTP Server
Specifies the name of the outgoing mail server
used for automated campaigns.
Global Settings
SMTP_TIMEOUT
Duration that the email service waits for the
SMTP server’s response for each email. The unit
of measurement is in seconds.
Global Settings
SQL_SERVER
Global Settings
<IIS Server>_Domain Name
HTTP server name.
Global Settings
TESTED_COLLATION_LIST
Comma-delimited list of SQL database collations
supported by Maximizer.
Global Settings
Thin_Clients_Installation
Global Settings
USE_UNIFIED_LOGIN
“Trusted Connection” login security:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Global Settings
AUTO_TRANSLATE
This key must be created manually.
Create this key when a workstation that uses
non-English regional settings must access a
database that uses an English database
collation. It affects the “Perform translation for
character data” flag in the database DSN.
Set the value of this key to 0 or 1.
0 = Turn “Perform translation for character
data” flag OFF
1 = Turn “Perform translation for character
data” flag ON
If you use a database collation other than the
default, SQL_Latin1_General_CP1_Ci_AS, set the
value to 0.
This Key must also be added for the Address
Book with the non-default database collation.
Appendix A
Administrator’s Reference
Table 2
Global Address Book Server Configuration Settings in the MaConfig Table
Section
Key
Value
Global Settings
WEBAPI_URL
This key contains the full URL of the
Maximizer.Web.Data API, including the
protocol (http or https).
Global Settings
WEBAUTHENTICATION_URL
This key contains the full URL of the Maximizer
Authentication service, including the protocol
(http or https).
Table 3
ISS Server Configuration Settings in the MaConfig Table
Section
Key
IIS_<IIS Server>
BASE_HREF
IIS_<IIS Server>
IIS_URL
IIS_<IIS Server>
WORKSPACE
IIS_<IIS Server>
WORKSPACE_PATH
Table 4
Virtual directory path of the “Scrptpub.dll”.
Installation path of the Address Books folder.
Live Update Configuration Settings in the MaConfig Table
Section
Key
Live Update
Enable
Live Update
Enable Auto
Live Update
Server Base URL
Table 5
Value
Value
Workstation Configuration Settings in the MaConfig Table
Section
Key
Workstation_
<Server>
Installed_Series
Workstation_
<Server>
Setup_Completion_Date
Value
363
364
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
ADMN_Config Table (Address Book Configuration)
The ADMN_Config table in your Maximizer Address Book database contains Address Book-specific
settings.
AppCode
KeyCode
SubKeyCode
ALLOW_COPY_
CLIENTS_TO_
OUTLOOK
Comment
Controls Address Book synchronization
between Maximizer and Outlook.
0 = Disable (default)
1 = Enable
AUTO_EMAIL_
PASSWORD
Maximizer Email Service outgoing
SMTP server account password
AUTO_EMAIL_
REQUIRES_AUTH
Enable/disable Maximizer Email Service
outgoing SMTP server authentication
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
AUTO_EMAIL_RUN
Automated services activation
0 = Inactive
1 = Active (but not yet used by any
automated services)
2 = Active
AUTO_EMAIL_
SERVICE
The name of server which hosts the
automated services
AUTO_EMAIL_SMTP
_PORT
Maximizer Email Service outgoing
SMTP server port number
AUTO_EMAIL_SMTP
_SERVER
Maximizer Email Service outgoing
SMTP server name
AUTO_EMAIL_
TEMPLATES
Automated services templates path
AUTO_EMAIL_
USERNAME
Maximizer Email Service outgoing
SMTP server account name
ClientUdfInfo
CustomerService
ClientUdfInfo
EssentialUDFs
Essential UDFs
ClientUdfInfo
EssentialUDFs_
Caption
Essential UDFs group box caption
Mandatory Basic
Fields
Company, Contact
or Individual
Marks basic field as mandatory for
specific entry type
NotifyAction
("CustomerNotify")
CustomerService
Notify Address Book entry when a
customer service case is created for
them
Appendix A
Administrator’s Reference
AppCode
365
KeyCode
SubKeyCode
Comment
ResponseTime
CustomerService
Default case response time
Address Format
0
Custom address format, accessible
from Preferences > Format
MyWorkDay
MyWorkDayCaption
Caption text for Overview page, set in
Administrator preferences
Calendar
Appt_iCal_Attachme Preference for including an iCal
nt
attachment in an appointment
notification email.
Calendar
CarryForward
CarryForward for Hotlist in Calendar
window
Calendar
HideLegend
Hide/Show user and location/resources
legend
Calendar
HideTask
Hide/Show Hotlist tasks in Calendar
Calendar
Legend
Users, resources, and locations visible
in legend
EMAIL_DEFAULT
_TEMPLATE
0
DataMachineID,
SequenceNumber of the email
template in the AMGR_Letters table.
RecentEntries
0
Client_id of a recent entry
RecentEntries
bVisible
Hide/Show recent entries on Icon bar
Format(User)
ShowDisabled
Show/Hide disabled users
Format(User)
Name
User format
RecentEntries
NumToShow
Number of recent entries to show
DefaultAbTab
LastCatalogSearches
MWD_LAYOUT
What is shown in MWD
MWD_STARTUP
Whether or not MWD opens on
startup
PRINTER<n>
NAME
Printer name or UNC path
Printing Rights
Rights
Allow printing to specified output
Quick Access Entries
bVisible
Show/Hide quick access list on Icon bar
Quick Access Entries
Selected Commands
Action listed in quick access
User_Colors
Resource
Resource colors
User_Colors
User
User Colors
366
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
AppCode
KeyCode
SubKeyCode
Column Setup
Address Book
Campaigns
Column Setup
Campaigns
Comment
IconBarButtonOrder
The order of the buttons in the icon
bar.
IconBarButtonHide
The icons that are hidden on the icon
bar.
NOTIFICATION
AutoEmail
EVENT_MAX_AUTO
_EMAIL_FATAL
Event notification for Maximizer Email
Service fatal error
NOTIFICATION
AutoPrintFax
EVENT_MAX_AUTO
_PRINTFAX_FATAL
Event notification for Maximizer Print/
Fax Service fatal error
NOTIFICATION
NOTIFICATION_
SETTING
Notification CFG
Version
Event notification version number.
Used to synchronize the
EventNotification.cfg file with these
table entries.
NOTIFICATION
NOTIFICATION_
SETTING
NOTIFICATION_
ENABLE
NOTIFICATION_
SETTING
NOTIFICATION_
REQUIRE_AUTH
NOTIFICATION
Event notification activation
0 = Inactive
1 = Active
Enable/disable events notification
outgoing SMTP server authentication
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
NOTIFICATION
NOTIFICATION_
SETTING
NOTIFICATION_
SENDER_ADDRESS
Event notification sender email
address
NOTIFICATION
NOTIFICATION_
SETTING
NOTIFICATION_
SENDER_NAME
Event notification sender name (email)
NOTIFICATION
NOTIFICATION_
SETTING
NOTIFICATION_
SMTP_AUTH_NAME
Event notification outgoing SMTP
server account name
NOTIFICATION
NOTIFICATION_
SETTING
NOTIFICATION_
SMTP_AUTH_
PASSWORD
Event notification outgoing SMTP
server account password
NOTIFICATION
NOTIFICATION_
SETTING
NOTIFICATION_
SMTP_PORT
Event notification outgoing SMTP
server port number
NOTIFICATION
NOTIFICATION_
SETTING
NOTIFICATION_
SMTP_SERVER
Event notification outgoing SMTP
server name
Appendix A
Administrator’s Reference
367
Maximizer File Types
The following table lists the extensions of file types created in the
registry during the Maximizer installation.
Extension
Application
Comment
.MDE
MaxWin.exe
Maximizer Data Exchange file used by
email transfer (prior to version 7 – now
.MET)
.MEC
ecMecIm.exe
OrderDesk’s order data file
.MET
MaxWin.exe
Maximizer Email Transfer files (version
7 and higher)
.MXD
MaxWord.ter
Maximizer Document extension
.MXI
MaxWin.exe
Maximizer XML format data file
.MTI
MaxWin.exe
Maximizer Transfer Interface (CSV
format data file – elaborate or skip CSV
altogether; manual says EDI, flags, etc.)
The following table lists the extensions of file types used by
Maximizer. These file types have no association in the registry.
Extension
Application
Comment
.ETF
MaxWord.ter
Template files used for automated
campaigns, customer service emails,
and by MaxWord
The following table lists the extensions of file types created in the
registry during the MaxExchange installation in previous versions.
Extension
Application
.MEX
Comment
MaxExchange lock file
The following table lists the extensions of file types used by
MaxExchange in previous versions. These file types have no
association in the registry.
Extension
Application
Comment
.HDR
Packet header file
.ATT
Data packet file
.MA
Internally used by MaxExchange to
store information about email data
packets (as in Dld_q.ma)
368
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Adding a Microsoft IIS machine
You can add a Microsoft IIS machine through Administrator. A
Maximizer Web Server (IIS machine) is set up by installing the IIS
components of a Maximizer Server installation. To enable an
“installed” Maximizer Web Server to work with an Address Book, see
the Sites dialog box in Administrator (File > Web Access).
Virtual Directories
The following table describes the virtual directories created by the
Maximizer installation.
By default, [Install Directory] is C:\Program Files\Maximizer\.
Virtual Directory
Description
Directory
MaximizerWebAccess
Maximizer Web
Access
[Install Directory]\
Portals\Employee
MaximizerMobileAcce Mobile Access
ss
[Install Directory]\
Portals\Wireless
MaximizerPartner
Partner Access
[Install Directory]\
Portals\Partner
MaximizerCustomer
Customer Access
[Install Directory]\
Portals\Customer
Dashboard
Dashboards
[Install Directory]\
Portals\Dashboard
Campaigns
Statistics for email
campaigns
[Install Directory]\
Campaign Manager\
Statistics
Appendix A
Administrator’s Reference
Virtual Directory Permissions
The following sections list the default permissions for the virtual
directories created by the Maximizer installation.
Maximizer Web Access, Partner Access, and Customer Access Virtual Directories
The following table lists the default permissions for the
MaximizerWebAccess, MaximizerPartner, and MaximizerCustomer
virtual directories:
Permission
Setting
Read Access
True
Write Access
False
Script Source Access
False
Directory Browsing
False
Indexing
True
Log Visits
True
Default Document
Default.aspx
Delete During Uninstall
True
Execute Permissions
Scripts Only
Application Protection
Medium
Application Mappings
Default mappings
Session Timeout
20
ASP Script Timeout
90
Authentication Methods
Anonymous + Integrated Windows
Campaigns Virtual Directory
The following table lists the default permissions on the Campaigns
virtual directory:
Permission
Setting
Read Access
True
Write Access
False
Script Source Access
False
Directory Browsing
False
369
370
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Permission
Setting
Indexing
True
Log Visits
True
Default Document
Default.asp
Delete During Uninstall
True
Execute Permissions
Scripts Only
Application Protection
Medium
Application Mappings
Default mappings
Session Timeout
20
ASP Script Timeout
90
Authentication Methods
Anonymous + Integrated Windows
Dashboard Virtual Directory
The following table lists the default permissions for the Dashboard
virtual directory:
Permission
Setting
Read Access
True
Write Access
False
Script Source Access
False
Directory Browsing
False
Indexing
True
Log Visits
True
Default Document
Default.asp
Delete During Uninstall
True
Execute Permissions
Scripts and Executables
Application Protection
High
Application Mappings
Default mappings
Session Timeout
20
ASP Script Timeout
90
Authentication Methods
Anonymous + Integrated Windows
Appendix A
Administrator’s Reference
371
Database Views for User-Defined Fields
When you create a user-defined field, a database view for that userdefined field is also created. You can use these views to report on
user-defined fields in Crystal Reports. For example, when a new
Address Book user-defined field called “Salary” is created, a new
view named “A_Salary” is dynamically created. Based on the type of
user-defined field, the view name is prefixed by a designated letter.
The following table identifies the table or view name prefixes for
each type of user-defined field.
Maximizer uses the Microsoft SQL database driver (MAS_ DSN).
Microsoft SQL View Prefixes
The Microsoft SQL driver creates database views for user-defined
fields, using the following prefixes.
Prefix
Type of user-defined field
A_
Address Book
BP_
Third-Party Integration
C_
Campaign
CS_
Customer Service
O_
Opportunity
U_
Users
S_
System
372
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Maximizer XML Interface (MXI)
Maximizer enables you to import Address Book entries, customer
service cases, and knowledge base articles from Maximizer or other
applications using XML. If the records were exported from Maximizer
in MXI (Maximizer XML Interface) or XML format, you can import
them back into Maximizer directly. However, to import records from
other applications in XML format, you must ensure that the XML file
conforms to the Maximizer XML schema.
After you have converted your data to XML format, you can use the
Import command to import this data into an Address Book.
The names of and relationships between the elements in the
Maximizer XML schema correspond to the Maximizer Address Book
fields, with a few exceptions. Several elements are named “Detail...”.
These elements correspond to user-defined fields:
•
DetailDef – Definition of a user-defined field.
•
DetailDate – Date user-defined field.
•
DetailNumber – Numeric user-defined field.
•
DetailString – Alphanumeric user-defined field.
•
DetailList – Single-value table user-defined field.
•
DetailListMulti – Multiple-value table user-defined field.
•
DetailFormula – Formula user-defined field.
•
DetailBoolean – Yes/no user-defined field.
The following sections outline the tree-structure hierarchy of
Maximizer XML elements. The first section outlines just the top-level
elements, and the following sections outline the elements below the
top-level. Mandatory elements are shown in bold, and are
mandatory only if their parent element is used.
Top-Level Elements
The <AllData> element is the root element, which contains the
following elements, which contain all other elements. For specific
information about each of the elements, refer to the appropriate
section.
<AllData>
<ImportOptions>
See ImportOptions Element.
</ImportOptions>
<DetailDef>
See DetailDef Element for sub-elements.
Appendix A
Administrator’s Reference
373
</DetailDef>
<Individual>
See Individual Element for sub-elements.
</Individual>
<Company>
See Company Element for sub-elements.
</Company>
<KnowledgeBaseArticle>
See KnowledgeBaseArticle Element for sub-elements.
</KnowledgeBaseArticle>
<Case>
See Case Element for sub-elements.
</Case>
</AllData>
ImportOptions Element
The <ImportOptions> element and its sub-elements describe how
Address Book entries and customer service cases should be imported.
<ImportOptions>
<LeadHandling></LeadHandling>
<ClientIdGeneration></ClientIdGeneration>
<LogFile></LogFile>
<LogLevel></LogLevel>
<ClientOptions>
<MatchMode></MatchMode>
<MatchDetail></MatchDetail>
</ClientOptions>
<ContactOptions>
<MatchMode></MatchMode>
<MatchDetail></MatchDetail>
</ContactOptions>
</ImportOptions>
The following table describes the values of each of the
<ImportOptions> elements. The valid values for each element are
listed in the Value column. The Equivalent Field column identifies the
field in the import dialog boxes that sets the same import option.
374
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Equivalent Field(s) in
Maximizer
Element Name
Valid Values
LeadHandling
Lead
Import all entries as
leads
Imports all Address Book entries in the
import file as sales leads, regardless of
any sales lead values specified in the file.
Normal
Import all entries as
non-leads
Imports all Address Book entries in the
import file as non-sales leads, regardless
of any sales lead values specified in the
file.
File
Use values from the
import file
Imports Address Book entries as either
sales leads or non-sales leads, as
specified in the values of the import file.
This is the default option.
If the file was exported from Maximizer,
the sales lead status of each Address
Book entry was automatically included
in the exported file. This option simply
carries those values forward to the
imported records.
ClientIdGeneration Setting
n/a
If the imported Address Book entry
contains a Client ID, it uses the Client ID
of the imported entry.
If the imported Address Book entry does
not contain a Client ID, it creates a new
Client ID for the imported Address Book
entry.
System
n/a
Creates a new Client ID for each
imported Address Book entry.
File
n/a
Uses the Client IDs of the Address Book
entries being imported.
n/a
Path and filename where the log file
should be saved (e.g., c:\folder\file.log).
0
n/a
Do not log (leaving this element value
blank has same result).
1
n/a
Log errors only.
5
n/a
Log record additions and field changes.
7
n/a
Record all details (very large log file
size).
Client Options apply to Company and
Individual Address Book entries; Contact
Options apply to Contact Address Book
entries. Client Options and Contact
Options are defined in the nested
<MatchMode> and <MatchDetail>
elements.
LogFile
LogLevel
ClientOptions
n/a
n/a
ContactOptions
n/a
n/a
Description
Appendix A
Administrator’s Reference
375
Element Name
Valid Values
Equivalent Field(s) in
Maximizer
MatchMode
AlwaysInsert
n/a
Inserts all Company, Individual, and
Contact records from the import file and
does not match imported records to
existing records. Duplicate entries may
result.
Id
n/a
Uses Address Book identification values
as the criteria for matching records. For
Company and Individual records, this
option uses the Client ID field to match
entries. For Contact records, this option
uses the Client ID and Contact Number
fields to match entries.
Name
n/a
Company records will use the Company
field, and Individual and Contact records
will use the Last Name field as the
criteria for matching records.
Detail
n/a
Specifies an alphanumeric user-defined
field to use as the criterion for matching
records. Only Address Book entry userdefined fields that apply to the
applicable record type appear in this list.
n/a
Name of the alphanumeric user-defined
field to use to match entries when
MatchMode is set to Detail.
MatchDetail
Description
DetailDef Element
The <DetailDef> element and its sub-elements describe the userdefined field definitions. If the user-defined field includes a
description, it appears in the <Description> element. If it is a table
user-defined field, the table items each appear in the <ListItem>
elements.
<DetailDef Name=”” Type=””>
<Description></Description>
<ListItem></ListItem>
</DetailDef>
Much of the information about the user-defined field is stored in the
element’s attributes, which are described in the following table.
376
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Attribute
Data Type
Valid Values Description
Name
string
Type
string
Multiple
Single
Date
String
Number
Indicates the type of user-defined field:
• Multiple = Table user-defined field that allows selection
of multiple items.
• Single = Table user-defined field that allows selection of
single item only.
• Date = Date user-defined field.
• String = Alphanumeric user-defined field.
• Number = Numeric user-defined field.
• Formula = Formula user-defined field.
• Boolean = Yes/No user-defined field.
This attribute also applies to the <Detail> elements within
other elements.
The maximum length of the Type attribute is 80 characters.
Cases
string
No
Yes
Indicates whether the user-defined field can be assigned to
Cases.
Companies
string
No
Yes
Indicates whether the user-defined field can be assigned to
Company, Individual, or Contact Address Book entries.
Individuals
string
No
Yes
Contacts
string
No
Yes
DateAnnual
string
Yes
Applies to Date user-defined fields only.
Yes = Annually recurring event.
RetainYear
string
Yes
Applies to Annually Recurring Date user-defined fields only.
Yes = Retain year in annually recurring dates.
Hotlist
integer
1
Applies to Date user-defined fields only.
1 = Create Hotlist task.
Length
integer
Name of the user-defined field.
Applies to Alphanumeric user-defined fields only.
Indicates the maximum length of the field value.
Individual Element
The <Individual> element describes an Address Book entry for an
Individual. Mandatory sub-elements are shown in bold.
<Individual>
<ContactNo></ContactNo>
<FirstName></FirstName>
<LastName></LastName>
<Initial></Initial>
Appendix A
Administrator’s Reference
<MrMs></MrMs>
<Title></Title>
<Salutation></Salutation>
<Phone>
<Number></Number>
<Extension></Extension>
<Description></Description>
</Phone>
<Email>
<Address></Address>
<Description></Description>
</Email>
<Department></Department>
<Division></Division>
<ReportsTo></ReportsTo>
<AssignedTo></AssignedTo>
<Category></Category>
<DoNotSolicitBy></DoNotSolicitBy>
<Website></Website>
<Created></Created>
<LastModified></LastModified>
<SalesLead></SalesLead>
<Address>
See Address Element.
</Address>
<DetailDate Name=””></DetailDate>
<DetailNumber Name=””></DetailNumber>
<DetailString Name=””></DetailString>
<DetailList Name=””></DetailList>
<DetailListMulti Name=””>
<Value></Value>
</DetailListMulti>
<Note>
See Note Element.
</Note>
<Document>
377
378
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
See Document Element.
</Document>
<Id></Id>
<Firm></Firm>
<Contact>
See Contact Element.
</Contact>
</Individual>
Company Element
The <Company> element describes an Address Book entry for a
Company. Mandatory sub-elements are shown in bold.
<Company>
<Id></Id>
<Name></Name>
<Department></Department>
<Division></Division>
<Phone>
<Number></Number>
<Extension></Extension>
<Description></Description>
</Phone>
<Email>
<Address></Address>
<Description></Description>
</Email>
<Website></Website>
<AssignedTo></AssignedTo>
<Category></Category>
<DoNotSolicitBy></DoNotSolicitBy>
<Created></Created>
<LastModified></LastModified>
<SalesLead></SalesLead>
<Address>
See Address Element.
</Address>
Appendix A
Administrator’s Reference
379
<DetailDate Name=””></DetailDate>
<DetailNumber Name=””></DetailNumber>
<DetailString Name=””></DetailString>
<DetailList Name=””></DetailList>
<DetailListMulti Name=””>
<Value></Value>
</DetailListMulti>
<Note>
See Note Element.
</Note>
<Document>
See Document Element.
</Document>
<Contact>
See Contact Element.
</Contact>
</Company>
KnowledgeBaseArticle Element
The <KnowledgeBaseArticle> element describes a Knowledge Base
Article. The contents of the article itself are stored in the <Data> subelement.
Note: To import your own knowledge base articles that were not
exported from Maximizer, you must encode the text in Base64 for
the Data field in the MXI/XML file.
<KnowledgeBaseArticle>
<Machine></Machine>
<Sequence></Sequence>
<Status></Status>
<Creator></Creator>
<Owner></Owner>
<LastModified></LastModified>
<Created></Created>
<FileName></FileName>
<FileExt></FileExt>
<Title></Title>
<KeyWords></KeyWords>
380
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
<Product></Product>
<Category></Category>
<Data></Data>
</KnowledgeBaseArticle>
Case Element
The <Case> element describes a Customer Service Case. Mandatory
sub-elements are shown in bold.
<Case>
<CaseNumber></CaseNumber>
<CaseId></CaseId>
<Subject></Subject>
<CaseCompanyIndividual>
<Id></Id>
<ContactNo></ContactNo>
</CaseCompanyIndividual>
<CaseContact>
<Id></Id>
<ContactNo></ContactNo>
</CaseContact>
<Solution>
<Id></Id>
<ContactNo></ContactNo>
</Solution>
<ArticleId></ArticleId>
<Priority></Priority>
<Severity></Severity>
<Fee></Fee>
<BillRate></BillRate>
<BillableTime></BillableTime>
<Owner></Owner>
<AssignedTo></AssignedTo>
<CreatedBy></CreatedBy>
<ModifiedBy></ModifiedBy>
<ResolvedBy></ResolvedBy>
<CaseOwner></CaseOwner>
Appendix A
Administrator’s Reference
<Type></Type>
<Reason></Reason>
<Origin></Origin>
<Category></Category>
<BillingType></BillingType>
<Queue></Queue>
<Status></Status>
<ModifyDate></ModifyDate>
<DeadlineDate></DeadlineDate>
<CreateDate></CreateDate>
<ResolveDate></ResolveDate>
<Description></Description>
<DetailDate Name=””></DetailDate>
<DetailNumber Name=””></DetailNumber>
<DetailString Name=””></DetailString>
<DetailList Name=””></DetailList>
<DetailListMulti Name=””>
<Value></Value>
</DetailListMulti>
<Note>
See Note Element.
</Note>
<Document>
See Document Element.
</Document>
</Case>
Contact Element
The <Contact> element describes an Address Book entry for a
Contact. This element is nested within the <Individual> and
<Company> elements. Mandatory sub-elements are shown in bold.
<Contact>
<ContactNo></ContactNo>
<FirstName></FirstName>
<LastName></LastName>
<Initial></Initial>
381
382
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
<MrMs></MrMs>
<Title></Title>
<Salutation></Salutation>
<Phone>
<Number></Number>
<Extension></Extension>
<Description></Description>
</Phone>
<Email>
<Address></Address>
<Description></Description>
</Email>
<Department></Department>
<Division></Division>
<ReportsTo></ReportsTo>
<AssignedTo></AssignedTo>
<Category></Category>
<DoNotSolicitBy></DoNotSolicitBy>
<Website></Website>
<Created></Created>
<LastModified></LastModified>
<SalesLead></SalesLead>
<Address>
See Address Element.
</Address>
<DetailDate Name=””></DetailDate>
<DetailNumber Name=””></DetailNumber>
<DetailString Name=””></DetailString>
<DetailList Name=””></DetailList>
<DetailListMulti Name=””>
<Value></Value>
</DetailListMulti>
<Note>
See Note Element.
</Note>
<Document>
Appendix A
Administrator’s Reference
383
See Document Element.
</Document>
</Contact>
Address Element
The <Address> element describes the address of an Address Book
entry. This element is nested within the <Individual>, <Company>,
and <Contact> elements.
<Address>
<Description></Description>
<AddressLine1></AddressLine1>
<AddressLine2></AddressLine2>
<City></City>
<StateProvince></StateProvince>
<Country></Country>
<ZipCode></ZipCode>
</Address>
Note Element
The <Note> element describes any notes for Address Book entries or
customer service cases. This element is nested within the
<Individual>, <Company>, and <Contact>, and <Case> elements.
Mandatory sub-elements are shown in bold. The body of the note is
stored in the <Text> element.
<Note>
<Date></Date>
<Creator></Creator>
<Owner></Owner>
<Type></Type>
<Text></Text>
</Note>
Document Element
The <Document> element describes any Documents for Address Book
entries or customer service cases. This element is nested within the
<Individual>, <Company>, and <Contact>, and <Case> elements.
Mandatory sub-elements are shown in bold. The body of the
document is stored in the <DocData> element in Base64 format.
384
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
<Document>
<DocumentId></DocumentId>
<Name></Name>
<Date></Date>
<Creator></Creator>
<Owner></Owner>
<Extension></Extension>
<DocData></DocData>
</Document>
Element Details
The following table lists all the elements in the Maximizer XML
schema in alphabetical order and describes the following properties
of each:
Element Name
Address
a
Address
a
•
Element Name – The name of the XML element. An element
name may be listed more than once if it has different properties
depending on its parent element. Most of the element names
correspond to Maximizer field names.
•
Parent Element(s) – The name of the XML element(s) within
which the element is nested. If an element with the same name
and same properties may exist within more than one parent
element, all parent elements are listed.
•
Min. Occur. – The minimum number of times the element must
occur within its parent element. A value of 1 indicates that the
element is mandatory, and a value of 0 indicates it is not.
•
Max. Occur. – The maximum number of times the element may
occur within its parent element.
•
Data Type – The type of data that may be stored in the element.
•
Max. Length – The maximum length of the element contents. If
this value is blank, there is no maximum length.
Parent Element(s)
Min. Occur. Max. Occur. Data Type Max. Length
Email
1
1
string
b
120
Individual
Company
Contact
0
1
none
AddressLine1
Address
0
1
string
80
AddressLine2
Address
0
1
string
80
AllData
none
1
1
noneb
ArticleId
Case
0
1
string
80
Appendix A
Administrator’s Reference
385
Element Name
Parent Element(s)
Min. Occur. Max. Occur. Data Type Max. Length
AssignedTo
Individual
Company
Contact
Case
0
1
string
BillableTime
Case
0
1
double
BillingType
Case
0
1
string
1
BillRate
Case
0
Case
AllData
0
11
80
double
noneb
CaseCompanyIndividual Case
0
1
noneb
CaseContact
Case
0
1
noneb
CaseId
Case
0
1
string
80
CaseNumber
Case
0
1
string
80
80
CaseOwner
Case
0
1
string
Categorya
Individual
Company
Contact
0
1
string
Categorya
KnowledgeBaseArticle
Case
0
1
string
80
City
Address
0
1
string
80
ClientIdGeneration
ImportOptions
0
1
string
ClientOptions
ImportOptions
0
1
noneb
Company
AllData
0
unlimited
noneb
Contact
Individual
Company
0
unlimited
noneb
ContactNoa
Individual
Contact
0
1
integer
ContactNoa
CaseCompanyIndividual 1
CaseContact
Solution
1
integer
ContactOptions
ImportOptions
1
noneb
0
Country
Address
0
1
string
Created
Individual
Company
Contact
KnowledgeBaseArticle
0
1
dateTime
CreateDate
Case
0
1
dateTime
CreatedBy
Case
0
1
string
80
80
386
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Element Name
Parent Element(s)
Min. Occur. Max. Occur. Data Type Max. Length
Creator
Note
Document
KnowledgeBaseArticle
0
1
string
Datac
KnowledgeBaseArticle
0
1
string
Date
Note
Document
1
1
dateTime
80
DeadlineDate
Case
0
1
dateTime
Department
Individual
Company
Contact
0
1
string
80
Descriptiona
Phone
Email
0
1
string
22
Descriptiona
Address
0
1
string
80
DetailDef
Case
0
1
string
DetailDate
Individual
Company
Contact
Case
0
unlimited
date
DetailDef
AllData
0
unlimited
noneb
DetailList
Individual
Company
Contact
Case
0
unlimited
string
DetailListMulti
Individual
Company
Contact
Case
0
unlimited
noneb
DetailNumber
Individual
Company
Contact
Case
0
unlimited
double
DetailString
Individual
Company
Contact
Case
0
unlimited
string
120
Division
Individual
Contact
Company
0
1
string
80
DocData
Document
0
1
string
Description
a
80
Appendix A
Administrator’s Reference
387
Element Name
Parent Element(s)
Min. Occur. Max. Occur. Data Type Max. Length
Document
Individual
Company
Contact
Case
0
unlimited
noneb
DocumentId
Document
0
1
integer
DoNotSolicitBy
Individual
Company
Contact
0
1
string
Email
Individual
Company
Contact
0
3
noneb
Extension
Phone
Document
0
1
string
Fee
Case
0
1
double
FileExt
KnowledgeBaseArticle
0
1
string
22
22
FileName
KnowledgeBaseArticle
0
1
string
120
Firm
Individual
0
1
string
80
FirstName
Individual
Contact
0
1
string
80
Id
Individual
1
Company
CaseCompanyIndividual
CaseContact
Solution
1
string
23
ImportOptions
AllData
0
1
noneb
Individual
AllData
0
unlimited
noneb
Initial
Individual
Contact
0
1
string
80
KeyWords
KnowledgeBaseArticle
0
1
string
120
b
KnowledgeBaseArticle
AllData
0
unlimited
none
LastModified
Individual
Company
Contact
KnowledgeBaseArticle
0
1
dateTime
LastName
Individual
Contact
1
1
string
LeadHandling
ImportOptions
0
1
string
ListItem
DetailDef
0
unlimited
string
LogFile
ImportOptions
0
1
string
LogLevel
ImportOptions
0
1
integer
80
80
388
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Element Name
Parent Element(s)
Min. Occur. Max. Occur. Data Type Max. Length
Machine
KnowledgeBaseArticle
0
1
integer
MatchDetail
ClientOptions
ContactOptions
0
1
string
MatchMode
ClientOptions
ContactOptions
1
1
string
ModifiedBy
Case
0
1
string
ModifyDate
Case
0
1
dateTime
MrMs
Individual
Contact
0
1
string
80
Name
Company
Document
1
1
string
80
Note
Individual
Company
Contact
Case
0
unlimited
noneb
Number
Phone
1
1
string
22
Origin
Case
0
1
string
80
Owner
Note
Document
KnowledgeBaseArticle
Case
0
1
string
80
Phone
Individual
Company
Contact
0
4
noneb
Priority
Case
0
1
string
80
Product
KnowledgeBaseArticle
0
1
string
80
Queue
Case
0
1
string
80
Reason
Case
0
1
string
80
ReportsTo
Individual
Contact
0
1
string
80
ResolveDate
Case
0
1
dateTime
ResolvedBy
Case
0
1
string
SalesLead
Individual
Company
Contact
0
1
boolean
Salutation
Individual
Contact
0
1
string
Sequence
KnowledgeBaseArticle
0
1
integer
Severity
Case
0
1
string
80
80
80
80
Appendix A
Administrator’s Reference
389
Element Name
Parent Element(s)
Min. Occur. Max. Occur. Data Type Max. Length
Solution
Case
0
1
noneb
StateProvince
Address
0
1
string
Status
a
80
KnowledgeBaseArticle
0
1
integer
Statusa
Case
0
1
string
Subject
Case
0
1
string
Text
Note
1
1
string
Titlea
Individual
Contact
0
1
string
80
Titlea
KnowledgeBaseArticle
0
1
string
120
Type
Note
Case
0
1
string
80
Value
DetailListMulti
1
unlimited
string
80
Website
Individual
Company
Contact
0
1
string
120
ZipCode
Address
0
1
string
80
80
a. This element is listed more than once because of differing properties depending on which element is the
parent element.
b. This element cannot contain a value. It can contain only other elements.
c. To import your own knowledge base articles that were not exported from Maximizer, you must encode the
text in Base64 for the Data field in the MXI/XML file.
390
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Search String Language
Each access object in Maximizer.Data has a method called ReadList()
which returns a .NET collection of the associated objects. This method
may be called with no parameters to return everything in the
Address Book or with a search string.
The ReadList() method generally searches fields contained within the
calling object. However, Address Book entry fields and methods are
also available for searching in the Opportunity and CSCase access
objects. To call an Address Book field from the Opportunity or
CSCase access object, add “ABENTRY_” before the field name. For
example, to call the City field for an Address Book entry in the
Opportunity object, the syntax for the field search should be
“ABENTRY_City”.
Search Syntax
The syntax for the search string is a functional or prefix operator
notation. Expressions are of the form
<Operator>([“]<Parameter1>[“]{,[“]<Parameter>[“]}). This
syntax was chosen because it’s well suited to a search tree interface.
Double-quotes are always optional, although, you need them if a
search parameter includes commas, spaces, or parentheses. In most
programming languages, you should ensure you escape doublequote characters when specifying them as a string.
Example
AND(EQ(City,Vancouver), OR(LIKE(Phone1,604%),
LIKE(Phone2,604%)))
Result
This search string would return all Address Book entries where the
city is Vancouver and at least one of the first two phone numbers
starts with 604.
Search Operators
Each object supports a subset of the total search string syntax, and
each operator supported by the object supports its use on a subset of
the object’s fields. Deviation from what is supported will result in an
exception being thrown as described later. As a minimum, the KEY
operator is supported by every object as a means of selecting a single
record in the set.
Appendix A
Administrator’s Reference
391
The following tables describe the operators available to the search
string language.
Object-level Search Operators
The following search operators apply to the object. The
documentation of each object lists which search operators are
available for that object. However, the KEY operator is available for
all objects.
Operator
Description
Parameters
AND
All sub-expressions must evaluate
to true to return an object in the
result set.
Each parameter is a subexpression to be AND/OR
together. A minimum of one
parameter is required.
OR
At least one sub-expression must
evaluate to true to return an
object in the result set.
KEY
An object must have the given
key or derive from a supported
foreign key for it to be returned
in the result set.
The parameter is a supported key
for this object. Exactly one
parameter is required.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Maximizer.Data keys are
encrypted. A key may include
letters, numbers and special
printable characters, but will
NEVER include double quote
characters. It is recommended
that when using this operator,
you surround your key with
double quotes.
392
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
The following search operators apply to the AbEntryAccess object
only.
Operator
Description
Parameters
WNOTE
An object must have an
associated note as described to
be returned in the result set.
NWNOTE
An object cannot have an
associated note as described to
be returned in the result set.
Up to eight parameters may be
specified. Only the first
parameter is mandatory, and
those left unspecified will not be
included in the search. The first
parameter is the search text. The
search text may occur anywhere
in a note. “_” is a single character
wildcard. The second and third
parameters are the start and end
dates expressed as YYYY-MMDD. The fourth parameter is the
set of note types to return (e.g.
“1,2,4”). The fifth parameter is
the Creator. The sixth parameter
is the Owner. If you want to
return only public notes, put
“PUBLIC” here. The seventh
parameter is the note category.
The eighth parameter is the
option to use full text search. If
you want to use the full text
search, put “FULLTEXT” here.
FLIST
An object (generally an Address
Book entry) must be in the
favorite list to be returned in the
result set.
The only parameter is the
FavoriteList key. Exactly 1
parameter is supported. Ensure
to enclose the keys in double
quotes.
LIST
An object (generally an Address
Book entry) must be explicitly
listed to be returned in the result
set.
List the AbEntry keys
corresponding to the objects you
want to return. Any number of
parameters is supported. Ensure
to enclose the key in double
quotes.
Appendix A
Administrator’s Reference
Operator
Description
Parameters
WDOC
An object must have an
associated document as
described to be returned in the
result set.
NWDOC
An object cannot have an
associated document as
described to be returned in the
result set.
Up to eight parameters may be
specified. Only the first
parameter is mandatory, and
those left unspecified will not be
included in the search. The first
parameter is the search text. The
search text may occur anywhere
in a document. “_” is a single
character wildcard. The second
and third parameters are the
start and end dates expressed as
YYYY-MM-DD. The fourth
parameter is the document
name. The fifth parameter is the
minimum size of the document.
The sixth parameter is the
Creator. The seventh parameter
is the Owner of the document.
The eighth parameter is the
document category.
393
Field-level Search Operators
The following search operators apply to the fields within each object.
The documentation of each field lists which operators are available
for each field.
Operator
Description
Parameters
EQ
A given field must be equal to
the search criteria to return an
object in the result set.
NEQ
A given field cannot be equal to
the search criteria to return an
object in the result set.
The first parameter is the field
name. The second parameter is
the search criteria. No wildcards
are supported. See LIKE/NLIKE.
Exactly two parameters are
required.
LIKE
A given field must be similar to
the search criteria to return an
object in the result set.
NLIKE
A given field cannot be similar to
the search criteria to return an
object in the result set.
The first parameter is the field
name. The second parameter is
the search criteria. Standard SQL
wildcards “_” and “%” are
supported. Exactly two
parameters are required.
394
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Operator
Description
Parameters
RANGE
A given folder must be in the
range provided to return an
object in the result set.
NRANGE
A given field cannot be in the
range provided to return an
object in the result set.
The first parameter is the field
name. The second and third
parameters define the range.
Exactly 3 parameters are
required.
Exceptions
Syntax errors in supplied search strings are reported with the
throwing of an exception from the ReadList() method. All exceptions
thrown from the Maximizer.Data assembly are derived from
MxException, so they may be caught and handled collectively.
Example (C#)
try
{
oAbEntryAccess.ReadList(“EQ(City,Vancouver)”);
}
catch
(Maximizer.Data.MxSupportedKeywordSearchStringException
exKeyword)
{
// A custom message for this particular error type.
MessageBox.Show(“AbEntry doesn’t support “ +
exKeyword.ErrorDetail);
}
catch (Maximizer.Data.MxException exGeneric)
{
// Generically pop-up a message box explaining the
error.
MessageBox.Show(exGeneric.ToString());
}
The following table contains the exceptions that may be thrown
when parsing a search string. It also contains the error message that
is displayed for each exception if you use the ToString() function.
Appendix A
Administrator’s Reference
395
Exception
Error Message
MxPreProcessSearchStringException
Unable to pre-process the given search string. It
may be missing or have extraneous parentheses or
double quotes.
MxProcessSearchStringException
Unable to process the given search string. It
contains an unsupported operator.
MxListSearchStringException
Unable to process the given search string. The LIST
expression should take at least one parameter.
MxFlistSearchStringException
Unable to process the given search string. The
FLIST expression should take exactly one
parameter. The parameter should be the key of
the desired favorite list to retrieve.
MxEqSearchStringException
Unable to process the given search string. The EQ
expression should take exactly two parameters.
MxNeqSearchStringException
Unable to process the given search string. The
NEQ expression should take exactly two
parameters.
MxLikeSearchStringException
Unable to process the given search string. The LIKE
expression should take exactly two parameters.
MxRangeSearchStringException
Unable to process the given search string. The
RANGE expression should take exactly three
parameters.
MxNrangeSearchStringException
Unable to process the given search string. The
NRANGE expression should take exactly three
parameters.
MxNlikeSearchStringException
Unable to process the given search string. The
NLIKE expression should take exactly two
parameters.
MxWnoteSearchStringException
Unable to process the given search string. The
WNOTE expression should take between one and
six parameters.
MxWdocSearchStringException
Unable to process the given search string. The
WDOC expression should take between one and
six parameters.
MxNwnoteSearchStringException
Unable to process the given search string. The
NWNOTE expression should take between one
and six parameters.
MxNwdocSearchStringException
Unable to process the given search string. The
NWDOC expression should take between one and
six parameters.
MxKeySearchStringException
Unable to process the given search string. The KEY
expression should take exactly one parameter.
396
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Exception
Error Message
MxVerifyFieldSearchStringException
Unable to process the given search string. The
field specified is not supported with the given
operator for this object.
MxSupportedKeywordSearchString
Exception
Unable to process the given search string. It
includes a keyword unsupported by this object.
MxDateTimeOrderSearchStringException
Unable to process the given search string. When
searching by a date range the start date must be
earlier than the end date.
Appendix A
Administrator’s Reference
397
398
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
APPENDIX
Glossary
In this chapter...
“Maximizer and Administrator Terminology” on page 400
B
400
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Maximizer and Administrator Terminology
.NET – See Microsoft .NET Framework.
access rights – Security settings for users. Access rights control each
user’s permissions to read, insert, modify, or delete various types of
Maximizer entries. They also control general Maximizer privileges,
user roles, and allowed printing destinations. Access rights
determined by the user’s access settings and the access settings of
any security groups the user belongs to. For more information about
access rights, refer to “User and Group Security” on page 99.
access settings – There are two types of access settings: user access
settings and group access settings. Combined user and group access
settings determine a user’s access rights. For more information about
access settings, refer to refer to “User and Group Security” on
page 99.
Address Book – A Maximizer database.
Address Book entry – A Company, Individual, or Contact in the
Maximizer Address Book.
Administrator – A Maximizer module in which the Address Book
administrator can perform configuration and maintenance of the
Maximizer system and Address Books.
advanced import – Importing an MXI or XML file into an Address
Book. For more information about advanced import, refer to
“Importing Address Book Data from MXI or XML Files” on page 290.
Application Server – See Maximizer Application Server.
automated campaign – A series of automated emails, faxes, or
printed documents that Maximizer sends on a predefined schedule.
An automated campaign is based on an automated campaign
template.
automated services – Maximizer Email Service and Maximizer
Print/Fax Service. Used for automated campaigns, customer service
case email notifications, and appointment reminders by email.
Calendar – A Maximizer page where you can manage your
appointments.
Campaign Manager Statistics – A Maximizer component that
tracks the number of emails opened by the recipients, the number of
recipients who clicked web links within the email, and the number of
recipients who chose to unsubscribe from future campaigns.
campaign template – A pre-defined strategy used by email and
traditional marketing campaigns. See automated campaign and
traditional campaign.
Company – An Address Book entry used to record information for a
company or organization.
Appendix B
Glossary
401
Company Library – A shared library of company literature.
COMPANY user – A Maximizer system user account used for the
company calendar to display company events in the Maximizer
calendar.
Contact – An Address Book entry used to record information for an
individual person associated with a Company or Individual type of
Address Book entry.
Customization Suite – A Maximizer add-on enabling you to
customize Maximizer’s functionality and interface and to integrate it
with other applications. For more information, refer to the
Maximizer web site.
Dashboards – Component of Maximizer Web Access that display
real-time information on your company using dashboard-style
instrumentation.
default entry – An Address Book entry containing field values that
are propagated to new Address Book entries by default.
demilitarized zone (DMZ) – A network area between the external
router, which talks to the Internet, and the corporate firewall, which
protects internal computers from Internet security breaches
DSN – A Data Source Name providing connectivity to a database
through an ODBC driver.
EMAILUSER – A Maximizer system user account that gives Maximizer
access to Address Book data when it performs automated email
activities such as automated campaigns.
Escona Tutorial – The Escona Tutorial Address Book is a sample
Address Book included with a typical installation of Maximizer. Using
the example of a fictitious vintner in the Sonoma Valley, this Address
Book demonstrates many of Maximizer’s possibilities.
event notification – Automatic email notification and logging
when specific Maximizer events occur.
Global Edit – A Maximizer operation that enables you to apply the
same change to multiple Maximizer entries simultaneously.
group – See security group.
Holiday Editor – A tool in Administrator for adding holidays to the
Maximizer Calendar window.
Hotlist – A page in Maximizer used to display tasks and
appointments in a specific date range.
IIS – See Microsoft Internet Information Server.
IP address – A number used to uniquely identify a specific computer
on the Internet. Every Internet-connected computer has an IP
address. In Maximizer, you use the IIS server’s IP address when you
preview or publish your online catalog.
402
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Key Fields – Important user-defined fields that are highlighted on
the Basic Information tab of Maximizer entries. For more
information, refer to “Creating Key Fields Lists” on page 170.
Knowledge base – A database containing articles pertaining to
solutions for customer service and/or technical issues.
lead – An Address Book entry (Company, Individual, or Contact) that
has been flagged as a potential client or customer.
list – A listing of entries in Maximizer. You can create a list using a
search or by selecting specific entries and reducing the list to the
selection. Most activities are performed for the current list or the
current entry.
load balancing – When a web server is running at capacity, new
connections are to another web server for processing.
mandatory field – Fields in Maximizer entries that must contain a
value. Mandatory fields are designated through File > Preferences >
Mandatory Fields in Administrator.
mandatory user-defined field – User-defined fields in Maximizer
entries that must contain a value. Mandatory user-defined fields are
designated through File > Set Up User-Defined Fields in
Administrator or Maximizer.
marketing team – A group of users to support team-based work on
marketing campaigns in Maximizer.
MASTER user – The Address Book administrator’s user ID. This user
ID permits access to Administrator.
MaxAlarm – A discontinued Maximizer companion application that
automatically monitors appointments for one or more people in any
number of Address Books and notifies them of appointments.
MaxExchange – A discontinued Maximizer program that was used
to synchronize an Address Book between a central server and remote
distribution sites via FTP, email, or a direct network connection.
Maximizer – A Maximizer CRM module in which you can perform
contact management and sales force automation activities.
Maximizer Application Server – The principal Windows Server
where Maximizer CRM Server is installed.
Maximizer Email Service – A Maximizer automated service that
provides automated email campaign activities, customer service case
email notifications, and appointment reminders by email.
Maximizer Print/Fax Service – A Maximizer automated service that
enables automated campaigns by fax and printer.
Maximizer XML Interface (MXI) – An XML file format for
importing entries into a Maximizer Address Book.
MDAC – Microsoft Data Access Components. Provides ActiveX Data
Objects (ADO), OLE DB, and Open Database Connectivity (ODBC)
Appendix B
Glossary
403
components for Maximizer to integrate information from multiple
sources.
merge field – Text inserted into a document or template that is
replaced by Address Book information during a mail merge. For
example, a merge field can be a Contact’s name, so you can
customize a letter’s salutation with the recipient’s name.
Microsoft .NET Framework – A Microsoft operating system
platform required for Maximizer Web Access, and Maximizer
Campaign Manager Statistics.
MaxSync for Microsoft Exchange – A discontinued Maximizer
add-on for synchronizing some Maximizer entries, such as Address
Book entries, between Maximizer and a Microsoft Exchange Server.
Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS) – Microsoft web
server software. Internet Information Server, or IIS, is used for many
of the Maximizer components.
Microsoft SQL Server – A database server used by Maximizer for
the Address Book data.
MXI – See Maximizer XML Interface.
note – A text document attached to Address Book entries, Contacts,
opportunities, and campaigns.
OLE – Object linking and embedding (OLE) is a technology that
allows you to insert files, portions of files, and links to files into a
document or application. You can insert files in the Documents
window and the Company Library. Double-clicking the file opens it in
the associated (and installed) application.
opportunity – An entry in Maximizer used to record an opportunity
to make a sale. Opportunities can organize a sales team using a
structured sales strategy.
PLN – Product License Number. A Maximizer license. For more
information, refer to “Installing Licenses” on page 66.
preferences – A collection of program options that allow users to
customize how Maximizer functions. Some preferences are set in
Administrator
PSN – Product Serial Number. Entered during product installation.
registry key – Configuration information stored in the Windows
operating system.
related entries – An entry that records a relationship between two
Address Book entries. For example, one Address Book entry might be
an accountant for another Address Book entry, which could be
recorded as a related entry in Maximizer.
sales team – A group of users to support team-based work on sales
opportunities in Maximizer.
404
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
sites – Web-based interfaces (Maximizer Web Access) for Maximizer
Address Books. This includes Maximizer Web Access, Customer
Access, Partner Access, and Mobile Access.
script file – A file containing commands that can be executed
without user interaction.
security group – A set of access settings for a subset of Maximizer
users. For more information, refer to “User and Group Security” on
page 99.
SMTP – An SMTP server is a server used for outgoing Internet email.
SQL – See Microsoft SQL Server.
strategy – A structured, team-based approach to pursuing sales
opportunities. Strategies define the steps, activities, and roles
involved in successfully completing a sale.
system field – All Maximizer fields that are not user-defined fields
are system fields. A few system fields have customizable valueselection lists, which can be defined through File > Preferences >
System Fields in Administrator.
system-defined field – User-defined fields created by Maximizer
rather than by users. Users can modify some properties of these fields
but cannot delete them. In the Set Up User-Defined Fields dialog box,
system-defined fields are displayed in bold.
team – See sales team or marketing team.
template – A file that outlines the design for a document, email, or
web page. Maximizer uses templates for word processor documents,
and for automated activities that belong to automated campaigns.
Templates can contain merge fields for bulk mailings. Also, see
campaign template.
thin-client applications – Allow you to remotely access Maximizer
Address Book data using the web. “Maximizer on the Web” consists
of Maximizer Web Access, Mobile Access, Partner Access, and
Customer Access.
traditional campaign – Used to organize a marketing effort,
including a marketing team’s steps, activities, and roles.
two-tier import – A procedure for importing Address Book entries
where Companies are imported first followed by Contacts.
UDF – See user-defined field.
UNC – Universal Naming Convention. A kind of network path used to
locate files and folders. An example of a UNC path is
“\\Escona\MxServer\”.
user ID – A name that uniquely identifies a Maximizer user. Users
must enter their user ID and password to gain access to a Maximizer
Address Book.
Appendix B
Glossary
405
user-defined field – A custom field used to record additional “userdefined” information for Address Book entries, opportunities,
campaigns, and users.
virtual directory – An IIS folder that points to a physical folder on
the computer. The contents of the physical folder that the virtual
directory refers to is accessible to the Internet or intranet via the IIS
server.
Web Access – Web access allows you to remotely access Maximizer
Address Book data using the web. “Maximizer on the Web” consists
of Maximizer Web Access, Mobile Access, Partner Access, and
Customer Access.
web.config – A configuration file for .NET applications. Each of the
applications has its own web.config file.
WEBUSER – A Maximizer system user account required for Customer
Access and Partner Access.
workflow automation – A tool that monitors your business systems
and automatically assigns the appropriate people to take action.
XML – Extensible Markup Language. A file format that can be
displayed is XML-enabled web browsers.
406
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
407
Index
Symbols
.NET Framework 41
A
access rights 99–100
site security groups 209
sites 212, 221
access settings 99–100
modifying user access settings 104
security groups 106
accounting
permissions 101
security group 107
accounts
anonymous web access 21
COMPANY 79
EMAILUSER 79, 338, 343
MASTER 79
Microsoft IIS 25
sites 224–225
WEBUSER 79, 338
ACT!, importing from 301, 306
Action Plan Library permissions 101
activating 35
licenses 66
adding 131
adding items to 132
addition, in user-defined fields 141
AddrBks folder 43
Address Book
adding users 91
backing up 284
converting 83
creating 74
employing an existing 82
Escona Tutorial sample 5
exporting data ??–290
importing data 290–301
moving to a different SQL server 313
permissions 100
summary report 333
updating 83
upgrading 83
verification and recovery 287
Address Book entries 127
importing 290–301
verification and recovery 287
Administrator user role 103
ADMN_Config table 364
Advanced Import 290–293
Allow Global Edit privilege 101
Allow manage currencies 103
Allow printing to these destinations 103
Allow private entries privilege 101, 112
Allow public entries privilege 101
Allow Sync Contacts with External clients privilege 102
Allow transfer and import/export 101
alphanumeric functions 142
alphanumeric user-defined fields 127, 142
AND (Maximizer.Data) 391
AND operator in formula user-defined fields 134, 139, 154
anonymous web access account 21
application server 35
application settings for sites 197
arithmetic expressions in 141
arithmetic in user-defined fields 141
ATT files 367
authentication, system accounts 338–339
automated campaigns
fax 182
logging 352
print 182
timeout error 342
troubleshooting 342–343
using wrong character set 343
automated services, print/fax 182
B
backing up
Address Book 284
dictionary file 284
browsers
Mobile Access 217
business partners, Partner Access 224
C
campaigns 127
logging automated campaigns 352
permissions 100
timeout error 342
troubleshooting 342–343
using wrong character set 343
Category field 224
ceiling function 151
character set, Maximizer Email Service 343
CMGR-Email_dd.log file 354
collation, database 76
commands
408
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
ipconfig 40
NETSTAT 337
ping 39
telnet 337
company announcements
security group 107
Company Library
permissions 100
supported file types in Maximizer Web Access 188
verification and recovery 287
COMPANY user account 79
comparing values in formula user-defined fields 153
conditional expressions in 134
Configuration Manager, external sites 221
connectivity
testing network 39
testing SQL Server 37
converting an Address Book 83
creating 131
Crystal Reports
Crystal Reports Users security group 107
Current Users report 67, 334
CustomActions.xml 233
Customer 107
Customer Access 187
activating login account 225
application settings in web.config 197
controlling access 221
customers 224
Escona Tutorial 196
overview 4
security groups 209
setting up 220–227
URL 221
Customer Access Administrator 220
configuration manager 221, 223
Escona Tutorial 195
news manager 221
security group 209
URL 221
Customer Access Configuration Users group 209
customer service
Customer Service Manager user role 103
Customer Service Representative user role 103
importing cases 290–293
permissions 100
customer service cases 127
D
dashboards
creating custom 278
overview 4
SQL queries 277
database
backing up 284
creating an Address Book 74
software system requirements 2
upgrading 83
user-defined field tables and views 371
database collation 76
Date function 148
date functions 148
date user-defined fields 127, 148
Day function 148
Dayofweek function 135, 149
default password 98
Default Web Site
registering MIME types for 32
Default Web Site, Microsoft IIS 191
dictionary file 284
display name (user) 92
division, in user-defined fields 141
DMZ (demilitarized zone) 24
documents
deleting old 328
permissions 100
searching 13, 60
DSNs (data source names)
creating 75
duration user-defined fields 127
E
email
Email Send Service log 353
server 36
service 342
system requirements 3
EMAILUSER account 79, 338, 343
encrypted user-defined fields 127
EQ (Maximizer.Data) 393
Escona Tutorial
Customer Access 196
Customer Access Administrator 195
Maximizer Web Access 194
Partner Access 196
Partner Access Administrator 195
restoring Address Book from backup 351
sample Address Book 5
ETF files 367
Event Viewer 352
Excentrics World Components 187
exceptions (Maximizer.Data) 394
exporting
access rights required 101
extensions, file extensions 367
external links, in Maximizer Web Access 213
external sites, see Customer Access or Partner Access
409
security groups 106–112
security groups for sites 221
site security groups 209
user and group setup permissions 100
User ID List report 332
F
field mapping, data imports 295
fields
Category field 224
Full Access field 112
mapping for import 295, 301
Owner field 112
Read Access field 112
file and directory permissions 31
file types
adding support in IIS 32
files
dictionary 284
MaxUpdates.xml 263
types in Maximizer 367
types in Maximizer Web Access Company Library 188
web.config 197
FLIST (Maximizer.Data) 392
floor function 151
folders 130
folders for 130
folders, shared 43
for user-defined fields 130
formula 133
formula user-defined fields 128, 133–134, 141–142, 148, 151
four-letter module codes 356
Full Access field 112
full-text search, SQL 13–17, 60
functions for 142, 148, 151
G
global edit, privileges 101
globalization, sites 238
glossary 399
GoldMine, importing from 301, 308
graphic on site main page 228
groups
access settings 99–100
Accounting security group 107
Company Annoucement Authors security group 107
creating security groups 109
Crystal Reports Users security group 107
Customer Access Administration Users group 209
Customer Access Configuration Users group 209
external site security groups 221
Maximizer Web Access Administration Users group 209
modifying access settings 111
Partner Access Administration Users group 209
Partner Access Configuration Users group 209
permissions 100
privileges 101
record ownership 112
roles 103
H
hard disk space, system requirements 2
HDR files 367
Holiday Editor 401
HTML, links in Maximizer Web Access 213
I
If expressions in formula user-defined fields 134
IIS (Internet Information Services), see Microsoft IIS
importing
access rights required 101
Address Book entries 290–301
customer service cases 290–293
field mapping 295, 301
Knowledge Base articles 290–300
vertical templates 88
installing
licenses 66
Live Update Manager 257
Maximizer 33–69
Maximizer Components for Microsoft IIS 47, 54
Maximizer licenses 66
Maximizer server 47
upgrading from a previous version 44
Web Access 47
Windows login account 42
Workflow Automation Powered by KnowledgeSync 58
IP address 40
ipconfig command 40
items, in user-defined fields 132
K
KEY (Maximizer.Data) 391
Knowledge Base
Knowledge Base approver user role 103
permissions 100
searching 14, 61
L
Len function 143
licenses
installing 66
licensing options for SQL Server 10
LIKE (Maximizer.Data) 393
links, external in Maximizer Web Access 213
LIST (Maximizer.Data) 392
410
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
Live Update 255–265
configuring 264
introduction 256
MaxUpdates.xml 263
Live Update Manager
approving updates 261
configuring 259
downloading updates 260
installing 257
Live Update Wizard 260
testing updates 261
Live Update server
copying files 263
virtual directory 257
Live Update Wizard
Live Update Manager 260
load balancing Microsoft IIS 22
logging
automated campaigns 352
Email Send Service 353
import error log file 300
logging in
Microsoft SQL Server service 10
sites 224–225, 227
logo, customizing on site main page 228
M
MA files 367
MaConfig table 356–357
mailing address permissions 100
mapping fields for import 295, 301
marketing teams 113
report 333
MASTER
password 80
user account 79
MaxExchange
file types 367
Maximizer 108
application server 35
installation 33–69
installing components for Microsoft IIS 47, 54
installing server 47
licenses 66
Maximizer Components for Microsoft IIS 55
Maximizer Email Service
character set 343
connecting to Microsoft SQL Server 339
Maximizer Live Update 265
Maximizer Print/Fax Service, connecting to Microsoft SQL Server
339
Maximizer Web Access 186
Escona Tutorial 194
external links 213
overview 4
security groups 209
supported file types in Company Library 188
URL 221
Maximizer Web Access Administration Users group 209
MaxMobile
synchronization privileges 102
MaxUpdates.xml file 263
MDE files 367
MEC files 367
memory, system requirements 2
MET files 367
MEX files 367
Microsoft .NET Framework 41
Microsoft IIS 19
account configuration 25
adding a machine 368
anonymous web access account 21
changing a site to an application 191
Default Web Site 191
DMZ (demilitarized zone) 24
file and directory permissions 31
installing Maximizer components for 47, 54
load balancing 22
Maximizer Components for Microsoft IIS 55
multiple IIS servers 239
on Windows 2008 345
overview 35
permissions 21
production environment 22
standalone servers 25
system requirements 3
virtual directories 20, 368
Microsoft Internet Explorer WebControls 187
Microsoft Outlook integration with Maximizer Web Access 58
Microsoft Outlook Synchronization
privileges 102
Microsoft SQL Server 35
account validity 338
backing up an Address Book 284
connecting services to 339
connection test 336
database collation 76
DBCC 340
full-text search 13–17, 60
licensing options 10
moving an Address Book 313
passwords 80
service login 10
setting up 9–17
troubleshooting 336, 342
upgrading a Maximizer SQL database 83
user-defined fields 371
verifying connectivity 37
411
Windows Authentication 339
Microsoft SQL Server Reporting 41
Microsoft Word integration with Maximizer Web Access 58
Mid function 144
MIME types
registering 32
Mobile 4
Mobile Access 186, 194, 217
page size limits 218
Modify note properties privilege 102
Modify other users’ general info only privileges 102
Modify other users’ private entries privileges 102
Modify/delete other owners’ notes privileges 102
modifying
group access settings 111
modules, four-letter module codes 356
Month function 149
moving an Address Book 313
MTI files 367
multiplication, in user-defined fields 141
multple-user licensesPLNs (product license numbers), see licenses
MXD files 367
MxData shared folder 43
MXI (Maximizer XML Interface) files 290–293, 367
MxServer shared folder 43
N
NEQ (Maximizer.Data) 393
NETSTAT connection test 337
network
configuration 6
connectivity test 39
News Manager, external sites 221
NLIKE (Maximizer.Data) 393
NOT operator in formula user-defined fields 134, 139, 154
notes
deleting old 328
permissions 100
privileges 102
types 328
verification and recovery 287
numeric functions 151
numeric user-defined fields 128, 151
NWNOTE (Maximizer.Data) 392
O
operating system, system requirements 2
opportunities 127
permissions 100
verification and recovery 287
OR (Maximizer.Data) 391
OR operator in formula user-defined fields 134, 138, 154
OrderDesk, permissions 100
owner field 112
P
page size limits, Mobile Access 218
Partner Access 187
activating login account 225
Admin Users 108
application settings in web.config 197
business partner login 227
business partners 224
Config Users 108
controlling access 221
Escona Tutorial 196
overview 4
removing site access 227
security groups 108, 209
setting up 220–227
URL 221
Partner Access Administrator 220
configuration manager 221, 223
Escona Tutorial 195
news manager 221
security group 209
URL 221
Partner Access Configuration Users group 209
passwords
changing 97
default 98
expiration 79
MASTER user 80
SQL server 80
synchronization 86, 343
system login accounts 79
permissions
file and directory 31
groups 100
users 100
web server 21
per-seat and per-server licensing of SQL Server 10
Pervasive, upgrading a Maximizer Pervasive database 85
PIN, for site access 195, 225–227
ping command 39
preferences
user preferences 120
prefixes for user-defined field database views 371
print/fax service 182
printing
access rights 103
system reports 332
private
entries (privileges) 101
records 112
privileges (users and groups) 101
processor speed, system requirements 2
412
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
public entries (privileges) 101
public records 112
Q
quotas
permissions 101
R
RAM, system requirements 2
RANGE (Maximizer.Data) 394
Read Access field 112
record ownership 112
recovering an Address Book 287
removing installations 44
reporting servicesl
system requirements 3
reports 332–334
current users 67
Installed Workstations report 334
system 332
user-defined field tables and views 371
restoring
Escona Tutorial sample Address Book 351
roles (User’s Roles) 103
Round function 152
S
sales
Sales Manager user role 103
Sales Representative user role 103
sales teams report 333
sales teams 113
sample
Address Book 5
Customer Access Administrator 195
Maximizer Web Access 194
Partner Access Administrator 195
restoring Escona Tutorial Address Book 351
sites 190–196
Search function 144
search string language, Maximizer.Data 390
search string parameter 214
searching, full-text 13, 60
security
file and directory permissions 31
Microsoft IIS 24
privileges 101
security groups 106–112
users and groups 99–100
web server permissions 21
security groups 106–112
access settings 99–100
Accounting security group 107
Company Annoucement Authors security group 107
creating 109
Crystal Reports Users security group 107
Customer Access Administration Users group 209
Customer Access Configuration Users group 209
external sites 221
Maximizer Web Access Administration Users group 209
modifying access settings 111
Partner Access Administration Users group 209
Partner Access Configuration Users group 209
permissions 100
privileges 101
record ownership 112
roles 103
security groups for sites 221
site security groups 209
user and group setup permissions 100
User ID list report 332
servers
CRM system requirements 2
email 36
installing Maximizer 47
Maximizer application 35
Microsoft IIS 22, 35
SQL 35
verifying connectivity 37
services
connecting to SQL Server 339
Maximizer Email Service 342
Maximizer Print/Fax Service 182
Microsoft SQL Server 10
sessionState in web.config 204
setting up 129
settings in MaConfig table 356
shared folders 43
Show hidden items 133
site application settings 197
sites
accessing from the Start menu 221
Address Book login screen 237
application settings in web.config 197
business partners and customers 224
changing to an application 191
Configuration Manager for external sites 221
configuring customer and partner 220–227
creating PINs for access 225–227
Customer Access Administration Users group 209
Customer Access Configuration Users group 209
enabling 189
Escona Tutorial sample sites 190–196
globalization 238
installing to non-default folders 239
Maximizer Web Access Administration Users group 209
413
moving 239
multiple Address Books 239, 241
multiple IIS servers 239
multiple sites 241
News Manager for external sites 221
Partner Access Administration Users group 209
Partner Access Configuration Users group 209
PINs 195
removing access 227
security groups 209
troubleshooting 348
URLs 221
web.config file 197
transferring
access rights required 101
troubleshooting 335–354
automated campaigns 342
campaigns 343
changing a site to an application 191
Microsoft SQL Server 336
sites 348
SQL Server connection 342
Windows Authentication 339
two-tier import 295–297
types 127
types of files in Maximizer 367
SMTP
server 36
timeout error 342
sorting 129
SQL Server, see Microsoft SQL Server
standalone IIS servers 25
starting the Default Web Site in Microsoft IIS 191
Strategy Library permissions 100
Substitute function 145
subtraction, in user-defined fields 141
SvrShare folder 43
synchronization
passwords 343
system
login accounts 79
reports 332
System Field Privileges 104
system messages, displaying 231
system requirements 2
Maximizer CRM 2
SystemMessages.xml
elements 232
example 233
T
table user-defined fields 128, 132
tables
ADMN_Config 364
MaConfig 356–357
user-defined field table prefixes 371
teams
report 333
sales and marketing 113
Telnet 337
templates
troubleshooting web access templates 348
testing
network connectivity 39
SQL Server connection 37, 336
updates for Live Update 261
Text function 146
U
uninstalling 44
updating
Maximizer 265
upgrading
Address Book 83
Maximizer 44
URLs for sites 221
User ID List report 332
user-defined fields 127, 129–131, 133
database tables and views 371
permissions 100
report 332
verification and recovery 288
user-defined fields for 127
userdict.lex file 284
users 127
access rights and settings 99–100
access rights for sites 212
adding to Address Book 91
changing password 97
Current Users report 334
current users report 67
modifying user access settings 104
permissions 100
preferences 120
privileges 101
record ownership 112
security groups for sites 221
site security groups 209
system login accounts 79
user and group setup permissions 100
User ID List report 332
User’s Roles 103
V
Value function 147
verify and recover Address Book 287
vertical templates 88
414
Maximizer CRM 2018
Administrator’s Guide
video resolution, system requirements 2
views, user-defined field view prefixes 371
virtual directories in Microsoft IIS 20, 368
W
Web Access
Customer and Partner Access Administrator 220
customize graphic on main page 228
installing 47
overview 4
Web Access site settings 197
web access sites, enabling 189
web server
permissions 21
Web.Config 197
web.config 197
WEBUSER account 79, 338, 348
Windows Authentication 339
MaConfig setting 339
Web Access 205
Windows Event Viewer 352
WNOTE (Maximizer.Data) 392
Workflow Automation Powered by KnowledgeSync
installing 58
workstation
Installed Workstations report 334
X
XML files 290–293
Y
Year function 150
yes/no user-defined fields 128
Download PDF
Similar pages